DragonFly On-Line Manual Pages

POSTCONF(5) DragonFly File Formats Manual POSTCONF(5)

NAME
postconf - Postfix configuration parameters

SYNOPSIS
postconf parameter ...

postconf -e "parameter=value" ...

DESCRIPTION
The Postfix main.cf configuration file specifies parameters that
control the operation of the Postfix mail system. Typically the file
contains only a small subset of all parameters; parameters not
specified are left at their default values.

The general format of the main.cf file is as follows:

o Each logical line has the form "parameter = value". Whitespace
around the "=" is ignored, as is whitespace at the end of a
logical line.

o Empty lines and whitespace-only lines are ignored, as are lines
whose first non-whitespace character is a `#'.

o A logical line starts with non-whitespace text. A line that
starts with whitespace continues a logical line.

o A parameter value may refer to other parameters.

o The expressions "$name" and "${name}" are recursively
replaced with the value of the named parameter. The
parameter name must contain only characters from the set
[a-zA-Z0-9_]. An undefined parameter value is replaced
with the empty value.

o The expressions "${name?value}" and "${name?{value}}" are
replaced with "value" when "$name" is non-empty. The
parameter name must contain only characters from the set
[a-zA-Z0-9_]. These forms are supported with Postfix
versions >= 2.2 and >= 3.0, respectively.

o The expressions "${name:value}" and "${name:{value}}" are
replaced with "value" when "$name" is empty. The
parameter name must contain only characters from the set
[a-zA-Z0-9_]. These forms are supported with Postfix
versions >= 2.2 and >= 3.0, respectively.

o The expression "${name?{value1}:{value2}}" is replaced
with "value1" when "$name" is non-empty, and with
"value2" when "$name" is empty. The "{}" is required for
"value1", optional for "value2". The parameter name must
contain only characters from the set [a-zA-Z0-9_]. This
form is supported with Postfix versions >= 3.0.

o The first item inside "${...}" may be a relational
expression of the form: "{value3} == {value4}". Besides
the "==" (equality) operator Postfix supports "!="
(inequality), "<", "<=", ">=", and ">". The comparison is
numerical when both operands are all digits, otherwise
the comparison is lexicographical. These forms are
supported with Postfix versions >= 3.0.

o Each "value" is subject to recursive named parameter and
relational expression evaluation, except where noted.

o Whitespace before or after each "{value}" is ignored.

o Specify "$$" to produce a single "$" character.

o The legacy form "$(...)" is equivalent to the preferred
form "${...}".

o When the same parameter is defined multiple times, only the last
instance is remembered.

o Otherwise, the order of main.cf parameter definitions does not
matter.

The remainder of this document is a description of all Postfix
configuration parameters. Default values are shown after the parameter
name in parentheses, and can be looked up with the "postconf -d"
command.

Note: this is not an invitation to make changes to Postfix
configuration parameters. Unnecessary changes can impair the operation
of the mail system.

2bounce_notice_recipient (default: postmaster)
The recipient of undeliverable mail that cannot be returned to the
sender. This feature is enabled with the notify_classes parameter.

access_map_defer_code (default: 450)
The numerical Postfix SMTP server response code for an access(5) map
"defer" action, including "defer_if_permit" or "defer_if_reject". Prior
to Postfix 2.6, the response is hard-coded as "450".

Do not change this unless you have a complete understanding of RFC
5321.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.6 and later.

access_map_reject_code (default: 554)
The numerical Postfix SMTP server response code for an access(5) map
"reject" action.

Do not change this unless you have a complete understanding of RFC
5321.

address_verify_cache_cleanup_interval (default: 12h)
The amount of time between verify(8) address verification database
cleanup runs. This feature requires that the database supports the
"delete" and "sequence" operators. Specify a zero interval to disable
database cleanup.

After each database cleanup run, the verify(8) daemon logs the number
of entries that were retained and dropped. A cleanup run is logged as
"partial" when the daemon terminates early after "postfix reload",
"postfix stop", or no requests for $max_idle seconds.

Specify a non-negative time value (an integral value plus an optional
one-letter suffix that specifies the time unit). Time units: s
(seconds), m (minutes), h (hours), d (days), w (weeks). The default
time unit is h (hours).

This feature is available in Postfix 2.7.

address_verify_default_transport (default: $default_transport)
Overrides the default_transport parameter setting for address
verification probes.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.1 and later.

address_verify_local_transport (default: $local_transport)
Overrides the local_transport parameter setting for address
verification probes.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.1 and later.

address_verify_map (default: see postconf -d output)
Lookup table for persistent address verification status storage. The
table is maintained by the verify(8) service, and is opened before the
process releases privileges.

The lookup table is persistent by default (Postfix 2.7 and later).
Specify an empty table name to keep the information in volatile memory
which is lost after "postfix reload" or "postfix stop". This is the
default with Postfix version 2.6 and earlier.

Specify a location in a file system that will not fill up. If the
database becomes corrupted, the world comes to an end. To recover,
delete (NOT: truncate) the file and do "postfix reload".

Postfix daemon processes do not use root privileges when opening this
file (Postfix 2.5 and later). The file must therefore be stored under
a Postfix-owned directory such as the data_directory. As a migration
aid, an attempt to open the file under a non-Postfix directory is
redirected to the Postfix-owned data_directory, and a warning is
logged.

Examples:

address_verify_map = hash:/var/lib/postfix/verify
address_verify_map = btree:/var/lib/postfix/verify

This feature is available in Postfix 2.1 and later.

address_verify_negative_cache (default: yes)
Enable caching of failed address verification probe results. When this
feature is enabled, the cache may pollute quickly with garbage. When
this feature is disabled, Postfix will generate an address probe for
every lookup.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.1 and later.

address_verify_negative_expire_time (default: 3d)
The time after which a failed probe expires from the address
verification cache.

Specify a non-zero time value (an integral value plus an optional
one-letter suffix that specifies the time unit). Time units: s
(seconds), m (minutes), h (hours), d (days), w (weeks). The default
time unit is d (days).

This feature is available in Postfix 2.1 and later.

address_verify_negative_refresh_time (default: 3h)
The time after which a failed address verification probe needs to be
refreshed.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.1 and later.

address_verify_pending_request_limit (default: see postconf -d output)
A safety limit that prevents address verification requests from
overwhelming the Postfix queue. By default, the number of pending
requests is limited to 1/4 of the active queue maximum size
(qmgr_message_active_limit). The queue manager enforces the limit by
tempfailing requests that exceed the limit. This affects only unknown
addresses and inactive addresses that have expired, because the
verify(8) daemon automatically refreshes an active address before it
expires.

This feature is available in Postfix 3.1 and later.

address_verify_poll_count (default: normal: 3, overload: 1)
How many times to query the verify(8) service for the completion of an
address verification request in progress.

By default, the Postfix SMTP server polls the verify(8) service up to
three times under non-overload conditions, and only once when under
overload. With Postfix version 2.5 and earlier, the SMTP server always
polls the verify(8) service up to three times by default.

Specify 1 to implement a crude form of greylisting, that is, always
defer the first delivery request for a new address.

Examples:

# Postfix <= 2.6 default
address_verify_poll_count = 3
# Poor man's greylisting
address_verify_poll_count = 1

This feature is available in Postfix 2.1 and later.

address_verify_poll_delay (default: 3s)
The delay between queries for the completion of an address verification
request in progress.

The default polling delay is 3 seconds.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.1 and later.

address_verify_positive_expire_time (default: 31d)
The time after which a successful probe expires from the address
verification cache.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.1 and later.

address_verify_positive_refresh_time (default: 7d)
The time after which a successful address verification probe needs to
be refreshed. The address verification status is not updated when the
probe fails (optimistic caching).

This feature is available in Postfix 2.1 and later.

address_verify_relay_transport (default: $relay_transport)
Overrides the relay_transport parameter setting for address
verification probes.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.1 and later.

address_verify_relayhost (default: $relayhost)
Overrides the relayhost parameter setting for address verification
probes. This information can be overruled with the transport(5) table.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.1 and later.

address_verify_sender (default: $double_bounce_sender)
The sender address to use in address verification probes; prior to
Postfix 2.5 the default was "postmaster". To avoid problems with
address probes that are sent in response to address probes, the Postfix
SMTP server excludes the probe sender address from all SMTPD access
blocks.

Specify an empty value (address_verify_sender =) or <> if you want to
use the null sender address. Beware, some sites reject mail from <>,
even though RFCs require that such addresses be accepted.

Examples:

address_verify_sender = <>
address_verify_sender = postmaster@mydomain

This feature is available in Postfix 2.1 and later.

address_verify_sender_dependent_default_transport_maps (default:
$sender_dependent_default_transport_maps)
Overrides the sender_dependent_default_transport_maps parameter setting
for address verification probes.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.7 and later.

address_verify_sender_dependent_relayhost_maps (default:
$sender_dependent_relayhost_maps)
Overrides the sender_dependent_relayhost_maps parameter setting for
address verification probes.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

address_verify_sender_ttl (default: 0s)
The time between changes in the time-dependent portion of address
verification probe sender addresses. The time-dependent portion is
appended to the localpart of the address specified with the
address_verify_sender parameter. This feature is ignored when the probe
sender addresses is the null sender, i.e. the address_verify_sender
value is empty or <>.

Historically, the probe sender address was fixed. This has caused such
addresses to end up on spammer mailing lists, and has resulted in
wasted network and processing resources.

To enable time-dependent probe sender addresses, specify a non-zero
time value. Specify a value of at least several hours, to avoid
problems with senders that use greylisting. Avoid nice TTL values, to
make the result less predictable.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.9 and later.

address_verify_service_name (default: verify)
The name of the verify(8) address verification service. This service
maintains the status of sender and/or recipient address verification
probes, and generates probes on request by other Postfix processes.

address_verify_transport_maps (default: $transport_maps)
Overrides the transport_maps parameter setting for address verification
probes.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.1 and later.

address_verify_virtual_transport (default: $virtual_transport)
Overrides the virtual_transport parameter setting for address
verification probes.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.1 and later.

alias_database (default: see postconf -d output)
The alias databases for local(8) delivery that are updated with
"newaliases" or with "sendmail -bi".

This is a separate configuration parameter because not all the tables
specified with $alias_maps have to be local files.

Examples:

alias_database = hash:/etc/aliases
alias_database = hash:/etc/mail/aliases

alias_maps (default: see postconf -d output)
The alias databases that are used for local(8) delivery. See aliases(5)
for syntax details. Specify zero or more "type:name" lookup tables,
separated by whitespace or comma. Tables will be searched in the
specified order until a match is found. Note: these lookups are
recursive.

The default list is system dependent. On systems with NIS, the default
is to search the local alias database, then the NIS alias database.

If you change the alias database, run "postalias /etc/aliases" (or
wherever your system stores the mail alias file), or simply run
"newaliases" to build the necessary DBM or DB file.

The local(8) delivery agent disallows regular expression substitution
of $1 etc. in alias_maps, because that would open a security hole.

The local(8) delivery agent will silently ignore requests to use the
proxymap(8) server within alias_maps. Instead it will open the table
directly. Before Postfix version 2.2, the local(8) delivery agent will
terminate with a fatal error.

Examples:

alias_maps = hash:/etc/aliases, nis:mail.aliases
alias_maps = hash:/etc/aliases

allow_mail_to_commands (default: alias, forward)
Restrict local(8) mail delivery to external commands. The default is
to disallow delivery to "|command" in :include: files (see aliases(5)
for the text that defines this terminology).

Specify zero or more of: alias, forward or include, in order to allow
commands in aliases(5), .forward files or in :include: files,
respectively.

Example:

allow_mail_to_commands = alias,forward,include

allow_mail_to_files (default: alias, forward)
Restrict local(8) mail delivery to external files. The default is to
disallow "/file/name" destinations in :include: files (see aliases(5)
for the text that defines this terminology).

Specify zero or more of: alias, forward or include, in order to allow
"/file/name" destinations in aliases(5), .forward files and in
:include: files, respectively.

Example:

allow_mail_to_files = alias,forward,include

allow_min_user (default: no)
Allow a sender or recipient address to have `-' as the first character.
By default, this is not allowed, to avoid accidents with software that
passes email addresses via the command line. Such software would not be
able to distinguish a malicious address from a bona fide command-line
option. Although this can be prevented by inserting a "--" option
terminator into the command line, this is difficult to enforce
consistently and globally.

As of Postfix version 2.5, this feature is implemented by
trivial-rewrite(8). With earlier versions this feature was implemented
by qmgr(8) and was limited to recipient addresses only.

allow_percent_hack (default: yes)
Enable the rewriting of the form "user%domain" to "user@domain". This
is enabled by default.

Note: as of Postfix version 2.2, message header address rewriting
happens only when one of the following conditions is true:

o The message is received with the Postfix sendmail(1) command,

o The message is received from a network client that matches
$local_header_rewrite_clients,

o The message is received from the network, and the
remote_header_rewrite_domain parameter specifies a non-empty
value.

To get the behavior before Postfix version 2.2, specify
"local_header_rewrite_clients = static:all".

Example:

allow_percent_hack = no

allow_srv_lookup_fallback (default: no)
When SRV record lookup fails or no SRV record exists, fall back to MX
or IP address lookup as if SRV record lookup was not enabled.

This feature is available in Postfix 3.8 and later.

allow_untrusted_routing (default: no)
Forward mail with sender-specified routing (user[@%!]remote[@%!]site)
from untrusted clients to destinations matching $relay_domains.

By default, this feature is turned off. This closes a nasty open relay
loophole where a backup MX host can be tricked into forwarding junk
mail to a primary MX host which then spams it out to the world.

This parameter also controls if non-local addresses with
sender-specified routing can match Postfix access tables. By default,
such addresses cannot match Postfix access tables, because the address
is ambiguous.

alternate_config_directories (default: empty)
A list of non-default Postfix configuration directories that may be
specified with "-c config_directory" on the command line (in the case
of sendmail(1), with the "-C" option), or via the MAIL_CONFIG
environment parameter.

This list must be specified in the default Postfix main.cf file, and
will be used by set-gid Postfix commands such as postqueue(1) and
postdrop(1).

Specify absolute pathnames, separated by comma or space. Note: $name
expansion is not supported.

always_add_missing_headers (default: no)
Always add (Resent-) From:, To:, Date: or Message-ID: headers when not
present. Postfix 2.6 and later add these headers only when clients
match the local_header_rewrite_clients parameter setting. Earlier
Postfix versions always add these headers; this may break DKIM
signatures that cover non-existent headers. The
undisclosed_recipients_header parameter setting determines whether a
To: header will be added.

always_bcc (default: empty)
Optional address that receives a "blind carbon copy" of each message
that is received by the Postfix mail system.

Note: with Postfix 2.3 and later the BCC address is added as if it was
specified with NOTIFY=NONE. The sender will not be notified when the
BCC address is undeliverable, as long as all down-stream software
implements RFC 3461.

Note: with Postfix 2.2 and earlier the sender will be notified when the
BCC address is undeliverable.

Note: automatic BCC recipients are produced only for new mail. To
avoid mailer loops, automatic BCC recipients are not generated after
Postfix forwards mail internally, or after Postfix generates mail
itself.

anvil_rate_time_unit (default: 60s)
The time unit over which client connection rates and other rates are
calculated.

This feature is implemented by the anvil(8) service which is available
in Postfix version 2.2 and later.

The default interval is relatively short. Because of the high frequency
of updates, the anvil(8) server uses volatile memory only. Thus,
information is lost whenever the process terminates.

anvil_status_update_time (default: 600s)
How frequently the anvil(8) connection and rate limiting server logs
peak usage information.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.

append_at_myorigin (default: yes)
With locally submitted mail, append the string "@$myorigin" to mail
addresses without domain information. With remotely submitted mail,
append the string "@$remote_header_rewrite_domain" instead.

Note 1: this feature is enabled by default and must not be turned off.
Postfix does not support domain-less addresses.

Note 2: with Postfix version 2.2, message header address rewriting
happens only when one of the following conditions is true:

o The message is received with the Postfix sendmail(1) command,

o The message is received from a network client that matches
$local_header_rewrite_clients,

o The message is received from the network, and the
remote_header_rewrite_domain parameter specifies a non-empty
value.

To get the behavior before Postfix version 2.2, specify
"local_header_rewrite_clients = static:all".

append_dot_mydomain (default: Postfix >= 3.0: no, Postfix < 3.0: yes)
With locally submitted mail, append the string ".$mydomain" to
addresses that have no ".domain" information. With remotely submitted
mail, append the string ".$remote_header_rewrite_domain" instead.

Note 1: When disabled (Postfix 3.0 and later), users will not be able
to send mail to "user@partialdomainname" but will have to specify full
domain names instead.

Note 2: with Postfix version 2.2, message header address rewriting
happens only when one of the following conditions is true:

o The message is received with the Postfix sendmail(1) command,

o The message is received from a network client that matches
$local_header_rewrite_clients,

o The message is received from the network, and the
remote_header_rewrite_domain parameter specifies a non-empty
value.

To get the behavior before Postfix version 2.2, specify
"local_header_rewrite_clients = static:all".

application_event_drain_time (default: 100s)
How long the postkick(1) command waits for a request to enter the
Postfix daemon process input buffer before giving up.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.1 and later.

authorized_flush_users (default: static:anyone)
List of users who are authorized to flush the queue.

By default, all users are allowed to flush the queue. Access is always
granted if the invoking user is the super-user or the $mail_owner user.
Otherwise, the real UID of the process is looked up in the system
password file, and access is granted only if the corresponding login
name is on the access list. The username "unknown" is used for
processes whose real UID is not found in the password file.

Specify a list of user names, "/file/name" or "type:table" patterns,
separated by commas and/or whitespace. The list is matched left to
right, and the search stops on the first match. A "/file/name" pattern
is replaced by its contents; a "type:table" lookup table is matched
when a name matches a lookup key (the lookup result is ignored).
Continue long lines by starting the next line with whitespace. Specify
"!pattern" to exclude a name from the list. The form "!/file/name" is
supported only in Postfix version 2.4 and later.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.

authorized_mailq_users (default: static:anyone)
List of users who are authorized to view the queue.

By default, all users are allowed to view the queue. Access is always
granted if the invoking user is the super-user or the $mail_owner user.
Otherwise, the real UID of the process is looked up in the system
password file, and access is granted only if the corresponding login
name is on the access list. The username "unknown" is used for
processes whose real UID is not found in the password file.

Specify a list of user names, "/file/name" or "type:table" patterns,
separated by commas and/or whitespace. The list is matched left to
right, and the search stops on the first match. A "/file/name" pattern
is replaced by its contents; a "type:table" lookup table is matched
when a name matches a lookup key (the lookup result is ignored).
Continue long lines by starting the next line with whitespace. Specify
"!pattern" to exclude a user name from the list. The form "!/file/name"
is supported only in Postfix version 2.4 and later.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.

authorized_submit_users (default: static:anyone)
List of users who are authorized to submit mail with the sendmail(1)
command (and with the privileged postdrop(1) helper command).

By default, all users are allowed to submit mail. Otherwise, the real
UID of the process is looked up in the system password file, and access
is granted only if the corresponding login name is on the access list.
The username "unknown" is used for processes whose real UID is not
found in the password file. To deny mail submission access to all users
specify an empty list.

Specify a list of user names, "/file/name" or "type:table" patterns,
separated by commas and/or whitespace. The list is matched left to
right, and the search stops on the first match. A "/file/name" pattern
is replaced by its contents; a "type:table" lookup table is matched
when a name matches a lookup key (the lookup result is ignored).
Continue long lines by starting the next line with whitespace. Specify
"!pattern" to exclude a user name from the list. The form "!/file/name"
is supported only in Postfix version 2.4 and later.

Example:

authorized_submit_users = !www, static:all

This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.

authorized_verp_clients (default: $mynetworks)
What remote SMTP clients are allowed to specify the XVERP command.
This command requests that mail be delivered one recipient at a time
with a per recipient return address.

By default, only trusted clients are allowed to specify XVERP.

This parameter was introduced with Postfix version 1.1. Postfix
version 2.1 renamed this parameter to smtpd_authorized_verp_clients and
changed the default to none.

Specify a list of network/netmask patterns, separated by commas and/or
whitespace. The mask specifies the number of bits in the network part
of a host address. You can also specify hostnames or .domain names (the
initial dot causes the domain to match any name below it),
"/file/name" or "type:table" patterns. A "/file/name" pattern is
replaced by its contents; a "type:table" lookup table is matched when a
table entry matches a lookup string (the lookup result is ignored).
Continue long lines by starting the next line with whitespace. Specify
"!pattern" to exclude an address or network block from the list. The
form "!/file/name" is supported only in Postfix version 2.4 and later.

Note: IP version 6 address information must be specified inside [] in
the authorized_verp_clients value, and in files specified with
"/file/name". IP version 6 addresses contain the ":" character, and
would otherwise be confused with a "type:table" pattern.

backwards_bounce_logfile_compatibility (default: yes)
Produce additional bounce(8) logfile records that can be read by
Postfix versions before 2.0. The current and more extensible "name =
value" format is needed in order to implement more sophisticated
functionality.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.1 and later.

berkeley_db_create_buffer_size (default: 16777216)
The per-table I/O buffer size for programs that create Berkeley DB hash
or btree tables. Specify a byte count.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.0 and later.

berkeley_db_read_buffer_size (default: 131072)
The per-table I/O buffer size for programs that read Berkeley DB hash
or btree tables. Specify a byte count.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.0 and later.

best_mx_transport (default: empty)
Where the Postfix SMTP client should deliver mail when it detects a
"mail loops back to myself" error condition. This happens when the
local MTA is the best SMTP mail exchanger for a destination not listed
in $mydestination, $inet_interfaces, $proxy_interfaces,
$virtual_alias_domains, or $virtual_mailbox_domains. By default, the
Postfix SMTP client returns such mail as undeliverable.

Specify, for example, "best_mx_transport = local" to pass the mail from
the Postfix SMTP client to the local(8) delivery agent. You can specify
any message delivery "transport" or "transport:nexthop" that is defined
in the master.cf file. See the transport(5) manual page for the syntax
and meaning of "transport" or "transport:nexthop".

However, this feature is expensive because it ties up a Postfix SMTP
client process while the local(8) delivery agent is doing its work. It
is more efficient (for Postfix) to list all hosted domains in a table
or database.

biff (default: yes)
Whether or not to use the local biff service. This service sends "new
mail" notifications to users who have requested new mail notification
with the UNIX command "biff y".

For compatibility reasons this feature is on by default. On systems
with lots of interactive users, the biff service can be a performance
drain. Specify "biff = no" in main.cf to disable.

body_checks (default: empty)
Optional lookup tables for content inspection as specified in the
body_checks(5) manual page.

Note: with Postfix versions before 2.0, these rules inspect all content
after the primary message headers.

body_checks_size_limit (default: 51200)
How much text in a message body segment (or attachment, if you prefer
to use that term) is subjected to body_checks inspection. The amount
of text is limited to avoid scanning huge attachments.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.0 and later.

bounce_notice_recipient (default: postmaster)
The recipient of postmaster notifications with the message headers of
mail that Postfix did not deliver and of SMTP conversation transcripts
of mail that Postfix did not receive. This feature is enabled with the
notify_classes parameter.

bounce_queue_lifetime (default: 5d)
Consider a bounce message as undeliverable, when delivery fails with a
temporary error, and the time in the queue has reached the
bounce_queue_lifetime limit. By default, this limit is the same as for
regular mail.

Specify 0 when mail delivery should be tried only once.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.1 and later.

bounce_service_name (default: bounce)
The name of the bounce(8) service. This service maintains a record of
failed delivery attempts and generates non-delivery notifications.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.0 and later.

bounce_size_limit (default: 50000)
The maximal amount of original message text that is sent in a
non-delivery notification. Specify a byte count. A message is returned
as either message/rfc822 (the complete original) or as
text/rfc822-headers (the headers only). With Postfix version 2.4 and
earlier, a message is always returned as message/rfc822 and is
truncated when it exceeds the size limit.

Notes:

o If you increase this limit, then you should increase the
mime_nesting_limit value proportionally.

o Be careful when making changes. Excessively large values will
result in the loss of non-delivery notifications, when a bounce
message size exceeds a local or remote MTA's message size limit.

bounce_template_file (default: empty)
Pathname of a configuration file with bounce message templates. These
override the built-in templates of delivery status notification (DSN)
messages for undeliverable mail, delayed mail, successful delivery, or
delivery verification. The bounce(5) manual page describes how to edit
and test template files.

Template message body text may contain $name references to Postfix
configuration parameters. The result of $name expansion can be
previewed with "postconf -b file_name" before the file is placed into
the Postfix configuration directory.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

broken_sasl_auth_clients (default: no)
Enable interoperability with remote SMTP clients that implement an
obsolete version of the AUTH command (RFC 4954). Examples of such
clients are MicroSoft Outlook Express version 4 and MicroSoft Exchange
version 5.0.

Specify "broken_sasl_auth_clients = yes" to have Postfix advertise AUTH
support in a non-standard way.

canonical_classes (default: envelope_sender, envelope_recipient,
header_sender, header_recipient)
What addresses are subject to canonical_maps address mapping. By
default, canonical_maps address mapping is applied to envelope sender
and recipient addresses, and to header sender and header recipient
addresses.

Specify one or more of: envelope_sender, envelope_recipient,
header_sender, header_recipient

This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.

canonical_maps (default: empty)
Optional address mapping lookup tables for message headers and
envelopes. The mapping is applied to both sender and recipient
addresses, in both envelopes and in headers, as controlled with the
canonical_classes parameter. This is typically used to clean up dirty
addresses from legacy mail systems, or to replace login names by
Firstname.Lastname. The table format and lookups are documented in
canonical(5). For an overview of Postfix address manipulations see the
ADDRESS_REWRITING_README document.

Specify zero or more "type:name" lookup tables, separated by whitespace
or comma. Tables will be searched in the specified order until a match
is found. Note: these lookups are recursive.

If you use this feature, run "postmap /usr/local/etc/postfix/canonical"
to build the necessary DBM or DB file after every change. The changes
will become visible after a minute or so. Use "postfix reload" to
eliminate the delay.

Note: with Postfix version 2.2, message header address mapping happens
only when message header address rewriting is enabled:

o The message is received with the Postfix sendmail(1) command,

o The message is received from a network client that matches
$local_header_rewrite_clients,

o The message is received from the network, and the
remote_header_rewrite_domain parameter specifies a non-empty
value.

To get the behavior before Postfix version 2.2, specify
"local_header_rewrite_clients = static:all".

Examples:

canonical_maps = dbm:$config_directory/canonical
canonical_maps = hash:$config_directory/canonical

cleanup_service_name (default: cleanup)
The name of the cleanup(8) service. This service rewrites addresses
into the standard form, and performs canonical(5) address mapping and
virtual(5) aliasing.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.0 and later.

command_directory (default: see postconf -d output)
The location of all postfix administrative commands.

command_execution_directory (default: empty)
The local(8) delivery agent working directory for delivery to external
commands. Failure to change directory causes the delivery to be
deferred.

The command_execution_directory value is not subject to Postfix
configuration parameter $name expansion. Instead, the following $name
expansions are done on command_execution_directory before the directory
is used. Expansion happens in the context of the delivery request. The
result of $name expansion is filtered with the character set that is
specified with the execution_directory_expansion_filter parameter.

$user The recipient's username.

$shell The recipient's login shell pathname.

$home The recipient's home directory.

$recipient
The full recipient address.

$extension
The optional recipient address extension.

$domain
The recipient domain.

$local The entire recipient localpart.

$recipient_delimiter
The address extension delimiter that was found in the recipient
address (Postfix 2.11 and later), or the system-wide recipient
address extension delimiter (Postfix 2.10 and earlier).

${name?value}

${name?{value}} (Postfix >= 3.0)
Expands to value when $name is non-empty.

${name:value}

${name:{value}} (Postfix >= 3.0)
Expands to value when $name is empty.

${name?{value1}:{value2}} (Postfix >= 3.0)
Expands to value1 when $name is non-empty, value2 otherwise.

Instead of $name you can also specify ${name} or $(name).

This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.

command_expansion_filter (default: see postconf -d output)
Restrict the characters that the local(8) delivery agent allows in
$name expansions of $mailbox_command and $command_execution_directory.
Characters outside the allowed set are replaced by underscores.

command_time_limit (default: 1000s)
Time limit for delivery to external commands. This limit is used by the
local(8) delivery agent, and is the default time limit for delivery by
the pipe(8) delivery agent.

Note: if you set this time limit to a large value you must update the
global ipc_timeout parameter as well.

compatibility_level (default: 0)
A safety net that causes Postfix to run with backwards-compatible
default settings after an upgrade to a newer Postfix version.

With backwards compatibility turned on (the main.cf compatibility_level
value is less than the Postfix built-in value), Postfix looks for
settings that are left at their implicit default value, and logs a
message when a backwards-compatible default setting is required.

using backwards-compatible default setting name=value
to [accept a specific client request]

using backwards-compatible default setting name=value
to [enable specific Postfix behavior]

See COMPATIBILITY_README for specific message details. If such a
message is logged in the context of a legitimate request, the system
administrator should make the backwards-compatible setting permanent in
main.cf or master.cf, for example:

# postconf name=value
# postfix reload

When no more backwards-compatible settings need to be made permanent,
the administrator should turn off backwards compatibility by updating
the compatibility_level setting in main.cf:

# postconf compatibility_level=N
# postfix reload

For N specify the number that is logged in your postfix(1) warning
message:

warning: To disable backwards compatibility use "postconf
compatibility_level=N" and "postfix reload"

Starting with Postfix version 3.6, the compatibility level in the above
warning message is the Postfix version that introduced the last
incompatible change. The level is formatted as major.minor.patch, where
patch is usually omitted and defaults to zero. Earlier compatibility
levels are 0, 1 and 2.

NOTE: this also introduces support for the "<level", "<=level", and
other operators to compare compatibility levels. With the standard
operators "<", "<=", etc., compatibility level "3.10" would be smaller
than "3.9" which is undesirable.

This feature is available in Postfix 3.0 and later.

config_directory (default: see postconf -d output)
The default location of the Postfix main.cf and master.cf configuration
files. This can be overruled via the following mechanisms:

o The MAIL_CONFIG environment variable (daemon processes and
commands).

o The "-c" command-line option (commands only).

With Postfix commands that run with set-gid privileges, a
config_directory override either requires root privileges, or it
requires that the directory is listed with the
alternate_config_directories parameter in the default main.cf file.

confirm_delay_cleared (default: no)
After sending a "your message is delayed" notification, inform the
sender when the delay clears up. This can result in a sudden burst of
notifications at the end of a prolonged network outage, and is
therefore disabled by default.

See also: delay_warning_time.

This feature is available in Postfix 3.0 and later.

connection_cache_protocol_timeout (default: 5s)
Time limit for connection cache connect, send or receive operations.
The time limit is enforced in the client.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

connection_cache_service_name (default: scache)
The name of the scache(8) connection cache service. This service
maintains a limited pool of cached sessions.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.

connection_cache_status_update_time (default: 600s)
How frequently the scache(8) server logs usage statistics with
connection cache hit and miss rates for logical destinations and for
physical endpoints.

connection_cache_ttl_limit (default: 2s)
The maximal time-to-live value that the scache(8) connection cache
server allows. Requests that specify a larger TTL will be stored with
the maximum allowed TTL. The purpose of this additional control is to
protect the infrastructure against careless people. The cache TTL is
already bounded by $max_idle.

content_filter (default: empty)
After the message is queued, send the entire message to the specified
transport:destination. The transport name specifies the first field of
a mail delivery agent definition in master.cf; the syntax of the
next-hop destination is described in the manual page of the
corresponding delivery agent. More information about external content
filters is in the Postfix FILTER_README file.

Notes:

o This setting has lower precedence than a FILTER action that is
specified in an access(5), header_checks(5) or body_checks(5)
table.

o The meaning of an empty next-hop filter destination is version
dependent. Postfix 2.7 and later will use the recipient domain;
earlier versions will use $myhostname. Specify
"default_filter_nexthop = $myhostname" for compatibility with
Postfix 2.6 or earlier, or specify a content_filter value with
an explicit next-hop destination.

cyrus_sasl_config_path (default: empty)
Search path for Cyrus SASL application configuration files, currently
used only to locate the $smtpd_sasl_path.conf file. Specify zero or
more directories separated by a colon character, or an empty value to
use Cyrus SASL's built-in search path.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.5 and later when compiled with
Cyrus SASL 2.1.22 or later.

daemon_directory (default: see postconf -d output)
The directory with Postfix support programs and daemon programs. These
should not be invoked directly by humans. The directory must be owned
by root.

daemon_table_open_error_is_fatal (default: no)
How a Postfix daemon process handles errors while opening lookup
tables: gradual degradation or immediate termination.

no (default)
Gradual degradation: a daemon process logs a message of type
"error" and continues execution with reduced functionality.
Features that do not depend on the unavailable table will work
normally, while features that depend on the table will result in
a type "warning" message.
When the notify_classes parameter value contains the "data"
class, the Postfix SMTP server and client will report
transcripts of sessions with an error because a table is
unavailable.

yes (historical behavior)
Immediate termination: a daemon process logs a type "fatal"
message and terminates immediately. This option reduces the
number of possible code paths through Postfix, and may therefore
be slightly more secure than the default.

For the sake of sanity, the number of type "error" messages is limited
to 13 over the lifetime of a daemon process.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.9 and later.

daemon_timeout (default: 18000s)
How much time a Postfix daemon process may take to handle a request
before it is terminated by a built-in watchdog timer.

data_directory (default: see postconf -d output)
The directory with Postfix-writable data files (for example: caches,
pseudo-random numbers). This directory must be owned by the mail_owner
account, and must not be shared with non-Postfix software.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.5 and later.

debug_peer_level (default: 2)
The increment in verbose logging level when a nexthop destination,
remote client or server name or network address matches a pattern given
with the debug_peer_list parameter.

Per-nexthop debug logging is available in Postfix 3.6 and later.

debug_peer_list (default: empty)
Optional list of nexthop destination, remote client or server name or
network address patterns that, if matched, cause the verbose logging
level to increase by the amount specified in $debug_peer_level.

Per-nexthop debug logging is available in Postfix 3.6 and later.

Specify domain names, network/netmask patterns, "/file/name" patterns
or "type:table" lookup tables. The right-hand side result from
"type:table" lookups is ignored.

Pattern matching of domain names is controlled by the presence or
absence of "debug_peer_list" in the parent_domain_matches_subdomains
parameter value.

Examples:

debug_peer_list = 127.0.0.1
debug_peer_list = example.com

debugger_command (default: empty)
The external command to execute when a Postfix daemon program is
invoked with the -D option.

Use "command .. & sleep 5" so that the debugger can attach before the
process marches on. If you use an X-based debugger, be sure to set up
your XAUTHORITY environment variable before starting Postfix.

Note: the command is subject to $name expansion, before it is passed to
the default command interpreter. Specify "$$" to produce a single "$"
character.

Example:

debugger_command =
PATH=/usr/bin:/usr/X11R6/bin
ddd $daemon_directory/$process_name $process_id & sleep 5

default_database_type (default: see postconf -d output)
The default database type for use in newaliases(1), postalias(1) and
postmap(1) commands. On many UNIX systems the default type is either
dbm or hash. The default setting is frozen when the Postfix system is
built.

Examples:

default_database_type = hash
default_database_type = dbm

default_delivery_slot_cost (default: 5)
How often the Postfix queue manager's scheduler is allowed to preempt
delivery of one message with another.

Each transport maintains a so-called "available delivery slot counter"
for each message. One message can be preempted by another one when the
other message can be delivered using no more delivery slots (i.e.,
invocations of delivery agents) than the current message counter has
accumulated (or will eventually accumulate - see about slot loans
below). This parameter controls how often the counter is incremented -
it happens after each default_delivery_slot_cost recipients have been
delivered.

The cost of 0 is used to disable the preempting scheduling completely.
The minimum value the scheduling algorithm can use is 2 - use it if you
want to maximize the message throughput rate. Although there is no
maximum, it doesn't make much sense to use values above say 50.

The only reason why the value of 2 is not the default is the way this
parameter affects the delivery of mailing-list mail. In the worst case,
delivery can take somewhere between (cost+1/cost) and (cost/cost-1)
times more than if the preemptive scheduler was disabled. The default
value of 5 turns out to provide reasonable message response times while
making sure the mailing-list deliveries are not extended by more than
20-25 percent even in the worst case.

Use transport_delivery_slot_cost to specify a transport-specific
override, where transport is the master.cf name of the message delivery
transport.

Examples:

default_delivery_slot_cost = 0
default_delivery_slot_cost = 2

default_delivery_slot_discount (default: 50)
The default value for transport-specific _delivery_slot_discount
settings.

This parameter speeds up the moment when a message preemption can
happen. Instead of waiting until the full amount of delivery slots
required is available, the preemption can happen when
transport_delivery_slot_discount percent of the required amount plus
transport_delivery_slot_loan still remains to be accumulated. Note
that the full amount will still have to be accumulated before another
preemption can take place later.

Use transport_delivery_slot_discount to specify a transport-specific
override, where transport is the master.cf name of the message delivery
transport.

default_delivery_slot_loan (default: 3)
The default value for transport-specific _delivery_slot_loan settings.

Use transport_delivery_slot_loan to specify a transport-specific
override, where transport is the master.cf name of the message delivery
transport.

default_delivery_status_filter (default: empty)
Optional filter to replace the delivery status code or explanatory text
of successful or unsuccessful deliveries. This does not allow the
replacement of a successful status code (2.X.X) with an unsuccessful
status code (4.X.X or 5.X.X) or vice versa.

Note: the (smtp|lmtp)_delivery_status_filter is applied only once per
recipient: when delivery is successful, when delivery is rejected with
5XX, or when there are no more alternate MX or A destinations. Use
smtp_reply_filter or lmtp_reply_filter to inspect responses for all
delivery attempts.

The following parameters can be used to implement a filter for specific
delivery agents: lmtp_delivery_status_filter,
local_delivery_status_filter, pipe_delivery_status_filter,
smtp_delivery_status_filter or virtual_delivery_status_filter. These
parameters support the same filter syntax as described here.

Specify zero or more "type:table" lookup table names, separated by
comma or whitespace. For each successful or unsuccessful delivery to a
recipient, the tables are queried in the specified order with one line
of text that is structured as follows:

enhanced-status-code SPACE explanatory-text

The first table match wins. The lookup result must have the same
structure as the query, a successful status code (2.X.X) must be
replaced with a successful status code, an unsuccessful status code
(4.X.X or 5.X.X) must be replaced with an unsuccessful status code, and
the explanatory text field must be non-empty. Other results will result
in a warning.

Example 1: convert specific soft TLS errors into hard errors, by
overriding the first number in the enhanced status code.

/usr/local/etc/postfix/main.cf:
smtp_delivery_status_filter = pcre:$config_directory/smtp_dsn_filter

/usr/local/etc/postfix/smtp_dsn_filter:
/^4(\.\d+\.\d+ TLS is required, but host \S+ refused to start TLS: .+)/
5$1
/^4(\.\d+\.\d+ TLS is required, but was not offered by host .+)/
5$1
# Do not change the following into hard bounces. They may
# result from a local configuration problem.
# 4.\d+.\d+ TLS is required, but our TLS engine is unavailable
# 4.\d+.\d+ TLS is required, but unavailable
# 4.\d+.\d+ Cannot start TLS: handshake failure

Example 2: censor the per-recipient delivery status text so that it
does not reveal the destination command or filename when a remote
sender requests confirmation of successful delivery.

/usr/local/etc/postfix/main.cf:
local_delivery_status_filter = pcre:$config_directory/local_dsn_filter

/usr/local/etc/postfix/local_dsn_filter:
/^(2\S+ delivered to file).+/ $1
/^(2\S+ delivered to command).+/ $1

Notes:

o This feature will NOT override the soft_bounce safety net.

o This feature will change the enhanced status code and text that
is logged to the maillog file, and that is reported to the
sender in delivery confirmation or non-delivery notifications.

This feature is available in Postfix 3.0 and later.

default_destination_concurrency_failed_cohort_limit (default: 1)
How many pseudo-cohorts must suffer connection or handshake failure
before a specific destination is considered unavailable (and further
delivery is suspended). Specify zero to disable this feature. A
destination's pseudo-cohort failure count is reset each time a delivery
completes without connection or handshake failure for that specific
destination.

A pseudo-cohort is the number of deliveries equal to a destination's
delivery concurrency.

Use transport_destination_concurrency_failed_cohort_limit to specify a
transport-specific override, where transport is the master.cf name of
the message delivery transport.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.5. The default setting is
compatible with earlier Postfix versions.

default_destination_concurrency_limit (default: 20)
The default maximal number of parallel deliveries to the same
destination. This is the default limit for delivery via the lmtp(8),
pipe(8), smtp(8) and virtual(8) delivery agents. With a
per-destination recipient limit > 1, a destination is a domain,
otherwise it is a recipient.

Use transport_destination_concurrency_limit to specify a
transport-specific override, where transport is the master.cf name of
the message delivery transport.

default_destination_concurrency_negative_feedback (default: 1)
The per-destination amount of delivery concurrency negative feedback,
after a delivery completes with a connection or handshake failure.
Feedback values are in the range 0..1 inclusive. With negative
feedback, concurrency is decremented at the beginning of a sequence of
length 1/feedback. This is unlike positive feedback, where concurrency
is incremented at the end of a sequence of length 1/feedback.

As of Postfix version 2.5, negative feedback cannot reduce delivery
concurrency to zero. Instead, a destination is marked dead (further
delivery suspended) after the failed pseudo-cohort count reaches
$default_destination_concurrency_failed_cohort_limit (or
$transport_destination_concurrency_failed_cohort_limit). To make the
scheduler completely immune to connection or handshake failures,
specify a zero feedback value and a zero failed pseudo-cohort limit.

Specify one of the following forms:

number

number / number
Constant feedback. The value must be in the range 0..1
inclusive. The default setting of "1" is compatible with
Postfix versions before 2.5, where a destination's delivery
concurrency is throttled down to zero (and further delivery
suspended) after a single failed pseudo-cohort.

number / concurrency
Variable feedback of "number / (delivery concurrency)". The
number must be in the range 0..1 inclusive. With number equal to
"1", a destination's delivery concurrency is decremented by 1
after each failed pseudo-cohort.

A pseudo-cohort is the number of deliveries equal to a destination's
delivery concurrency.

Use transport_destination_concurrency_negative_feedback to specify a
transport-specific override, where transport is the master.cf name of
the message delivery transport.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.5. The default setting is
compatible with earlier Postfix versions.

default_destination_concurrency_positive_feedback (default: 1)
The per-destination amount of delivery concurrency positive feedback,
after a delivery completes without connection or handshake failure.
Feedback values are in the range 0..1 inclusive. The concurrency
increases until it reaches the per-destination maximal concurrency
limit. With positive feedback, concurrency is incremented at the end of
a sequence with length 1/feedback. This is unlike negative feedback,
where concurrency is decremented at the start of a sequence of length
1/feedback.

Specify one of the following forms:

number

number / number
Constant feedback. The value must be in the range 0..1
inclusive. The default setting of "1" is compatible with Postfix
versions before 2.5, where a destination's delivery concurrency
doubles after each successful pseudo-cohort.

A pseudo-cohort is the number of deliveries equal to a destination's
delivery concurrency.

Use transport_destination_concurrency_positive_feedback to specify a
transport-specific override, where transport is the master.cf name of
the message delivery transport.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.5 and later.

default_destination_rate_delay (default: 0s)
The default amount of delay that is inserted between individual message
deliveries to the same destination and over the same message delivery
transport. Specify a non-zero value to rate-limit those message
deliveries to at most one per $default_destination_rate_delay.

The resulting behavior depends on the value of the corresponding
per-destination recipient limit.

o With a corresponding per-destination recipient limit > 1, the
rate delay specifies the time between deliveries to the same
domain. Different domains are delivered in parallel, subject to
the process limits specified in master.cf.

o With a corresponding per-destination recipient limit equal to 1,
the rate delay specifies the time between deliveries to the same
recipient. Different recipients are delivered in parallel,
subject to the process limits specified in master.cf.

To enable the delay, specify a non-zero time value (an integral value
plus an optional one-letter suffix that specifies the time unit).

Time units: s (seconds), m (minutes), h (hours), d (days), w (weeks).
The default time unit is s (seconds).

NOTE: the delay is enforced by the queue manager. The delay timer state
does not survive "postfix reload" or "postfix stop".

Use transport_destination_rate_delay to specify a transport-specific
override, where transport is the master.cf name of the message delivery
transport.

NOTE: with a non-zero _destination_rate_delay, specify a
transport_destination_concurrency_failed_cohort_limit of 10 or more to
prevent Postfix from deferring all mail for the same destination after
only one connection or handshake error.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.5 and later.

default_destination_recipient_limit (default: 50)
The default maximal number of recipients per message delivery. This is
the default limit for delivery via the lmtp(8), pipe(8), smtp(8) and
virtual(8) delivery agents.

Setting this parameter to a value of 1 affects email deliveries as
follows:

o It changes the meaning of the corresponding per-destination
concurrency limit, from concurrency of deliveries to the same
domain into concurrency of deliveries to the same recipient.
Different recipients are delivered in parallel, subject to the
process limits specified in master.cf.

o It changes the meaning of the corresponding per-destination rate
delay, from the delay between deliveries to the same domain into
the delay between deliveries to the same recipient. Again,
different recipients are delivered in parallel, subject to the
process limits specified in master.cf.

o It changes the meaning of other corresponding per-destination
settings in a similar manner, from settings for delivery to the
same domain into settings for delivery to the same recipient.

Use transport_destination_recipient_limit to specify a
transport-specific override, where transport is the master.cf name of
the message delivery transport.

default_extra_recipient_limit (default: 1000)
The default value for the extra per-transport limit imposed on the
number of in-memory recipients. This extra recipient space is reserved
for the cases when the Postfix queue manager's scheduler preempts one
message with another and suddenly needs some extra recipient slots for
the chosen message in order to avoid performance degradation.

Use transport_extra_recipient_limit to specify a transport-specific
override, where transport is the master.cf name of the message delivery
transport.

default_filter_nexthop (default: empty)
When a content_filter or FILTER request specifies no explicit next-hop
destination, use $default_filter_nexthop instead; when that value is
empty, use the domain in the recipient address. Specify
"default_filter_nexthop = $myhostname" for compatibility with Postfix
version 2.6 and earlier, or specify an explicit next-hop destination
with each content_filter value or FILTER action.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.7 and later.

default_minimum_delivery_slots (default: 3)
How many recipients a message must have in order to invoke the Postfix
queue manager's scheduling algorithm at all. Messages which would
never accumulate at least this many delivery slots (subject to slot
cost parameter as well) are never preempted.

Use transport_minimum_delivery_slots to specify a transport-specific
override, where transport is the master.cf name of the message delivery
transport.

default_privs (default: nobody)
The default rights used by the local(8) delivery agent for delivery to
an external file or command. These rights are used when delivery is
requested from an aliases(5) file that is owned by root, or when
delivery is done on behalf of root. DO NOT SPECIFY A PRIVILEGED USER OR
THE POSTFIX OWNER.

default_process_limit (default: 100)
The default maximal number of Postfix child processes that provide a
given service. This limit can be overruled for specific services in the
master.cf file.

default_rbl_reply (default: see postconf -d output)
The default Postfix SMTP server response template for a request that is
rejected by an RBL-based restriction. This template can be overruled by
specific entries in the optional rbl_reply_maps lookup table.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.0 and later.

The template does not support Postfix configuration parameter $name
substitution. Instead, it supports exactly one level of $name
substitution for the following attributes:

$client
The client hostname and IP address, formatted as name[address].

$client_address
The client IP address.

$client_name
The client hostname or "unknown". See
reject_unknown_client_hostname for more details.

$reverse_client_name
The client hostname from address->name lookup, or "unknown".
See reject_unknown_reverse_client_hostname for more details.

$helo_name
The hostname given in HELO or EHLO command or empty string.

$rbl_class
The denylisted entity type: Client host, Helo command, Sender
address, or Recipient address.

$rbl_code
The numerical SMTP response code, as specified with the
maps_rbl_reject_code configuration parameter. Note: The
numerical SMTP response code is required, and must appear at the
start of the reply. With Postfix version 2.3 and later this
information may be followed by an RFC 3463 enhanced status code.

$rbl_domain
The RBL domain where $rbl_what is denylisted.

$rbl_reason
The reason why $rbl_what is denylisted, or an empty string.

$rbl_what
The entity that is denylisted (an IP address, a hostname, a
domain name, or an email address whose domain was denylisted).

$recipient
The recipient address or <> in case of the null address.

$recipient_domain
The recipient domain or empty string.

$recipient_name
The recipient address localpart or <> in case of null address.

$sender
The sender address or <> in case of the null address.

$sender_domain
The sender domain or empty string.

$sender_name
The sender address localpart or <> in case of the null address.

${name?value}

${name?{value}} (Postfix >= 3.0)
Expands to value when $name is non-empty.

${name:value}

${name:{value}} (Postfix >= 3.0)
Expands to value when $name is empty.

${name?{value1}:{value2}} (Postfix >= 3.0)
Expands to value1 when $name is non-empty, value2 otherwise.

Instead of $name you can also specify ${name} or $(name).

Note: when an enhanced status code is specified in an RBL reply
template, it is subject to modification. The following transformations
are needed when the same RBL reply template is used for client, helo,
sender, or recipient access restrictions.

o When rejecting a sender address, the Postfix SMTP server will
transform a recipient DSN status (e.g., 4.1.1-4.1.6) into the
corresponding sender DSN status, and vice versa.

o When rejecting non-address information (such as the HELO command
argument or the client hostname/address), the Postfix SMTP
server will transform a sender or recipient DSN status into a
generic non-address DSN status (e.g., 4.0.0).

default_recipient_limit (default: 20000)
The default per-transport upper limit on the number of in-memory
recipients. These limits take priority over the global
qmgr_message_recipient_limit after the message has been assigned to the
respective transports. See also default_extra_recipient_limit and
qmgr_message_recipient_minimum.

Use transport_recipient_limit to specify a transport-specific override,
where transport is the master.cf name of the message delivery
transport.

default_recipient_refill_delay (default: 5s)
The default per-transport maximum delay between refilling recipients.
When not all message recipients fit into memory at once, keep loading
more of them at least once every this many seconds. This is used to
make sure the recipients are refilled in a timely manner even when
$default_recipient_refill_limit is too high for too slow deliveries.

Use transport_recipient_refill_delay to specify a transport-specific
override, where transport is the master.cf name of the message delivery
transport.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.4 and later.

default_recipient_refill_limit (default: 100)
The default per-transport limit on the number of recipients refilled at
once. When not all message recipients fit into memory at once, keep
loading more of them in batches of at least this many at a time. See
also $default_recipient_refill_delay, which may result in recipient
batches lower than this when this limit is too high for too slow
deliveries.

Use transport_recipient_refill_limit to specify a transport-specific
override, where transport is the master.cf name of the message delivery
transport.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.4 and later.

default_transport (default: smtp)
The default mail delivery transport and next-hop destination for
destinations that do not match $mydestination, $inet_interfaces,
$proxy_interfaces, $virtual_alias_domains, $virtual_mailbox_domains, or
$relay_domains. This information can be overruled with the
sender_dependent_default_transport_maps parameter and with the
transport(5) table.

In order of decreasing precedence, the nexthop destination is taken
from $sender_dependent_default_transport_maps, $default_transport,
$sender_dependent_relayhost_maps, $relayhost, or from the recipient
domain.

Specify a string of the form transport:nexthop, where transport is the
name of a mail delivery transport defined in master.cf. The :nexthop
destination is optional; its syntax is documented in the manual page of
the corresponding delivery agent. In the case of SMTP or LMTP, specify
one or more destinations separated by comma or whitespace (with Postfix
3.5 and later).

Example:

default_transport = uucp:relayhostname

default_transport_rate_delay (default: 0s)
The default amount of delay that is inserted between individual message
deliveries over the same message delivery transport, regardless of
destination. Specify a non-zero value to rate-limit those message
deliveries to at most one per $default_transport_rate_delay.

Use transport_transport_rate_delay to specify a transport-specific
override, where the initial transport is the master.cf name of the
message delivery transport.

Example: throttle outbound SMTP mail to at most 3 deliveries per
minute.

/usr/local/etc/postfix/main.cf:
smtp_transport_rate_delay = 20s

To enable the delay, specify a non-zero time value (an integral value
plus an optional one-letter suffix that specifies the time unit).

Time units: s (seconds), m (minutes), h (hours), d (days), w (weeks).
The default time unit is s (seconds).

NOTE: the delay is enforced by the queue manager.

This feature is available in Postfix 3.1 and later.

default_verp_delimiters (default: +=)
The two default VERP delimiter characters. These are used when no
explicit delimiters are specified with the SMTP XVERP command or with
the "sendmail -XV" command-line option (Postfix 2.2 and earlier: -V).
Specify characters that are allowed by the verp_delimiter_filter
setting.

This feature is available in Postfix 1.1 and later.

defer_code (default: 450)
The numerical Postfix SMTP server response code when a remote SMTP
client request is rejected by the "defer" restriction.

Do not change this unless you have a complete understanding of RFC
5321.

defer_service_name (default: defer)
The name of the defer service. This service is implemented by the
bounce(8) daemon and maintains a record of failed delivery attempts and
generates non-delivery notifications.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.0 and later.

defer_transports (default: empty)
The names of message delivery transports that should not deliver mail
unless someone issues "sendmail -q" or equivalent. Specify zero or more
mail delivery transport names that appear in the first field of
master.cf.

Example:

defer_transports = smtp

delay_logging_resolution_limit (default: 2)
The maximal number of digits after the decimal point when logging
sub-second delay values. Specify a number in the range 0..6.

Large delay values are rounded off to an integral number of seconds;
delay values below the delay_logging_resolution_limit are logged as
"0", and delay values under 100s are logged with at most two-digit
precision.

The format of the "delays=a/b/c/d" logging is as follows:

o a = time from message arrival to last active queue entry

o b = time from last active queue entry to connection setup

o c = time in connection setup, including DNS, EHLO and STARTTLS

o d = time in message transmission

This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

delay_notice_recipient (default: postmaster)
The recipient of postmaster notifications with the message headers of
mail that cannot be delivered within $delay_warning_time time units.

See also: delay_warning_time, notify_classes.

delay_warning_time (default: 0h)
The time after which the sender receives a copy of the message headers
of mail that is still queued. The confirm_delay_cleared parameter
controls sender notification when the delay clears up.

To enable this feature, specify a non-zero time value (an integral
value plus an optional one-letter suffix that specifies the time unit).

Time units: s (seconds), m (minutes), h (hours), d (days), w (weeks).
The default time unit is h (hours).

See also: delay_notice_recipient, notify_classes,
confirm_delay_cleared.

deliver_lock_attempts (default: 20)
The maximal number of attempts to acquire an exclusive lock on a
mailbox file or bounce(8) logfile.

deliver_lock_delay (default: 1s)
The time between attempts to acquire an exclusive lock on a mailbox
file or bounce(8) logfile.

destination_concurrency_feedback_debug (default: no)
Make the queue manager's feedback algorithm verbose for performance
analysis purposes.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.5 and later.

detect_8bit_encoding_header (default: yes)
Automatically detect 8BITMIME body content by looking at
Content-Transfer-Encoding: message headers; historically, this behavior
was hard-coded to be "always on".

This feature is available in Postfix 2.5 and later.

disable_dns_lookups (default: no)
Disable DNS lookups in the Postfix SMTP and LMTP clients. When
disabled, hosts are looked up with the getaddrinfo() system library
routine which normally also looks in /etc/hosts. As of Postfix 2.11,
this parameter is deprecated; use smtp_dns_support_level instead.

DNS lookups are enabled by default.

disable_mime_input_processing (default: no)
Turn off MIME processing while receiving mail. This means that no
special treatment is given to Content-Type: message headers, and that
all text after the initial message headers is considered to be part of
the message body.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.0 and later.

Mime input processing is enabled by default, and is needed in order to
recognize MIME headers in message content.

disable_mime_output_conversion (default: no)
Disable the conversion of 8BITMIME format to 7BIT format. Mime output
conversion is needed when the destination does not advertise 8BITMIME
support.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.0 and later.

disable_verp_bounces (default: no)
Disable sending one bounce report per recipient.

The default, one per recipient, is what ezmlm needs.

This feature is available in Postfix 1.1 and later.

disable_vrfy_command (default: no)
Disable the SMTP VRFY command. This stops some techniques used to
harvest email addresses.

Example:

disable_vrfy_command = no

dns_ncache_ttl_fix_enable (default: no)
Enable a workaround for future libc incompatibility. The Postfix
implementation of RFC 2308 negative reply caching relies on the promise
that res_query() and res_search() invoke res_send(), which returns the
server response in an application buffer even if the requested record
does not exist. If this promise is broken, specify "yes" to enable a
workaround for DNS reputation lookups.

This feature is available in Postfix 3.1 and later.

dnsblog_reply_delay (default: 0s)
A debugging aid to artificially delay DNS responses.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.8.

dnsblog_service_name (default: dnsblog)
The name of the dnsblog(8) service entry in master.cf. This service
performs DNS allow/denylist lookups.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.8 and later.

dnssec_probe (default: ns:.)
The DNS query type (default: "ns") and DNS query name (default: ".")
that Postfix may use to determine whether DNSSEC validation is
available.

Background: DNSSEC validation is needed for Postfix DANE support; this
ensures that Postfix receives TLSA records with secure TLS server
certificate info. When DNSSEC validation is unavailable, mail
deliveries using opportunistic DANE will not be protected by server
certificate info in TLSA records, and mail deliveries using mandatory
DANE will not be made at all.

By default, a Postfix process will send a DNSSEC probe after 1) the
process made a DNS query that requested DNSSEC validation, 2) the
process did not receive a DNSSEC validated response to this query or to
an earlier query, and 3) the process did not already send a DNSSEC
probe.

When the DNSSEC probe has no response, or when the response is not
DNSSEC validated, Postfix logs a warning that DNSSEC validation may be
unavailable.

Example:

warning: DNSSEC validation may be unavailable
warning: reason: dnssec_probe 'ns:.' received a response that is not DNSSEC validated
warning: reason: dnssec_probe 'ns:.' received no response: Server failure

Possible reasons why DNSSEC validation may be unavailable:

o The local /etc/resolv.conf file specifies a DNS resolver that
does not validate DNSSEC signatures (that's
$queue_directory/etc/resolv.conf when a Postfix daemon runs in a
chroot jail).

o The local system library does not pass on the "DNSSEC validated"
bit to Postfix, or Postfix does not know how to ask the library
to do that.

By default, the DNSSEC probe asks for the DNS root zone NS records,
because resolvers should always have that information cached. If
Postfix runs on a network where the DNS root zone is not reachable,
specify a different probe, or specify an empty dnssec_probe value to
disable the feature.

This feature is available in Postfix 3.6 and later. It was backported
to Postfix versions 3.5.9, 3.4.19, 3.3.16. 3.2.21.

dont_remove (default: 0)
Don't remove queue files and save them to the "saved" mail queue. This
is a debugging aid. To inspect the envelope information and content of
a Postfix queue file, use the postcat(1) command.

double_bounce_sender (default: double-bounce)
The sender address of postmaster notifications that are generated by
the mail system. All mail to this address is silently discarded, in
order to terminate mail bounce loops.

duplicate_filter_limit (default: 1000)
The maximal number of addresses remembered by the address duplicate
filter for aliases(5) or virtual(5) alias expansion, or for showq(8)
queue displays.

empty_address_default_transport_maps_lookup_key (default: <>)
The sender_dependent_default_transport_maps search string that will be
used instead of the null sender address.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.7 and later.

empty_address_local_login_sender_maps_lookup_key (default: <>)
The lookup key to be used in local_login_sender_maps tables, instead of
the null sender address.

This feature is available in Postfix 3.6 and later.

empty_address_recipient (default: MAILER-DAEMON)
The recipient of mail addressed to the null address. Postfix does not
accept such addresses in SMTP commands, but they may still be created
locally as the result of configuration or software error.

empty_address_relayhost_maps_lookup_key (default: <>)
The sender_dependent_relayhost_maps search string that will be used
instead of the null sender address.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.5 and later. With earlier
versions, sender_dependent_relayhost_maps lookups were skipped for the
null sender address.

enable_errors_to (default: no)
Report mail delivery errors to the address specified with the
non-standard Errors-To: message header, instead of the envelope sender
address (this feature is removed with Postfix version 2.2, is turned
off by default with Postfix version 2.1, and is always turned on with
older Postfix versions).

enable_idna2003_compatibility (default: no)
Enable 'transitional' compatibility between IDNA2003 and IDNA2008, when
converting UTF-8 domain names to/from the ASCII form that is used for
DNS lookups. Specify "yes" for compatibility with Postfix <= 3.1 (not
recommended). This affects the conversion of domain names that contain
for example the German sz and the Greek zeta. See
http://unicode.org/cldr/utility/idna.jsp for more examples.

This feature is available in Postfix 3.2 and later.

enable_long_queue_ids (default: no)
Enable long, non-repeating, queue IDs (queue file names). The benefit
of non-repeating names is simpler logfile analysis and easier queue
migration (there is no need to run "postsuper" to change queue file
names that don't match their message file inode number).

Note: see below for how to convert long queue file names to Postfix <=
2.8.

Changing the parameter value to "yes" has the following effects:

o Existing queue file names are not affected.

o New queue files are created with names such as 3Pt2mN2VXxznjll.
These are encoded in a 52-character alphabet that contains
digits (0-9), upper-case letters (B-Z) and lower-case letters
(b-z). For safety reasons the vowels (AEIOUaeiou) are excluded
from the alphabet. The name format is: 6 or more characters for
the time in seconds, 4 characters for the time in microseconds,
the 'z'; the remainder is the file inode number encoded in the
first 51 characters of the 52-character alphabet.

o New messages have a Message-ID header with queueID@myhostname.

o The mailq (postqueue -p) output has a wider Queue ID column.
The number of whitespace-separated fields is not changed.

o The hash_queue_depth algorithm uses the first characters of the
queue file creation time in microseconds, after conversion into
hexadecimal representation. This produces the same queue hashing
behavior as if the queue file name was created with
"enable_long_queue_ids = no".

Changing the parameter value to "no" has the following effects:

o Existing long queue file names are renamed to the short form
(while running "postfix reload" or "postsuper").

o New queue files are created with names such as C3CD21F3E90 from
a hexadecimal alphabet that contains digits (0-9) and upper-case
letters (A-F). The name format is: 5 characters for the time in
microseconds; the remainder is the file inode number.

o New messages have a Message-ID header with
YYYYMMDDHHMMSS.queueid@myhostname, where YYYYMMDDHHMMSS are the
year, month, day, hour, minute and second.

o The mailq (postqueue -p) output has the same format as with
Postfix <= 2.8.

o The hash_queue_depth algorithm uses the first characters of the
queue file name, with the hexadecimal representation of the file
creation time in microseconds.

Before migration to Postfix <= 2.8, the following commands are required
to convert long queue file names into short names:

# postfix stop
# postconf enable_long_queue_ids=no
# postsuper

Repeat the postsuper command until it reports no more queue file name
changes.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.9 and later.

enable_original_recipient (default: yes)
Enable support for the original recipient address after an address is
rewritten to a different address (for example with aliasing or with
canonical mapping).

The original recipient address is used as follows:

Final delivery
With "enable_original_recipient = yes", the original recipient
address is stored in the X-Original-To message header. This
header may be used to distinguish between different recipients
that share the same mailbox.

Recipient deduplication
With "enable_original_recipient = yes", the cleanup(8) daemon
performs duplicate recipient elimination based on the content of
(original recipient, maybe-rewritten recipient) pairs.
Otherwise, the cleanup(8) daemon performs duplicate recipient
elimination based only on the maybe-rewritten recipient address.

Note: with Postfix <= 3.2 the "setting enable_original_recipient = no"
breaks address verification for addresses that are aliased or otherwise
rewritten (Postfix is unable to store the address verification result
under the original probe destination address; instead, it can store the
result only under the rewritten address).

This feature is available in Postfix 2.1 and later. Postfix version 2.0
behaves as if this parameter is always set to yes. Postfix versions
before 2.0 have no support for the original recipient address.

enable_threaded_bounces (default: no)
Enable non-delivery, success, and delay notifications that link to the
original message by including a References: and In-Reply-To: header
with the original Message-ID value. There are advantages and
disadvantages to consider.

advantage
This allows mail readers to present a delivery status
notification in the same email thread as the original message.

disadvantage
This makes it easy for users to mistakenly delete the whole
email thread (all related messages), instead of deleting only
the non-delivery notification.

This feature is available in Postfix 3.6 and later.

error_notice_recipient (default: postmaster)
The recipient of postmaster notifications about mail delivery problems
that are caused by policy, resource, software or protocol errors.
These notifications are enabled with the notify_classes parameter.

error_service_name (default: error)
The name of the error(8) pseudo delivery agent. This service always
returns mail as undeliverable.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.0 and later.

execution_directory_expansion_filter (default: see postconf -d output)
Restrict the characters that the local(8) delivery agent allows in
$name expansions of $command_execution_directory. Characters outside
the allowed set are replaced by underscores.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.

expand_owner_alias (default: no)
When delivering to an alias "aliasname" that has an "owner-aliasname"
companion alias, set the envelope sender address to the expansion of
the "owner-aliasname" alias. Normally, Postfix sets the envelope
sender address to the name of the "owner-aliasname" alias.

export_environment (default: see postconf -d output)
The list of environment variables that a Postfix process will export to
non-Postfix processes. The TZ variable is needed for sane time keeping
on System-V-ish systems.

Specify a list of names and/or name=value pairs, separated by
whitespace or comma. Specify "{ name=value }" to protect whitespace or
comma in parameter values (whitespace after the opening "{" and before
the closing "}" is ignored). The form name=value is supported with
Postfix version 2.1 and later; the use of {} is supported with Postfix
3.0 and later.

Example:

export_environment = TZ PATH=/bin:/usr/bin

extract_recipient_limit (default: 10240)
The maximal number of recipient addresses that Postfix will extract
from message headers when mail is submitted with "sendmail -t".

This feature was removed in Postfix version 2.1.

fallback_relay (default: empty)
Optional list of relay hosts for SMTP destinations that can't be found
or that are unreachable. With Postfix 2.3 this parameter is renamed to
smtp_fallback_relay.

By default, mail is returned to the sender when a destination is not
found, and delivery is deferred when a destination is unreachable.

The fallback relays must be SMTP destinations. Specify a domain, host,
host:port, [host]:port, [address] or [address]:port; the form [host]
turns off MX lookups. If you specify multiple SMTP destinations,
Postfix will try them in the specified order.

Note: before Postfix 2.2, do not use the fallback_relay feature when
relaying mail for a backup or primary MX domain. Mail would loop
between the Postfix MX host and the fallback_relay host when the final
destination is unavailable.

o In main.cf specify "relay_transport = relay",

o In master.cf specify "-o fallback_relay =" (i.e., empty) at the
end of the relay entry.

o In transport maps, specify "relay:nexthop..." as the right-hand
side for backup or primary MX domain entries.

Postfix version 2.2 and later will not use the fallback_relay feature
for destinations that it is MX host for.

fallback_transport (default: empty)
Optional message delivery transport that the local(8) delivery agent
should use for names that are not found in the aliases(5) or UNIX
password database.

The precedence of local(8) delivery features from high to low is:
aliases, .forward files, mailbox_transport_maps, mailbox_transport,
mailbox_command_maps, mailbox_command, home_mailbox,
mail_spool_directory, fallback_transport_maps, fallback_transport and
luser_relay.

fallback_transport_maps (default: empty)
Optional lookup tables with per-recipient message delivery transports
for recipients that the local(8) delivery agent could not find in the
aliases(5) or UNIX password database.

For safety reasons, this feature does not allow $number substitutions
in regular expression maps.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

fast_flush_domains (default: $relay_domains)
Optional list of destinations that are eligible for per-destination
logfiles with mail that is queued to those destinations.

By default, Postfix maintains "fast flush" logfiles only for
destinations that the Postfix SMTP server is willing to relay to (i.e.
the default is: "fast_flush_domains = $relay_domains"; see the
relay_domains parameter in the postconf(5) manual).

Specify a list of hosts or domains, "/file/name" patterns or
"type:table" lookup tables, separated by commas and/or whitespace.
Continue long lines by starting the next line with whitespace. A
"/file/name" pattern is replaced by its contents; a "type:table" lookup
table is matched when the domain or its parent domain appears as lookup
key.

Pattern matching of domain names is controlled by the presence or
absence of "fast_flush_domains" in the parent_domain_matches_subdomains
parameter value.

Specify "fast_flush_domains =" (i.e., empty) to disable the feature
altogether.

fast_flush_purge_time (default: 7d)
The time after which an empty per-destination "fast flush" logfile is
deleted.

You can specify the time as a number, or as a number followed by a
letter that indicates the time unit: s=seconds, m=minutes, h=hours,
d=days, w=weeks. The default time unit is days.

fast_flush_refresh_time (default: 12h)
The time after which a non-empty but unread per-destination "fast
flush" logfile needs to be refreshed. The contents of a logfile are
refreshed by requesting delivery of all messages listed in the logfile.

You can specify the time as a number, or as a number followed by a
letter that indicates the time unit: s=seconds, m=minutes, h=hours,
d=days, w=weeks. The default time unit is hours.

fault_injection_code (default: 0)
Force specific internal tests to fail, to test the handling of errors
that are difficult to reproduce otherwise.

flush_service_name (default: flush)
The name of the flush(8) service. This service maintains
per-destination logfiles with the queue file names of mail that is
queued for those destinations.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.0 and later.

fork_attempts (default: 5)
The maximal number of attempts to fork() a child process.

fork_delay (default: 1s)
The delay between attempts to fork() a child process.

forward_expansion_filter (default: see postconf -d output)
Restrict the characters that the local(8) delivery agent allows in
$name expansions of $forward_path. Characters outside the allowed set
are replaced by underscores.

forward_path (default: see postconf -d output)
The local(8) delivery agent search list for finding a .forward file
with user-specified delivery methods. The first file that is found is
used.

The forward_path value is not subject to Postfix configuration
parameter $name expansion. Instead, the following $name expansions are
done on forward_path before the search actually happens. The result of
$name expansion is filtered with the character set that is specified
with the forward_expansion_filter parameter.

$user The recipient's username.

$shell The recipient's login shell pathname.

$home The recipient's home directory.

$recipient
The full recipient address.

$extension
The optional recipient address extension.

$domain
The recipient domain.

$local The entire recipient localpart.

${name?value}

${name?{value}} (Postfix >= 3.0)
Expands to value when $name is non-empty.

${name:value}

${name:{value}} (Postfix >= 3.0)
Expands to value when $name is empty.

${name?{value1}:{value2}} (Postfix >= 3.0)
Expands to value1 when $name is non-empty, value2 otherwise.

Instead of $name you can also specify ${name} or $(name).

Examples:

forward_path = /var/forward/$user
forward_path =
/var/forward/$user/.forward$recipient_delimiter$extension,
/var/forward/$user/.forward

frozen_delivered_to (default: yes)
Update the local(8) delivery agent's idea of the Delivered-To: address
(see prepend_delivered_header) only once, at the start of a delivery
attempt; do not update the Delivered-To: address while expanding
aliases or .forward files.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later. With older Postfix
releases, the behavior is as if this parameter is set to "no". The old
setting can be expensive with deeply nested aliases or .forward files.
When an alias or .forward file changes the Delivered-To: address, it
ties up one queue file and one cleanup process instance while mail is
being forwarded.

hash_queue_depth (default: 1)
The number of subdirectory levels for queue directories listed with the
hash_queue_names parameter. Queue hashing is implemented by creating
one or more levels of directories with one-character names.
Originally, these directory names were equal to the first characters of
the queue file name, with the hexadecimal representation of the file
creation time in microseconds.

With long queue file names, queue hashing produces the same results as
with short names. The file creation time in microseconds is converted
into hexadecimal form before the result is used for queue hashing. The
base 16 encoding gives finer control over the number of subdirectories
than is possible with the base 52 encoding of long queue file names.

After changing the hash_queue_names or hash_queue_depth parameter,
execute the command "postfix reload".

hash_queue_names (default: deferred, defer)
The names of queue directories that are split across multiple
subdirectory levels.

Before Postfix version 2.2, the default list of hashed queues was
significantly larger. Claims about improvements in file system
technology suggest that hashing of the incoming and active queues is no
longer needed. Fewer hashed directories speed up the time needed to
restart Postfix.

After changing the hash_queue_names or hash_queue_depth parameter,
execute the command "postfix reload".

header_address_token_limit (default: 10240)
The maximal number of address tokens are allowed in an address message
header. Information that exceeds the limit is discarded. The limit is
enforced by the cleanup(8) server.

header_checks (default: empty)
Optional lookup tables for content inspection of primary non-MIME
message headers, as specified in the header_checks(5) manual page.

header_from_format (default: standard)
The format of the Postfix-generated From: header. This setting affects
the appearance of 'full name' information when a local program such as
/bin/mail submits a message without a From: header through the Postfix
sendmail(1) command.

Specify one of the following:

standard (default)
Produce a header formatted as "From: name <address>". This is
the default as of Postfix 3.3.

obsolete
Produce a header formatted as "From: address (name)". This is
the behavior prior to Postfix 3.3.

Notes:

o Postfix generates the format "From: address" when name
information is unavailable or the envelope sender address is
empty. This is the same behavior as prior to Postfix 3.3.

o In the standard form, the name will be quoted if it contains
specials as defined in RFC 5322, or the "!%" address operators.

o The Postfix sendmail(1) command gets name information from the
-F command-line option, from the NAME environment variable, or
from the UNIX password file.

This feature is available in Postfix 3.3 and later.

header_size_limit (default: 102400)
The maximal amount of memory in bytes for storing a message header. If
a header is larger, the excess is discarded. The limit is enforced by
the cleanup(8) server.

helpful_warnings (default: yes)
Log warnings about problematic configuration settings, and provide
helpful suggestions.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.0 and later.

home_mailbox (default: empty)
Optional pathname of a mailbox file relative to a local(8) user's home
directory.

Specify a pathname ending in "/" for qmail-style delivery.

Examples:

home_mailbox = Mailbox
home_mailbox = Maildir/

hopcount_limit (default: 50)
The maximal number of Received: message headers that is allowed in the
primary message headers. A message that exceeds the limit is bounced,
in order to stop a mailer loop.

html_directory (default: see postconf -d output)
The location of Postfix HTML files that describe how to build,
configure or operate a specific Postfix subsystem or feature.

ignore_mx_lookup_error (default: no)
Ignore DNS MX lookups that produce no response. By default, the
Postfix SMTP client defers delivery and tries again after some delay.
This behavior is required by the SMTP standard.

Specify "ignore_mx_lookup_error = yes" to force a DNS A record lookup
instead. This violates the SMTP standard and can result in mis-delivery
of mail.

ignore_srv_lookup_error (default: no)
When SRV record lookup fails, fall back to MX or IP address lookup as
if SRV record lookup was not enabled.

This feature is available in Postfix 3.8 and later.

import_environment (default: see postconf -d output)
The list of environment variables that a privileged Postfix process
will import from a non-Postfix parent process, or name=value
environment overrides. Unprivileged utilities will enforce the
name=value overrides, but otherwise will not change their process
environment. Examples of relevant environment variables:

TZ May be needed for sane time keeping on most System-V-ish
systems.

DISPLAY
Needed for debugging Postfix daemons with an X-windows debugger.

XAUTHORITY
Needed for debugging Postfix daemons with an X-windows debugger.

MAIL_CONFIG
Needed to make "postfix -c" work.

POSTLOG_SERVICE
Needed to make "maillog_file" work during daemon process
initialization.

POSTLOG_HOSTNAME
Needed to make "maillog_file" work during daemon process
initialization.

Specify a list of names and/or name=value pairs, separated by
whitespace or comma. Specify "{ name=value }" to protect whitespace or
comma in environment variable values (whitespace after the opening "{"
and before the closing "}" is ignored). The form name=value is
supported with Postfix version 2.1 and later; the use of {} is
supported with Postfix 3.0 and later.

in_flow_delay (default: 1s)
Time to pause before accepting a new message, when the message arrival
rate exceeds the message delivery rate. This feature is turned on by
default (it's disabled on SCO UNIX due to an SCO bug).

With the default 100 Postfix SMTP server process limit, "in_flow_delay
= 1s" limits the mail inflow to 100 messages per second above the
number of messages delivered per second.

Specify 0 to disable the feature. Valid delays are 0..10.

inet_interfaces (default: all)
The local network interface addresses that this mail system receives
mail on. Specify "all" to receive mail on all network interfaces
(default), and "loopback-only" to receive mail on loopback network
interfaces only (Postfix version 2.2 and later). The parameter also
controls delivery of mail to user@[ip.address].

Note 1: you need to stop and start Postfix when this parameter changes.

Note 2: address information may be enclosed inside [], but this form is
not required here.

When inet_interfaces specifies just one IPv4 and/or IPv6 address that
is not a loopback address, the Postfix SMTP client will use this
address as the IP source address for outbound mail. Support for IPv6 is
available in Postfix version 2.2 and later.

On a multi-homed firewall with separate Postfix instances listening on
the "inside" and "outside" interfaces, this can prevent each instance
from being able to reach remote SMTP servers on the "other side" of the
firewall. Setting smtp_bind_address to 0.0.0.0 avoids the potential
problem for IPv4, and setting smtp_bind_address6 to :: solves the
problem for IPv6.

A better solution for multi-homed firewalls is to leave inet_interfaces
at the default value and instead use explicit IP addresses in the
master.cf SMTP server definitions. This preserves the Postfix SMTP
client's loop detection, by ensuring that each side of the firewall
knows that the other IP address is still the same host. Setting
$inet_interfaces to a single IPv4 and/or IPV6 address is primarily
useful with virtual hosting of domains on secondary IP addresses, when
each IP address serves a different domain (and has a different
$myhostname setting).

See also the proxy_interfaces parameter, for network addresses that are
forwarded to Postfix by way of a proxy or address translator.

Examples:

inet_interfaces = all (DEFAULT)
inet_interfaces = loopback-only (Postfix version 2.2 and later)
inet_interfaces = 127.0.0.1
inet_interfaces = 127.0.0.1, [::1] (Postfix version 2.2 and later)
inet_interfaces = 192.168.1.2, 127.0.0.1

inet_protocols (default: see 'postconf -d output')
The Internet protocols Postfix will attempt to use when making or
accepting connections. Specify one or more of "ipv4" or "ipv6",
separated by whitespace or commas. The form "all" is equivalent to
"ipv4, ipv6" or "ipv4", depending on whether the operating system
implements IPv6.

With Postfix 2.8 and earlier the default is "ipv4". For backwards
compatibility with these releases, the Postfix 2.9 and later upgrade
procedure appends an explicit "inet_protocols = ipv4" setting to
main.cf when no explicit setting is present. This compatibility
workaround will be phased out as IPv6 deployment becomes more common.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.

Note: you MUST stop and start Postfix after changing this parameter.

On systems that pre-date IPV6_V6ONLY support (RFC 3493), an IPv6 server
will also accept IPv4 connections, even when IPv4 is turned off with
the inet_protocols parameter. On systems with IPV6_V6ONLY support,
Postfix will use separate server sockets for IPv6 and IPv4, and each
will accept only connections for the corresponding protocol.

When IPv4 support is enabled via the inet_protocols parameter, Postfix
will look up DNS type A records, and will convert IPv4-in-IPv6 client
IP addresses (::ffff:1.2.3.4) to their original IPv4 form (1.2.3.4).
The latter is needed on hosts that pre-date IPV6_V6ONLY support (RFC
3493).

When IPv6 support is enabled via the inet_protocols parameter, Postfix
will do DNS type AAAA record lookups.

When both IPv4 and IPv6 support are enabled, the Postfix SMTP client
will choose the protocol as specified with the smtp_address_preference
parameter. Postfix versions before 2.8 attempt to connect via IPv6
before attempting to use IPv4.

Examples:

inet_protocols = ipv4
inet_protocols = all (DEFAULT)
inet_protocols = ipv6
inet_protocols = ipv4, ipv6

info_log_address_format (default: external)
The email address form that will be used in non-debug logging (info,
warning, etc.). As of Postfix 3.5 when an address localpart contains
spaces or other special characters, the localpart will be quoted, for
example:

from=<"name with spaces"@example.com>

Older Postfix versions would log the internal (unquoted) form:

from=<name with spaces@example.com>

The external and internal forms are identical for the vast majority of
email addresses that contain no spaces or other special characters in
the localpart.

The logging in external form is consistent with the address form that
Postfix 3.2 and later prefer for most table lookups. This is therefore
the more useful form for non-debug logging.

Specify "info_log_address_format = internal" for backwards
compatibility.

Postfix uses the unquoted form internally, because an attacker can
specify an email address in different forms by playing games with
quotes and backslashes. An attacker should not be able to use such
games to circumvent Postfix access policies.

This feature is available in Postfix 3.5 and later.

initial_destination_concurrency (default: 5)
The initial per-destination concurrency level for parallel delivery to
the same destination. With per-destination recipient limit > 1, a
destination is a domain, otherwise it is a recipient.

Use transport_initial_destination_concurrency to specify a
transport-specific override, where transport is the master.cf name of
the message delivery transport (Postfix 2.5 and later).

Warning: with concurrency of 1, one bad message can be enough to block
all mail to a site.

internal_mail_filter_classes (default: empty)
What categories of Postfix-generated mail are subject to before-queue
content inspection by non_smtpd_milters, header_checks and body_checks.
Specify zero or more of the following, separated by whitespace or
comma.

bounce Inspect the content of delivery status notifications.

notify Inspect the content of postmaster notifications by the smtp(8)
and smtpd(8) processes.

NOTE: It's generally not safe to enable content inspection of
Postfix-generated email messages. The user is warned.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

invalid_hostname_reject_code (default: 501)
The numerical Postfix SMTP server response code when the client HELO or
EHLO command parameter is rejected by the reject_invalid_helo_hostname
restriction.

Do not change this unless you have a complete understanding of RFC
5321.

ipc_idle (default: version dependent)
The time after which a client closes an idle internal communication
channel. The purpose is to allow Postfix daemon processes to terminate
voluntarily after they become idle. This is used, for example, by the
Postfix address resolving and rewriting clients.

With Postfix 2.4 the default value was reduced from 100s to 5s.

ipc_timeout (default: 3600s)
The time limit for sending or receiving information over an internal
communication channel. The purpose is to break out of deadlock
situations. If the time limit is exceeded the software aborts with a
fatal error.

ipc_ttl (default: 1000s)
The time after which a client closes an active internal communication
channel. The purpose is to allow Postfix daemon processes to terminate
voluntarily after reaching their client limit. This is used, for
example, by the Postfix address resolving and rewriting clients.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.1 and later.

known_tcp_ports (default: lmtp=24, smtp=25, smtps=submissions=465,
submission=587)
Optional setting that avoids lookups in the services(5) database. This
feature was implemented to address inconsistencies in the name of the
port "465" service. The ABNF is:

known_tcp_ports = empty | name-to-port *("," name-to-port)
name-to-port = 1*(service-name "=') port-number

The comma is required. Whitespace is optional but it cannot appear
inside a service name or port number.

This feature is available in Postfix 3.6 and later.

line_length_limit (default: 2048)
Upon input, long lines are chopped up into pieces of at most this
length; upon delivery, long lines are reconstructed.

lmdb_map_size (default: 16777216)
The initial OpenLDAP LMDB database size limit in bytes. Each time a
database becomes full, its size limit is doubled.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.11 and later.

lmtp_address_preference (default: ipv6)
The LMTP-specific version of the smtp_address_preference configuration
parameter. See there for details.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.8 and later.

lmtp_address_verify_target (default: rcpt)
The LMTP-specific version of the smtp_address_verify_target
configuration parameter. See there for details.

This feature is available in Postfix 3.0 and later.

lmtp_assume_final (default: no)
When a remote LMTP server announces no DSN support, assume that the
server performs final delivery, and send "delivered" delivery status
notifications instead of "relayed". The default setting is backwards
compatible to avoid the infinitesimal possibility of breaking existing
LMTP-based content filters.

lmtp_balance_inet_protocols (default: yes)
The LMTP-specific version of the smtp_balance_inet_protocols
configuration parameter. See there for details.

This feature is available in Postfix 3.3 and later.

lmtp_bind_address (default: empty)
The LMTP-specific version of the smtp_bind_address configuration
parameter. See there for details.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

lmtp_bind_address6 (default: empty)
The LMTP-specific version of the smtp_bind_address6 configuration
parameter. See there for details.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

lmtp_bind_address_enforce (default: empty)
The LMTP-specific version of the smtp_bind_address_enforce
configuration parameter. See there for details.

This feature is available in Postfix 3.7 and later.

lmtp_body_checks (default: empty)
The LMTP-specific version of the smtp_body_checks configuration
parameter. See there for details.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.5 and later.

lmtp_cache_connection (default: yes)
Keep Postfix LMTP client connections open for up to $max_idle seconds.
When the LMTP client receives a request for the same connection the
connection is reused.

This parameter is available in Postfix version 2.2 and earlier. With
Postfix version 2.3 and later, see lmtp_connection_cache_on_demand,
lmtp_connection_cache_destinations, or
lmtp_connection_reuse_time_limit.

The effectiveness of cached connections will be determined by the
number of remote LMTP servers in use, and the concurrency limit
specified for the Postfix LMTP client. Cached connections are closed
under any of the following conditions:

o The Postfix LMTP client idle time limit is reached. This limit
is specified with the Postfix max_idle configuration parameter.

o A delivery request specifies a different destination than the
one currently cached.

o The per-process limit on the number of delivery requests is
reached. This limit is specified with the Postfix max_use
configuration parameter.

o Upon the onset of another delivery request, the remote LMTP
server associated with the current session does not respond to
the RSET command.

Most of these limitations have been with the Postfix connection cache
that is shared among multiple LMTP client programs.

lmtp_cname_overrides_servername (default: yes)
The LMTP-specific version of the smtp_cname_overrides_servername
configuration parameter. See there for details.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

lmtp_connect_timeout (default: 0s)
The Postfix LMTP client time limit for completing a TCP connection, or
zero (use the operating system built-in time limit). When no
connection can be made within the deadline, the LMTP client tries the
next address on the mail exchanger list.

Example:

lmtp_connect_timeout = 30s

lmtp_connection_cache_destinations (default: empty)
The LMTP-specific version of the smtp_connection_cache_destinations
configuration parameter. See there for details.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

lmtp_connection_cache_on_demand (default: yes)
The LMTP-specific version of the smtp_connection_cache_on_demand
configuration parameter. See there for details.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

lmtp_connection_cache_time_limit (default: 2s)
The LMTP-specific version of the smtp_connection_cache_time_limit
configuration parameter. See there for details.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

lmtp_connection_reuse_count_limit (default: 0)
The LMTP-specific version of the smtp_connection_reuse_count_limit
configuration parameter. See there for details.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.11 and later.

lmtp_connection_reuse_time_limit (default: 300s)
The LMTP-specific version of the smtp_connection_reuse_time_limit
configuration parameter. See there for details.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

lmtp_data_done_timeout (default: 600s)
The Postfix LMTP client time limit for sending the LMTP ".", and for
receiving the remote LMTP server response. When no response is
received within the deadline, a warning is logged that the mail may be
delivered multiple times.

lmtp_data_init_timeout (default: 120s)
The Postfix LMTP client time limit for sending the LMTP DATA command,
and for receiving the remote LMTP server response.

lmtp_data_xfer_timeout (default: 180s)
The Postfix LMTP client time limit for sending the LMTP message
content. When the connection stalls for more than
$lmtp_data_xfer_timeout the LMTP client terminates the transfer.

lmtp_defer_if_no_mx_address_found (default: no)
The LMTP-specific version of the smtp_defer_if_no_mx_address_found
configuration parameter. See there for details.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

lmtp_delivery_status_filter (default: empty)
The LMTP-specific version of the smtp_delivery_status_filter
configuration parameter. See there for details.

This feature is available in Postfix 3.0 and later.

lmtp_destination_concurrency_limit (default:
$default_destination_concurrency_limit)
The maximal number of parallel deliveries to the same destination via
the lmtp message delivery transport. This limit is enforced by the
queue manager. The message delivery transport name is the first field
in the entry in the master.cf file.

lmtp_destination_recipient_limit (default:
$default_destination_recipient_limit)
The maximal number of recipients per message for the lmtp message
delivery transport. This limit is enforced by the queue manager. The
message delivery transport name is the first field in the entry in the
master.cf file.

Setting this parameter to a value of 1 changes the meaning of
lmtp_destination_concurrency_limit from concurrency per domain into
concurrency per recipient.

lmtp_discard_lhlo_keyword_address_maps (default: empty)
Lookup tables, indexed by the remote LMTP server address, with case
insensitive lists of LHLO keywords (pipelining, starttls, auth, etc.)
that the Postfix LMTP client will ignore in the LHLO response from a
remote LMTP server. See lmtp_discard_lhlo_keywords for details. The
table is not indexed by hostname for consistency with
smtpd_discard_ehlo_keyword_address_maps.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

lmtp_discard_lhlo_keywords (default: empty)
A case insensitive list of LHLO keywords (pipelining, starttls, auth,
etc.) that the Postfix LMTP client will ignore in the LHLO response
from a remote LMTP server.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

Notes:

o Specify the silent-discard pseudo keyword to prevent this action
from being logged.

o Use the lmtp_discard_lhlo_keyword_address_maps feature to
discard LHLO keywords selectively.

lmtp_dns_reply_filter (default: empty)
Optional filter for Postfix LMTP client DNS lookup results. See
smtp_dns_reply_filter for details including an example.

This feature is available in Postfix 3.0 and later.

lmtp_dns_resolver_options (default: empty)
The LMTP-specific version of the smtp_dns_resolver_options
configuration parameter. See there for details.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.8 and later.

lmtp_dns_support_level (default: empty)
The LMTP-specific version of the smtp_dns_support_level configuration
parameter. See there for details.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.11 and later.

lmtp_enforce_tls (default: no)
The LMTP-specific version of the smtp_enforce_tls configuration
parameter. See there for details.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

lmtp_fallback_relay (default: empty)
Optional list of relay hosts for LMTP destinations that can't be found
or that are unreachable. In main.cf elements are separated by
whitespace or commas.

By default, mail is returned to the sender when a destination is not
found, and delivery is deferred when a destination is unreachable.

The fallback relays must be TCP destinations, specified without a
leading "inet:" prefix. Specify a host or host:port. Since MX lookups
do not apply with LMTP, there is no need to use the "[host]" or
"[host]:port" forms. If you specify multiple LMTP destinations,
Postfix will try them in the specified order.

This feature is available in Postfix 3.1 and later.

lmtp_generic_maps (default: empty)
The LMTP-specific version of the smtp_generic_maps configuration
parameter. See there for details.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

lmtp_header_checks (default: empty)
The LMTP-specific version of the smtp_header_checks configuration
parameter. See there for details.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.5 and later.

lmtp_host_lookup (default: dns)
The LMTP-specific version of the smtp_host_lookup configuration
parameter. See there for details.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

lmtp_lhlo_name (default: $myhostname)
The hostname to send in the LMTP LHLO command.

The default value is the machine hostname. Specify a hostname or
[ip.add.re.ss] or [ip:v6:add:re::ss].

This information can be specified in the main.cf file for all LMTP
clients, or it can be specified in the master.cf file for a specific
client, for example:

/usr/local/etc/postfix/master.cf:
mylmtp ... lmtp -o lmtp_lhlo_name=foo.bar.com

This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

lmtp_lhlo_timeout (default: 300s)
The Postfix LMTP client time limit for sending the LHLO command, and
for receiving the initial remote LMTP server response.

Time units: s (seconds), m (minutes), h (hours), d (days), w (weeks).
The default time unit is s (seconds).

lmtp_line_length_limit (default: 998)
The LMTP-specific version of the smtp_line_length_limit configuration
parameter. See there for details.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

lmtp_mail_timeout (default: 300s)
The Postfix LMTP client time limit for sending the MAIL FROM command,
and for receiving the remote LMTP server response.

lmtp_mime_header_checks (default: empty)
The LMTP-specific version of the smtp_mime_header_checks configuration
parameter. See there for details.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.5 and later.

lmtp_min_data_rate (default: 500)
The LMTP-specific version of the smtp_min_data_rate configuration
parameter. See there for details.

This feature is available in Postfix 3.7 and later.

lmtp_mx_address_limit (default: 5)
The LMTP-specific version of the smtp_mx_address_limit configuration
parameter. See there for details.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

lmtp_mx_session_limit (default: 2)
The LMTP-specific version of the smtp_mx_session_limit configuration
parameter. See there for details.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

lmtp_nested_header_checks (default: empty)
The LMTP-specific version of the smtp_nested_header_checks
configuration parameter. See there for details.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.5 and later.

lmtp_per_record_deadline (default: no)
The LMTP-specific version of the smtp_per_record_deadline configuration
parameter. See there for details.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.9 and later.

lmtp_per_request_deadline (default: no)
The LMTP-specific version of the smtp_per_request_deadline
configuration parameter. See there for details.

This feature is available in Postfix 3.7 and later.

lmtp_pix_workaround_delay_time (default: 10s)
The LMTP-specific version of the smtp_pix_workaround_delay_time
configuration parameter. See there for details.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

lmtp_pix_workaround_maps (default: empty)
The LMTP-specific version of the smtp_pix_workaround_maps configuration
parameter. See there for details.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.4 and later.

lmtp_pix_workaround_threshold_time (default: 500s)
The LMTP-specific version of the smtp_pix_workaround_threshold_time
configuration parameter. See there for details.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

lmtp_pix_workarounds (default: empty)
The LMTP-specific version of the smtp_pix_workaround configuration
parameter. See there for details.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.4 and later.

lmtp_quit_timeout (default: 300s)
The Postfix LMTP client time limit for sending the QUIT command, and
for receiving the remote LMTP server response.

lmtp_quote_rfc821_envelope (default: yes)
The LMTP-specific version of the smtp_quote_rfc821_envelope
configuration parameter. See there for details.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

lmtp_randomize_addresses (default: yes)
The LMTP-specific version of the smtp_randomize_addresses configuration
parameter. See there for details.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

lmtp_rcpt_timeout (default: 300s)
The Postfix LMTP client time limit for sending the RCPT TO command, and
for receiving the remote LMTP server response.

lmtp_reply_filter (default: empty)
The LMTP-specific version of the smtp_reply_filter configuration
parameter. See there for details.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.7 and later.

lmtp_rset_timeout (default: 20s)
The Postfix LMTP client time limit for sending the RSET command, and
for receiving the remote LMTP server response. The LMTP client sends
RSET in order to finish a recipient address probe, or to verify that a
cached connection is still alive.

lmtp_sasl_auth_cache_name (default: empty)
The LMTP-specific version of the smtp_sasl_auth_cache_name
configuration parameter. See there for details.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.5 and later.

lmtp_sasl_auth_cache_time (default: 90d)
The LMTP-specific version of the smtp_sasl_auth_cache_time
configuration parameter. See there for details.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.5 and later.

lmtp_sasl_auth_enable (default: no)
Enable SASL authentication in the Postfix LMTP client.

lmtp_sasl_auth_soft_bounce (default: yes)
The LMTP-specific version of the smtp_sasl_auth_soft_bounce
configuration parameter. See there for details.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.5 and later.

lmtp_sasl_mechanism_filter (default: empty)
The LMTP-specific version of the smtp_sasl_mechanism_filter
configuration parameter. See there for details.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

lmtp_sasl_password_maps (default: empty)
Optional Postfix LMTP client lookup tables with one username:password
entry per host or domain. If a remote host or domain has no
username:password entry, then the Postfix LMTP client will not attempt
to authenticate to the remote host.

lmtp_sasl_path (default: empty)
Implementation-specific information that is passed through to the SASL
plug-in implementation that is selected with lmtp_sasl_type. Typically
this specifies the name of a configuration file or rendezvous point.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

lmtp_sasl_security_options (default: noplaintext, noanonymous)
SASL security options; as of Postfix 2.3 the list of available features
depends on the SASL client implementation that is selected with
lmtp_sasl_type.

The following security features are defined for the cyrus client SASL
implementation:

noplaintext
Disallow authentication methods that use plaintext passwords.

noactive
Disallow authentication methods that are vulnerable to
non-dictionary active attacks.

nodictionary
Disallow authentication methods that are vulnerable to passive
dictionary attacks.

noanonymous
Disallow anonymous logins.

Example:

lmtp_sasl_security_options = noplaintext

lmtp_sasl_tls_security_options (default: $lmtp_sasl_security_options)
The LMTP-specific version of the smtp_sasl_tls_security_options
configuration parameter. See there for details.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

lmtp_sasl_tls_verified_security_options (default:
$lmtp_sasl_tls_security_options)
The LMTP-specific version of the
smtp_sasl_tls_verified_security_options configuration parameter. See
there for details.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

lmtp_sasl_type (default: cyrus)
The SASL plug-in type that the Postfix LMTP client should use for
authentication. The available types are listed with the "postconf -A"
command.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

lmtp_send_dummy_mail_auth (default: no)
The LMTP-specific version of the smtp_send_dummy_mail_auth
configuration parameter. See there for details.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.9 and later.

lmtp_send_xforward_command (default: no)
Send an XFORWARD command to the remote LMTP server when the LMTP LHLO
server response announces XFORWARD support. This allows an lmtp(8)
delivery agent, used for content filter message injection, to forward
the name, address, protocol and HELO name of the original client to the
content filter and downstream LMTP server. Before you change the value
to yes, it is best to make sure that your content filter supports this
command.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.1 and later.

lmtp_sender_dependent_authentication (default: no)
The LMTP-specific version of the smtp_sender_dependent_authentication
configuration parameter. See there for details.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

lmtp_skip_5xx_greeting (default: yes)
The LMTP-specific version of the smtp_skip_5xx_greeting configuration
parameter. See there for details.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

lmtp_skip_quit_response (default: no)
Wait for the response to the LMTP QUIT command.

lmtp_starttls_timeout (default: 300s)
The LMTP-specific version of the smtp_starttls_timeout configuration
parameter. See there for details.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

lmtp_tcp_port (default: 24)
The default TCP port that the Postfix LMTP client connects to. Specify
a symbolic name (see services(5)) or a numeric port.

lmtp_tls_CAfile (default: empty)
The LMTP-specific version of the smtp_tls_CAfile configuration
parameter. See there for details.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

lmtp_tls_CApath (default: empty)
The LMTP-specific version of the smtp_tls_CApath configuration
parameter. See there for details.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

lmtp_tls_block_early_mail_reply (default: empty)
The LMTP-specific version of the smtp_tls_block_early_mail_reply
configuration parameter. See there for details.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.7 and later.

lmtp_tls_cert_file (default: empty)
The LMTP-specific version of the smtp_tls_cert_file configuration
parameter. See there for details.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

lmtp_tls_chain_files (default: empty)
The LMTP-specific version of the smtp_tls_chain_files configuration
parameter. See there for details.

This feature is available in Postfix 3.4 and later.

lmtp_tls_ciphers (default: medium)
The LMTP-specific version of the smtp_tls_ciphers configuration
parameter. See there for details.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.6 and later.

lmtp_tls_connection_reuse (default: no)
The LMTP-specific version of the smtp_tls_connection_reuse
configuration parameter. See there for details.

This feature is available in Postfix 3.4 and later.

lmtp_tls_dcert_file (default: empty)
The LMTP-specific version of the smtp_tls_dcert_file configuration
parameter. See there for details.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

lmtp_tls_dkey_file (default: $lmtp_tls_dcert_file)
The LMTP-specific version of the smtp_tls_dkey_file configuration
parameter. See there for details.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

lmtp_tls_eccert_file (default: empty)
The LMTP-specific version of the smtp_tls_eccert_file configuration
parameter. See there for details.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.6 and later, when Postfix is
compiled and linked with OpenSSL 1.0.0 or later.

lmtp_tls_eckey_file (default: empty)
The LMTP-specific version of the smtp_tls_eckey_file configuration
parameter. See there for details.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.6 and later, when Postfix is
compiled and linked with OpenSSL 1.0.0 or later.

lmtp_tls_enforce_peername (default: yes)
The LMTP-specific version of the smtp_tls_enforce_peername
configuration parameter. See there for details.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

lmtp_tls_exclude_ciphers (default: empty)
The LMTP-specific version of the smtp_tls_exclude_ciphers configuration
parameter. See there for details.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

lmtp_tls_fingerprint_cert_match (default: empty)
The LMTP-specific version of the smtp_tls_fingerprint_cert_match
configuration parameter. See there for details.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.5 and later.

lmtp_tls_fingerprint_digest (default: see postconf -d output)
The LMTP-specific version of the smtp_tls_fingerprint_digest
configuration parameter. See there for details.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.5 and later.

lmtp_tls_force_insecure_host_tlsa_lookup (default: no)
The LMTP-specific version of the
smtp_tls_force_insecure_host_tlsa_lookup configuration parameter. See
there for details.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.11 and later.

lmtp_tls_key_file (default: $lmtp_tls_cert_file)
The LMTP-specific version of the smtp_tls_key_file configuration
parameter. See there for details.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

lmtp_tls_loglevel (default: 0)
The LMTP-specific version of the smtp_tls_loglevel configuration
parameter. See there for details.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

lmtp_tls_mandatory_ciphers (default: medium)
The LMTP-specific version of the smtp_tls_mandatory_ciphers
configuration parameter. See there for details.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

lmtp_tls_mandatory_exclude_ciphers (default: empty)
The LMTP-specific version of the smtp_tls_mandatory_exclude_ciphers
configuration parameter. See there for details.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

lmtp_tls_mandatory_protocols (default: see postconf -d output)
The LMTP-specific version of the smtp_tls_mandatory_protocols
configuration parameter. See there for details.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

lmtp_tls_note_starttls_offer (default: no)
The LMTP-specific version of the smtp_tls_note_starttls_offer
configuration parameter. See there for details.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

lmtp_tls_per_site (default: empty)
The LMTP-specific version of the smtp_tls_per_site configuration
parameter. See there for details.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

lmtp_tls_policy_maps (default: empty)
The LMTP-specific version of the smtp_tls_policy_maps configuration
parameter. See there for details.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

lmtp_tls_protocols (default: see postconf -d output)
The LMTP-specific version of the smtp_tls_protocols configuration
parameter. See there for details.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.6 and later.

lmtp_tls_scert_verifydepth (default: 9)
The LMTP-specific version of the smtp_tls_scert_verifydepth
configuration parameter. See there for details.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

lmtp_tls_secure_cert_match (default: nexthop)
The LMTP-specific version of the smtp_tls_secure_cert_match
configuration parameter. See there for details.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

lmtp_tls_security_level (default: empty)
The LMTP-specific version of the smtp_tls_security_level configuration
parameter. See there for details.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

lmtp_tls_servername (default: empty)
The LMTP-specific version of the smtp_tls_servername configuration
parameter. See there for details.

This feature is available in Postfix 3.4 and later.

lmtp_tls_session_cache_database (default: empty)
The LMTP-specific version of the smtp_tls_session_cache_database
configuration parameter. See there for details.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

lmtp_tls_session_cache_timeout (default: 3600s)
The LMTP-specific version of the smtp_tls_session_cache_timeout
configuration parameter. See there for details.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

lmtp_tls_trust_anchor_file (default: empty)
The LMTP-specific version of the smtp_tls_trust_anchor_file
configuration parameter. See there for details.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.11 and later.

lmtp_tls_verify_cert_match (default: hostname)
The LMTP-specific version of the smtp_tls_verify_cert_match
configuration parameter. See there for details.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

lmtp_tls_wrappermode (default: no)
The LMTP-specific version of the smtp_tls_wrappermode configuration
parameter. See there for details.

This feature is available in Postfix 3.0 and later.

lmtp_use_tls (default: no)
The LMTP-specific version of the smtp_use_tls configuration parameter.
See there for details.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

lmtp_xforward_timeout (default: 300s)
The Postfix LMTP client time limit for sending the XFORWARD command,
and for receiving the remote LMTP server response.

In case of problems the client does NOT try the next address on the
mail exchanger list.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.1 and later.

local_command_shell (default: empty)
Optional shell program for local(8) delivery to non-Postfix commands.
By default, non-Postfix commands are executed directly; commands are
given to the default shell (typically, /bin/sh) only when they contain
shell meta characters or shell built-in commands.

"sendmail's restricted shell" (smrsh) is what most people will use in
order to restrict what programs can be run from e.g. .forward files
(smrsh is part of the Sendmail distribution).

Note: when a shell program is specified, it is invoked even when the
command contains no shell built-in commands or meta characters.

Example:

local_command_shell = /some/where/smrsh -c
local_command_shell = /bin/bash -c

local_delivery_status_filter (default: $default_delivery_status_filter)
Optional filter for the local(8) delivery agent to change the status
code or explanatory text of successful or unsuccessful deliveries. See
default_delivery_status_filter for details.

This feature is available in Postfix 3.0 and later.

local_destination_concurrency_limit (default: 2)
The maximal number of parallel deliveries via the local mail delivery
transport to the same recipient (when
"local_destination_recipient_limit = 1") or the maximal number of
parallel deliveries to the same local domain (when
"local_destination_recipient_limit > 1"). This limit is enforced by the
queue manager. The message delivery transport name is the first field
in the entry in the master.cf file.

A low limit of 2 is recommended, just in case someone has an expensive
shell command in a .forward file or in an alias (e.g., a mailing list
manager). You don't want to run lots of those at the same time.

local_destination_recipient_limit (default: 1)
The maximal number of recipients per message delivery via the local
mail delivery transport. This limit is enforced by the queue manager.
The message delivery transport name is the first field in the entry in
the master.cf file.

Setting this parameter to a value > 1 changes the meaning of
local_destination_concurrency_limit from concurrency per recipient into
concurrency per domain.

local_header_rewrite_clients (default: permit_inet_interfaces)
Rewrite or add message headers in mail from these clients, updating
incomplete addresses with the domain name in $myorigin or $mydomain,
and adding missing headers.

See the append_at_myorigin and append_dot_mydomain parameters for
details of how domain names are appended to incomplete addresses.

See remote_header_rewrite_domain to optionally rewrite or add message
headers in mail from other clients.

Specify a list of zero or more of the following:

permit_inet_interfaces
Append the domain name in $myorigin or $mydomain when the client
IP address matches $inet_interfaces. This is enabled by default.

permit_mynetworks
Append the domain name in $myorigin or $mydomain when the client
IP address matches any network or network address listed in
$mynetworks. This setting will not prevent remote mail header
address rewriting when mail from a remote client is forwarded by
a neighboring system.

permit_sasl_authenticated
Append the domain name in $myorigin or $mydomain when the client
is successfully authenticated via the RFC 4954 (AUTH) protocol.

permit_tls_clientcerts
Append the domain name in $myorigin or $mydomain when the remote
SMTP client TLS certificate fingerprint or public key
fingerprint (Postfix 2.9 and later) is listed in
$relay_clientcerts. The fingerprint digest algorithm is
configurable via the smtpd_tls_fingerprint_digest parameter
(hard-coded as md5 prior to Postfix version 2.5).
The default algorithm is sha256 with Postfix >= 3.6 and the
compatibility_level set to 3.6 or higher. With Postfix <= 3.5,
the default algorithm is md5. The best-practice algorithm is
now sha256. Recent advances in hash function cryptanalysis have
led to md5 and sha1 being deprecated in favor of sha256.
However, as long as there are no known "second pre-image"
attacks against the older algorithms, their use in this context,
though not recommended, is still likely safe.

permit_tls_all_clientcerts
Append the domain name in $myorigin or $mydomain when the remote
SMTP client TLS certificate is successfully verified, regardless
of whether it is listed on the server, and regardless of the
certifying authority.

check_address_map type:table

type:table
Append the domain name in $myorigin or $mydomain when the client
IP address matches the specified lookup table. The lookup
result is ignored, and no subnet lookup is done. This is
suitable for, e.g., pop-before-smtp lookup tables.

Examples:

The Postfix < 2.2 backwards compatible setting: always rewrite message
headers, and always append my own domain to incomplete header
addresses.

local_header_rewrite_clients = static:all

The purist (and default) setting: rewrite headers only in mail from
Postfix sendmail and in SMTP mail from this machine.

local_header_rewrite_clients = permit_inet_interfaces

The intermediate setting: rewrite header addresses and append $myorigin
or $mydomain information only with mail from Postfix sendmail, from
local clients, or from authorized SMTP clients.

Note: this setting will not prevent remote mail header address
rewriting when mail from a remote client is forwarded by a neighboring
system.

local_header_rewrite_clients = permit_mynetworks,
permit_sasl_authenticated permit_tls_clientcerts
check_address_map hash:$config_directory/pop-before-smtp

local_login_sender_maps (default: static:*)
A list of lookup tables that are searched by the UNIX login name, and
that return a list of allowed envelope sender patterns separated by
space or comma. These sender patterns are enforced by the Postfix
postdrop(1) command. The default is backwards-compatible: every user
may specify any sender envelope address.

When no UNIX login name is available, the postdrop(1) command will
prepend "uid:" to the numerical UID and use that instead.

This feature ignores address extensions in the user-specified envelope
sender address.

The following sender patterns are special; these cannot be used as part
of a longer pattern.

* This pattern allows any envelope sender address.

<> This pattern allows the empty envelope sender address. See the
empty_address_local_login_sender_maps_lookup_key configuration
parameter.

@domain
This pattern allows an envelope sender address when the '@' and
domain part match.

Examples:

/usr/local/etc/postfix/main.cf:
# Allow root and postfix full control, anyone else can only
# send mail as themselves. Use "uid:" followed by the numerical
# UID when the UID has no entry in the UNIX password file.
local_login_sender_maps =
inline:{ { root = * }, { postfix = * } },
pcre:$config_directory/login_senders

/usr/local/etc/postfix/login_senders:
# Allow both the bare username and the user@domain forms.
/(.+)/ $1 $1@example.com

This feature is available in Postfix 3.6 and later.

local_recipient_maps (default: proxy:unix:passwd.byname $alias_maps)
Lookup tables with all names or addresses of local recipients: a
recipient address is local when its domain matches $mydestination,
$inet_interfaces or $proxy_interfaces. Specify @domain as a wild-card
for domains that do not have a valid recipient list. Technically,
tables listed with $local_recipient_maps are used as lists: Postfix
needs to know only if a lookup string is found or not, but it does not
use the result from table lookup.

Specify zero or more "type:name" lookup tables, separated by whitespace
or comma. Tables will be searched in the specified order until a match
is found.

If this parameter is non-empty (the default), then the Postfix SMTP
server will reject mail for unknown local users.

To turn off local recipient checking in the Postfix SMTP server,
specify "local_recipient_maps =" (i.e. empty).

The default setting assumes that you use the default Postfix local
delivery agent for local delivery. You need to update the
local_recipient_maps setting if:

o You redefine the local delivery agent in master.cf.

o You redefine the "local_transport" setting in main.cf.

o You use the "luser_relay", "mailbox_transport", or
"fallback_transport" feature of the Postfix local(8) delivery
agent.

Details are described in the LOCAL_RECIPIENT_README file.

Beware: if the Postfix SMTP server runs chrooted, you need to access
the passwd file via the proxymap(8) service, in order to overcome
chroot access restrictions. The alternative, maintaining a copy of the
system password file in the chroot jail is not practical.

Examples:

local_recipient_maps =

local_transport (default: local:$myhostname)
The default mail delivery transport and next-hop destination for final
delivery to domains listed with mydestination, and for [ipaddress]
destinations that match $inet_interfaces or $proxy_interfaces. This
information can be overruled with the transport(5) table.

By default, local mail is delivered to the transport called "local",
which is just the name of a service that is defined the master.cf file.

Beware: if you override the default local delivery agent then you need
to review the LOCAL_RECIPIENT_README document, otherwise the SMTP
server may reject mail for local recipients.

luser_relay (default: empty)
Optional catch-all destination for unknown local(8) recipients. By
default, mail for unknown recipients in domains that match
$mydestination, $inet_interfaces or $proxy_interfaces is returned as
undeliverable.

The luser_relay value is not subject to Postfix configuration parameter
$name expansion. Instead, the following $name expansions are done:

$domain
The recipient domain.

$extension
The recipient address extension.

$home The recipient's home directory.

$local The entire recipient address localpart.

$recipient
The full recipient address.

$shell The recipient's login shell.

$user The recipient username.

${name?value}

${name?{value}} (Postfix >= 3.0)
Expands to value when $name is non-empty.

${name:value}

${name:{value}} (Postfix >= 3.0)
Expands to value when $name is empty.

${name?{value1}:{value2}} (Postfix >= 3.0)
Expands to value1 when $name is non-empty, value2 otherwise.

Instead of $name you can also specify ${name} or $(name).

Note: luser_relay works only for the Postfix local(8) delivery agent.

Note: if you use this feature for accounts not in the UNIX password
file, then you must specify "local_recipient_maps =" (i.e. empty) in
the main.cf file, otherwise the Postfix SMTP server will reject mail
for non-UNIX accounts with "User unknown in local recipient table".

Examples:

luser_relay = $user@other.host
luser_relay = $local@other.host
luser_relay = admin+$local

mail_name (default: Postfix)
The mail system name that is displayed in Received: headers, in the
SMTP greeting banner, and in bounced mail.

mail_owner (default: postfix)
The UNIX system account that owns the Postfix queue and most Postfix
daemon processes. Specify the name of an unprivileged user account
that does not share a user or group ID with other accounts, and that
owns no other files or processes on the system. In particular, don't
specify nobody or daemon. PLEASE USE A DEDICATED USER ID AND GROUP ID.

When this parameter value is changed you need to re-run "postfix
set-permissions" (with Postfix version 2.0 and earlier:
"/usr/local/etc/postfix/post-install set-permissions".

mail_release_date (default: see postconf -d output)
The Postfix release date, in "YYYYMMDD" format.

mail_spool_directory (default: see postconf -d output)
The directory where local(8) UNIX-style mailboxes are kept. The default
setting depends on the system type. Specify a name ending in / for
maildir-style delivery.

Note: maildir delivery is done with the privileges of the recipient.
If you use the mail_spool_directory setting for maildir style delivery,
then you must create the top-level maildir directory in advance.
Postfix will not create it.

Examples:

mail_spool_directory = /var/mail
mail_spool_directory = /var/spool/mail

mail_version (default: see postconf -d output)
The version of the mail system. Stable releases are named
major.minor.patchlevel. Experimental releases also include the release
date. The version string can be used in, for example, the SMTP greeting
banner.

mailbox_command (default: empty)
Optional external command that the local(8) delivery agent should use
for mailbox delivery. The command is run with the user ID and the
primary group ID privileges of the recipient. Exception: command
delivery for root executes with $default_privs privileges. This is not
a problem, because 1) mail for root should always be aliased to a real
user and 2) don't log in as root, use "su" instead.

The following environment variables are exported to the command:

CLIENT_ADDRESS
Remote client network address. Available in Postfix version 2.2
and later.

CLIENT_HELO
Remote client EHLO command parameter. Available in Postfix
version 2.2 and later.

CLIENT_HOSTNAME
Remote client hostname. Available in Postfix version 2.2 and
later.

CLIENT_PROTOCOL
Remote client protocol. Available in Postfix version 2.2 and
later.

DOMAIN The domain part of the recipient address.

EXTENSION
The optional address extension.

HOME The recipient home directory.

LOCAL The recipient address localpart.

LOGNAME
The recipient's username.

ORIGINAL_RECIPIENT
The entire recipient address, before any address rewriting or
aliasing.

RECIPIENT
The full recipient address.

SASL_METHOD
SASL authentication method specified in the remote client AUTH
command. Available in Postfix version 2.2 and later.

SASL_SENDER
SASL sender address specified in the remote client MAIL FROM
command. Available in Postfix version 2.2 and later.

SASL_USER
SASL username specified in the remote client AUTH command.
Available in Postfix version 2.2 and later.

SENDER The full sender address.

SHELL The recipient's login shell.

USER The recipient username.

Unlike other Postfix configuration parameters, the mailbox_command
parameter is not subjected to $name substitutions. This is to make it
easier to specify shell syntax (see example below).

If you can, avoid shell meta characters because they will force Postfix
to run an expensive shell process. If you're delivering via "procmail"
then running a shell won't make a noticeable difference in the total
cost.

Note: if you use the mailbox_command feature to deliver mail
system-wide, you must set up an alias that forwards mail for root to a
real user.

Examples:

mailbox_command = /some/where/procmail
mailbox_command = /some/where/procmail -a "$EXTENSION"
mailbox_command = /some/where/maildrop -d "$USER"
-f "$SENDER" "$EXTENSION"

mailbox_command_maps (default: empty)
Optional lookup tables with per-recipient external commands to use for
local(8) mailbox delivery. Behavior is as with mailbox_command.

Specify zero or more "type:name" lookup tables, separated by whitespace
or comma. Tables will be searched in the specified order until a match
is found.

mailbox_delivery_lock (default: see postconf -d output)
How to lock a UNIX-style local(8) mailbox before attempting delivery.
For a list of available file locking methods, use the "postconf -l"
command.

This setting is ignored with maildir style delivery, because such
deliveries are safe without explicit locks.

Note: The dotlock method requires that the recipient UID or GID has
write access to the parent directory of the mailbox file.

Note: the default setting of this parameter is system dependent.

mailbox_size_limit (default: 51200000)
The maximal size of any local(8) individual mailbox or maildir file, or
zero (no limit). In fact, this limits the size of any file that is
written to upon local delivery, including files written by external
commands that are executed by the local(8) delivery agent. The value
cannot exceed LONG_MAX (typically, a 32-bit or 64-bit signed integer).

This limit must not be smaller than the message size limit.

mailbox_transport (default: empty)
Optional message delivery transport that the local(8) delivery agent
should use for mailbox delivery to all local recipients, whether or not
they are found in the UNIX passwd database.

mailbox_transport_maps (default: empty)
Optional lookup tables with per-recipient message delivery transports
to use for local(8) mailbox delivery, whether or not the recipients are
found in the UNIX passwd database.

Specify zero or more "type:name" lookup tables, separated by whitespace
or comma. Tables will be searched in the specified order until a match
is found.

For safety reasons, this feature does not allow $number substitutions
in regular expression maps.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

maillog_file (default: empty)
The name of an optional logfile that is written by the Postfix
postlogd(8) service. An empty value selects logging to syslogd(8).
Specify "/dev/stdout" to select logging to standard output. Stdout
logging requires that Postfix is started with "postfix start-fg".

Note 1: The maillog_file parameter value must contain a prefix that is
specified with the maillog_file_prefixes parameter.

Note 2: Some Postfix non-daemon programs may still log information to
syslogd(8), before they have processed their configuration parameters
and command-line options.

This feature is available in Postfix 3.4 and later.

maillog_file_compressor (default: gzip)
The program to run after rotating $maillog_file with "postfix
logrotate". The command is run with the rotated logfile name as its
first argument.

This feature is available in Postfix 3.4 and later.

maillog_file_prefixes (default: /var, /dev/stdout)
A list of allowed prefixes for a maillog_file value. This is a safety
feature to contain the damage from a single configuration mistake.
Specify one or more prefix strings, separated by comma or whitespace.

This feature is available in Postfix 3.4 and later.

maillog_file_rotate_suffix (default: %Y%m%d-%H%M%S)
The format of the suffix to append to $maillog_file while rotating the
file with "postfix logrotate". See strftime(3) for syntax. The default
suffix, YYYYMMDD-HHMMSS, allows logs to be rotated frequently.

This feature is available in Postfix 3.4 and later.

mailq_path (default: see postconf -d output)
Sendmail compatibility feature that specifies where the Postfix
mailq(1) command is installed. This command can be used to list the
Postfix mail queue.

manpage_directory (default: see postconf -d output)
Where the Postfix manual pages are installed.

maps_rbl_domains (default: empty)
Obsolete feature: use the reject_rbl_client feature instead.

maps_rbl_reject_code (default: 554)
The numerical Postfix SMTP server response code when a remote SMTP
client request is blocked by the reject_rbl_client,
reject_rhsbl_client, reject_rhsbl_reverse_client, reject_rhsbl_sender
or reject_rhsbl_recipient restriction.

Do not change this unless you have a complete understanding of RFC
5321.

masquerade_classes (default: envelope_sender, header_sender, header_recipient)
What addresses are subject to address masquerading.

By default, address masquerading is limited to envelope sender
addresses, and to header sender and header recipient addresses. This
allows you to use address masquerading on a mail gateway while still
being able to forward mail to users on individual machines.

Specify zero or more of: envelope_sender, envelope_recipient,
header_sender, header_recipient

masquerade_domains (default: empty)
Optional list of domains whose subdomain structure will be stripped off
in email addresses.

The list is processed left to right, and processing stops at the first
match. Thus,

masquerade_domains = foo.example.com example.com

strips "user@any.thing.foo.example.com" to "user@foo.example.com", but
strips "user@any.thing.else.example.com" to "user@example.com".

A domain name prefixed with ! means do not masquerade this domain or
its subdomains. Thus,

masquerade_domains = !foo.example.com example.com

does not change "user@any.thing.foo.example.com" or
"user@foo.example.com", but strips "user@any.thing.else.example.com" to
"user@example.com".

Note: with Postfix version 2.2, message header address masquerading
happens only when message header address rewriting is enabled:

o The message is received with the Postfix sendmail(1) command,

o The message is received from a network client that matches
$local_header_rewrite_clients,

o The message is received from the network, and the
remote_header_rewrite_domain parameter specifies a non-empty
value.

To get the behavior before Postfix version 2.2, specify
"local_header_rewrite_clients = static:all".

Example:

masquerade_domains = $mydomain

masquerade_exceptions (default: empty)
Optional list of user names that are not subjected to address
masquerading, even when their addresses match $masquerade_domains.

By default, address masquerading makes no exceptions.

Examples:

masquerade_exceptions = root, mailer-daemon
masquerade_exceptions = root

master_service_disable (default: empty)
Selectively disable master(8) listener ports by service type or by
service name and type. Specify a list of service types ("inet",
"unix", "fifo", or "pass") or "name/type" tuples, where "name" is the
first field of a master.cf entry and "type" is a service type. As with
other Postfix matchlists, a search stops at the first match. Specify
"!pattern" to exclude a service from the list. By default, all
master(8) listener ports are enabled.

Note: this feature does not support "/file/name" or "type:table"
patterns, nor does it support wildcards such as "*" or "all". This is
intentional.

Examples:

# With Postfix 2.6..2.10 use '.' instead of '/'.
# Turn on all master(8) listener ports (the default).
master_service_disable =
# Turn off only the main SMTP listener port.
master_service_disable = smtp/inet
# Turn off all TCP/IP listener ports.
master_service_disable = inet
# Turn off all TCP/IP listener ports except "foo".
master_service_disable = !foo/inet, inet

This feature is available in Postfix 2.6 and later.

max_idle (default: 100s)
The maximum amount of time that an idle Postfix daemon process waits
for an incoming connection before terminating voluntarily. This
parameter is ignored by the Postfix queue manager and by other
long-lived Postfix daemon processes.

max_use (default: 100)
The maximal number of incoming connections that a Postfix daemon
process will service before terminating voluntarily. This parameter is
ignored by the Postfix queue manager and by other long-lived Postfix
daemon processes.

maximal_backoff_time (default: 4000s)
The maximal time between attempts to deliver a deferred message.

This parameter should be set to a value greater than or equal to
$minimal_backoff_time. See also $queue_run_delay.

maximal_queue_lifetime (default: 5d)
Consider a message as undeliverable, when delivery fails with a
temporary error, and the time in the queue has reached the
maximal_queue_lifetime limit.

Specify 0 when mail delivery should be tried only once.

message_drop_headers (default: bcc, content-length, resent-bcc, return-path)
Names of message headers that the cleanup(8) daemon will remove after
applying header_checks(5) and before invoking Milter applications. The
default setting is compatible with Postfix < 3.0.

Specify a list of header names, separated by comma or space. Names are
matched in a case-insensitive manner. The list of supported header
names is limited only by available memory.

This feature is available in Postfix 3.0 and later.

message_reject_characters (default: empty)
The set of characters that Postfix will reject in message content. The
usual C-like escape sequences are recognized: \a \b \f \n \r \t \v \ddd
(up to three octal digits) and \\.

Note 1: this feature does not recognize text that requires MIME
decoding. It inspects raw message content, just like header_checks and
body_checks.

Note 2: this feature is disabled with "receive_override_options =
no_header_body_checks".

Example:

message_reject_characters = \0

This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

message_size_limit (default: 10240000)
The maximal size in bytes of a message, including envelope information.
The value cannot exceed LONG_MAX (typically, a 32-bit or 64-bit signed
integer).

Note: be careful when making changes. Excessively small values will
result in the loss of non-delivery notifications, when a bounce message
size exceeds the local or remote MTA's message size limit.

message_strip_characters (default: empty)
The set of characters that Postfix will remove from message content.
The usual C-like escape sequences are recognized: \a \b \f \n \r \t \v
\ddd (up to three octal digits) and \\.

Note 1: this feature does not recognize text that requires MIME
decoding. It inspects raw message content, just like header_checks and
body_checks.

Note 2: this feature is disabled with "receive_override_options =
no_header_body_checks".

Example:

message_strip_characters = \0

This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

meta_directory (default: see 'postconf -d' output)
The location of non-executable files that are shared among multiple
Postfix instances, such as postfix-files, dynamicmaps.cf, and the
multi-instance template files main.cf.proto and master.cf.proto. This
directory should contain only Postfix-related files. Typically, the
meta_directory parameter has the same default as the config_directory
parameter (/usr/local/etc/postfix or /usr/local/usr/local/etc/postfix).

For backwards compatibility with Postfix versions 2.6..2.11, specify
"meta_directory = $daemon_directory" in main.cf before installing or
upgrading Postfix, or specify "meta_directory = /path/name" on the
"make makefiles", "make install" or "make upgrade" command line.

This feature is available in Postfix 3.0 and later.

milter_command_timeout (default: 30s)
The time limit for sending an SMTP command to a Milter (mail filter)
application, and for receiving the response.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

milter_connect_macros (default: see postconf -d output)
The macros that are sent to Milter (mail filter) applications after
completion of an SMTP connection. See MILTER_README for a list of
available macro names and their meanings.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

milter_connect_timeout (default: 30s)
The time limit for connecting to a Milter (mail filter) application,
and for negotiating protocol options.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

milter_content_timeout (default: 300s)
The time limit for sending message content to a Milter (mail filter)
application, and for receiving the response.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

milter_data_macros (default: see postconf -d output)
The macros that are sent to version 4 or higher Milter (mail filter)
applications after the SMTP DATA command. See MILTER_README for a list
of available macro names and their meanings.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

milter_default_action (default: tempfail)
The default action when a Milter (mail filter) response is unavailable
(for example, bad Postfix configuration or Milter failure). Specify one
of the following:

accept Proceed as if the mail filter was not present.

reject Reject all further commands in this session with a permanent
status code.

tempfail
Reject all further commands in this session with a temporary
status code.

quarantine
Like "accept", but freeze the message in the "hold" queue.
Available with Postfix 2.6 and later.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

milter_end_of_data_macros (default: see postconf -d output)
The macros that are sent to Milter (mail filter) applications after the
message end-of-data. See MILTER_README for a list of available macro
names and their meanings.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

milter_end_of_header_macros (default: see postconf -d output)
The macros that are sent to Milter (mail filter) applications after the
end of the message header. See MILTER_README for a list of available
macro names and their meanings.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.5 and later.

milter_header_checks (default: empty)
Optional lookup tables for content inspection of message headers that
are produced by Milter applications. See the header_checks(5) manual
page available actions. Currently, PREPEND is not implemented.

The following example sends all mail that is marked as SPAM to a spam
handling machine. Note that matches are case-insensitive by default.

/usr/local/etc/postfix/main.cf:
milter_header_checks = pcre:$config_directory/milter_header_checks

/usr/local/etc/postfix/milter_header_checks:
/^X-SPAM-FLAG:\s+YES/ FILTER mysmtp:sanitizer.example.com:25

The milter_header_checks mechanism could also be used for allowlisting.
For example it could be used to skip heavy content inspection for
DKIM-signed mail from known friendly domains.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.7, and as an optional patch for
Postfix 2.6.

milter_helo_macros (default: see postconf -d output)
The macros that are sent to Milter (mail filter) applications after the
SMTP HELO or EHLO command. See MILTER_README for a list of available
macro names and their meanings.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

milter_macro_daemon_name (default: $myhostname)
The {daemon_name} macro value for Milter (mail filter) applications.
See MILTER_README for a list of available macro names and their
meanings.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

milter_macro_defaults (default: empty)
Optional list of name=value pairs that specify default values for
arbitrary macros that Postfix may send to Milter applications. These
defaults are used when there is no corresponding information from the
message delivery context.

Specify name=value or {name=value} pairs separated by comma or
whitespace. Enclose a pair in "{}" when a value contains comma or
whitespace (this form ignores whitespace after the enclosing "{",
around the "=", and before the enclosing "}").

This feature is available in Postfix 3.1 and later.

milter_macro_v (default: $mail_name $mail_version)
The {v} macro value for Milter (mail filter) applications. See
MILTER_README for a list of available macro names and their meanings.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

milter_mail_macros (default: see postconf -d output)
The macros that are sent to Milter (mail filter) applications after the
SMTP MAIL FROM command. See MILTER_README for a list of available macro
names and their meanings.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

milter_protocol (default: 6)
The mail filter protocol version and optional protocol extensions for
communication with a Milter application; prior to Postfix 2.6 the
default protocol is 2. Postfix sends this version number during the
initial protocol handshake. It should match the version number that is
expected by the mail filter application (or by its Milter library).

Protocol versions:

2 Use Sendmail 8 mail filter protocol version 2 (default with
Sendmail version 8.11 .. 8.13 and Postfix version 2.3 .. 2.5).

3 Use Sendmail 8 mail filter protocol version 3.

4 Use Sendmail 8 mail filter protocol version 4.

6 Use Sendmail 8 mail filter protocol version 6 (default with
Sendmail version 8.14 and Postfix version 2.6).

Protocol extensions:

no_header_reply
Specify this when the Milter application will not reply for each
individual message header.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

milter_rcpt_macros (default: see postconf -d output)
The macros that are sent to Milter (mail filter) applications after the
SMTP RCPT TO command. See MILTER_README for a list of available macro
names and their meanings.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

milter_unknown_command_macros (default: see postconf -d output)
The macros that are sent to version 3 or higher Milter (mail filter)
applications after an unknown SMTP command. See MILTER_README for a
list of available macro names and their meanings.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

mime_boundary_length_limit (default: 2048)
The maximal length of MIME multipart boundary strings. The MIME
processor is unable to distinguish between boundary strings that do not
differ in the first $mime_boundary_length_limit characters.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.0 and later.

mime_header_checks (default: $header_checks)
Optional lookup tables for content inspection of MIME related message
headers, as described in the header_checks(5) manual page.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.0 and later.

mime_nesting_limit (default: 100)
The maximal recursion level that the MIME processor will handle.
Postfix refuses mail that is nested deeper than the specified limit.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.0 and later.

minimal_backoff_time (default: 300s)
The minimal time between attempts to deliver a deferred message; prior
to Postfix 2.4 the default value was 1000s.

This parameter also limits the time an unreachable destination is kept
in the short-term, in-memory, destination status cache.

This parameter should be set greater than or equal to $queue_run_delay.
See also $maximal_backoff_time.

multi_instance_directories (default: empty)
An optional list of non-default Postfix configuration directories;
these directories belong to additional Postfix instances that share the
Postfix executable files and documentation with the default Postfix
instance, and that are started, stopped, etc., together with the
default Postfix instance. Specify a list of pathnames separated by
comma or whitespace.

When $multi_instance_directories is empty, the postfix(1) command runs
in single-instance mode and operates on a single Postfix instance only.
Otherwise, the postfix(1) command runs in multi-instance mode and
invokes the multi-instance manager specified with the
multi_instance_wrapper parameter. The multi-instance manager in turn
executes postfix(1) commands for the default instance and for all
Postfix instances in $multi_instance_directories.

Currently, this parameter setting is ignored except for the default
main.cf file.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.6 and later.

multi_instance_enable (default: no)
Allow this Postfix instance to be started, stopped, etc., by a
multi-instance manager. By default, new instances are created in a
safe state that prevents them from being started inadvertently. This
parameter is reserved for the multi-instance manager.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.6 and later.

multi_instance_group (default: empty)
The optional instance group name of this Postfix instance. A group
identifies closely-related Postfix instances that the multi-instance
manager can start, stop, etc., as a unit. This parameter is reserved
for the multi-instance manager.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.6 and later.

multi_instance_name (default: empty)
The optional instance name of this Postfix instance. This name becomes
also the default value for the syslog_name parameter.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.6 and later.

multi_instance_wrapper (default: empty)
The pathname of a multi-instance manager command that the postfix(1)
command invokes when the multi_instance_directories parameter value is
non-empty. The pathname may be followed by initial command arguments
separated by whitespace; shell metacharacters such as quotes are not
supported in this context.

The postfix(1) command invokes the manager command with the postfix(1)
non-option command arguments on the manager command line, and with all
installation configuration parameters exported into the manager command
process environment. The manager command in turn invokes the postfix(1)
command for individual Postfix instances as "postfix -c
config_directory command".

This feature is available in Postfix 2.6 and later.

multi_recipient_bounce_reject_code (default: 550)
The numerical Postfix SMTP server response code when a remote SMTP
client request is blocked by the reject_multi_recipient_bounce
restriction.

Do not change this unless you have a complete understanding of RFC
5321.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.1 and later.

mydestination (default: $myhostname, localhost.$mydomain, localhost)
The list of domains that are delivered via the $local_transport mail
delivery transport. By default this is the Postfix local(8) delivery
agent which looks up all recipients in /etc/passwd and /etc/aliases.
The SMTP server validates recipient addresses with
$local_recipient_maps and rejects non-existent recipients. See also the
local domain class in the ADDRESS_CLASS_README file.

The default mydestination value specifies names for the local machine
only. On a mail domain gateway, you should also include $mydomain.

The $local_transport delivery method is also selected for mail
addressed to user@[the.net.work.address] of the mail system (the IP
addresses specified with the inet_interfaces and proxy_interfaces
parameters).

Warnings:

o Do not specify the names of virtual domains - those domains are
specified elsewhere. See VIRTUAL_README for more information.

o Do not specify the names of domains that this machine is backup
MX host for. See STANDARD_CONFIGURATION_README for how to set up
backup MX hosts.

o By default, the Postfix SMTP server rejects mail for recipients
not listed with the local_recipient_maps parameter. See the
postconf(5) manual for a description of the local_recipient_maps
and unknown_local_recipient_reject_code parameters.

Examples:

mydestination = $myhostname, localhost.$mydomain $mydomain
mydestination = $myhostname, localhost.$mydomain www.$mydomain, ftp.$mydomain

mydomain (default: see postconf -d output)
The internet domain name of this mail system. The default is to use
$myhostname minus the first component, or "localdomain" (Postfix 2.3
and later). $mydomain is used as a default value for many other
configuration parameters.

Example:

mydomain = domain.tld

myhostname (default: see postconf -d output)
The internet hostname of this mail system. The default is to use the
fully-qualified domain name (FQDN) from gethostname(), or to use the
non-FQDN result from gethostname() and append ".$mydomain".
$myhostname is used as a default value for many other configuration
parameters.

Example:

myhostname = host.example.com

mynetworks (default: see postconf -d output)
The list of "trusted" remote SMTP clients that have more privileges
than "strangers".

In particular, "trusted" SMTP clients are allowed to relay mail through
Postfix. See the smtpd_relay_restrictions parameter description in the
postconf(5) manual.

You can specify the list of "trusted" network addresses by hand or you
can let Postfix do it for you (which is the default). See the
description of the mynetworks_style parameter for more information.

If you specify the mynetworks list by hand, Postfix ignores the
mynetworks_style setting.

Specify a list of network addresses or network/netmask patterns,
separated by commas and/or whitespace. Continue long lines by starting
the next line with whitespace.

The netmask specifies the number of bits in the network part of a host
address. You can also specify "/file/name" or "type:table" patterns.
A "/file/name" pattern is replaced by its contents; a "type:table"
lookup table is matched when a table entry matches a lookup string (the
lookup result is ignored).

The list is matched left to right, and the search stops on the first
match. Specify "!pattern" to exclude an address or network block from
the list. The form "!/file/name" is supported only in Postfix version
2.4 and later.

Note 1: Pattern matching of domain names is controlled by the presence
or absence of "mynetworks" in the parent_domain_matches_subdomains
parameter value.

Note 2: IP version 6 address information must be specified inside [] in
the mynetworks value, and in files specified with "/file/name". IP
version 6 addresses contain the ":" character, and would otherwise be
confused with a "type:table" pattern.

Note 3: CIDR ranges cannot be specified in hash tables. Use cidr
tables if CIDR ranges are used.

Examples:

mynetworks = 127.0.0.0/8 168.100.189.0/28
mynetworks = !192.168.0.1, 192.168.0.0/28
mynetworks = 127.0.0.0/8 168.100.189.0/28 [::1]/128 [2001:240:587::]/64
mynetworks = $config_directory/mynetworks
mynetworks = hash:$config_directory/network_table
mynetworks = cidr:$config_directory/network_table.cidr

mynetworks_style (default: Postfix >= 3.0: host, Postfix < 3.0: subnet)
The method to generate the default value for the mynetworks parameter.
This is the list of trusted networks for relay access control etc.

o Specify "mynetworks_style = host" when Postfix should "trust"
only the local machine.

o Specify "mynetworks_style = subnet" when Postfix should "trust"
remote SMTP clients in the same IP subnetworks as the local
machine. On Linux, this works correctly only with interfaces
specified with the "ifconfig" or "ip" command.

o Specify "mynetworks_style = class" when Postfix should "trust"
remote SMTP clients in the same IP class A/B/C networks as the
local machine. Caution: this may cause Postfix to "trust" your
entire provider's network. Instead, specify an explicit
mynetworks list by hand, as described with the mynetworks
configuration parameter.

myorigin (default: $myhostname)
The domain name that locally-posted mail appears to come from, and that
locally posted mail is delivered to. The default, $myhostname, is
adequate for small sites. If you run a domain with multiple machines,
you should (1) change this to $mydomain and (2) set up a domain-wide
alias database that aliases each user to user@that.users.mailhost.

Example:

myorigin = $mydomain

nested_header_checks (default: $header_checks)
Optional lookup tables for content inspection of non-MIME message
headers in attached messages, as described in the header_checks(5)
manual page.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.0 and later.

newaliases_path (default: see postconf -d output)
Sendmail compatibility feature that specifies the location of the
newaliases(1) command. This command can be used to rebuild the local(8)
aliases(5) database.

non_fqdn_reject_code (default: 504)
The numerical Postfix SMTP server reply code when a client request is
rejected by the reject_non_fqdn_helo_hostname, reject_non_fqdn_sender
or reject_non_fqdn_recipient restriction.

non_smtpd_milters (default: empty)
A list of Milter (mail filter) applications for new mail that does not
arrive via the Postfix smtpd(8) server. This includes local submission
via the sendmail(1) command line, new mail that arrives via the Postfix
qmqpd(8) server, and old mail that is re-injected into the queue with
"postsuper -r". Specify space or comma as a separator. See the
MILTER_README document for details.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

notify_classes (default: resource, software)
The list of error classes that are reported to the postmaster. These
postmaster notifications do not replace user notifications. The default
is to report only the most serious problems. The paranoid may wish to
turn on the policy (UCE and mail relaying) and protocol error (broken
mail software) reports.

NOTE: postmaster notifications may contain confidential information
such as SASL passwords or message content. It is the system
administrator's responsibility to treat such information with care.

The error classes are:

bounce (also implies 2bounce)
Send the postmaster copies of the headers of bounced mail, and
send transcripts of SMTP sessions when Postfix rejects mail. The
notification is sent to the address specified with the
bounce_notice_recipient configuration parameter (default:
postmaster).

2bounce
Send undeliverable bounced mail to the postmaster. The
notification is sent to the address specified with the
2bounce_notice_recipient configuration parameter (default:
postmaster).

data Send the postmaster a transcript of the SMTP session with an
error because a critical data file was unavailable. The
notification is sent to the address specified with the
error_notice_recipient configuration parameter (default:
postmaster).
This feature is available in Postfix 2.9 and later.

delay Send the postmaster copies of the headers of delayed mail (see
delay_warning_time). The notification is sent to the address
specified with the delay_notice_recipient configuration
parameter (default: postmaster).

policy Send the postmaster a transcript of the SMTP session when a
client request was rejected because of (UCE) policy. The
notification is sent to the address specified with the
error_notice_recipient configuration parameter (default:
postmaster).

protocol
Send the postmaster a transcript of the SMTP session in case of
client or server protocol errors. The notification is sent to
the address specified with the error_notice_recipient
configuration parameter (default: postmaster).

resource
Inform the postmaster of mail not delivered due to resource
problems. The notification is sent to the address specified
with the error_notice_recipient configuration parameter
(default: postmaster).

software
Inform the postmaster of mail not delivered due to software
problems. The notification is sent to the address specified
with the error_notice_recipient configuration parameter
(default: postmaster).

Examples:

notify_classes = bounce, delay, policy, protocol, resource, software
notify_classes = 2bounce, resource, software

openssl_path (default: openssl)
The location of the OpenSSL command line program openssl(1). This is
used by the "postfix tls" command to create private keys, certificate
signing requests, self-signed certificates, and to compute public key
digests for DANE TLSA records. In multi-instance environments, this
parameter is always determined from the configuration of the default
Postfix instance.

Example:

/usr/local/etc/postfix/main.cf:
# NetBSD pkgsrc:
openssl_path = /usr/pkg/bin/openssl
# Local build:
openssl_path = /usr/local/bin/openssl

This feature is available in Postfix 3.1 and later.

owner_request_special (default: yes)
Enable special treatment for owner-listname entries in the aliases(5)
file, and don't split owner-listname and listname-request address
localparts when the recipient_delimiter is set to "-". This feature is
useful for mailing lists.

parent_domain_matches_subdomains (default: see postconf -d output)
A list of Postfix features where the pattern "example.com" also matches
subdomains of example.com, instead of requiring an explicit
".example.com" pattern. This is planned backwards compatibility:
eventually, all Postfix features are expected to require explicit
".example.com" style patterns when you really want to match subdomains.

The following Postfix feature names are supported.

Postfix version 1.0 and later
debug_peer_list, fast_flush_domains, mynetworks,
permit_mx_backup_networks, relay_domains, transport_maps

Postfix version 1.1 and later
qmqpd_authorized_clients, smtpd_access_maps,

Postfix version 2.8 and later
postscreen_access_list

Postfix version 3.0 and later
smtpd_client_event_limit_exceptions

permit_mx_backup_networks (default: empty)
Restrict the use of the permit_mx_backup SMTP access feature to only
domains whose primary MX hosts match the listed networks. The
parameter value syntax is the same as with the mynetworks parameter;
note, however, that the default value is empty.

Pattern matching of domain names is controlled by the presence or
absence of "permit_mx_backup_networks" in the
parent_domain_matches_subdomains parameter value.

pickup_service_name (default: pickup)
The name of the pickup(8) service. This service picks up local mail
submissions from the Postfix maildrop queue.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.0 and later.

pipe_delivery_status_filter (default: $default_delivery_status_filter)
Optional filter for the pipe(8) delivery agent to change the delivery
status code or explanatory text of successful or unsuccessful
deliveries. See default_delivery_status_filter for details.

This feature is available in Postfix 3.0 and later.

plaintext_reject_code (default: 450)
The numerical Postfix SMTP server response code when a request is
rejected by the reject_plaintext_session restriction.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

postlog_service_name (default: postlog)
The name of the postlogd(8) service entry in master.cf. This service
appends logfile records to the file specified with the maillog_file
parameter.

This feature is available in Postfix 3.4 and later.

postlogd_watchdog_timeout (default: 10s)
How much time a postlogd(8) process may take to process a request
before it is terminated by a built-in watchdog timer. This is a safety
mechanism that prevents postlogd(8) from becoming non-responsive due to
a bug in Postfix itself or in system software. This limit cannot be set
under 10s.

This feature is available in Postfix 3.4 and later.

postmulti_control_commands (default: reload flush)
The postfix(1) commands that the postmulti(1) instance manager treats
as "control" commands, that operate on running instances. For these
commands, disabled instances are skipped.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.6 and later.

postmulti_start_commands (default: start)
The postfix(1) commands that the postmulti(1) instance manager treats
as "start" commands. For these commands, disabled instances are
"checked" rather than "started", and failure to "start" a member
instance of an instance group will abort the start-up of later
instances.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.6 and later.

postmulti_stop_commands (default: see postconf -d output)
The postfix(1) commands that the postmulti(1) instance manager treats
as "stop" commands. For these commands, disabled instances are skipped,
and enabled instances are processed in reverse order.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.6 and later.

postscreen_access_list (default: permit_mynetworks)
Permanent allow/denylist for remote SMTP client IP addresses.
postscreen(8) searches this list immediately after a remote SMTP client
connects. Specify a comma- or whitespace-separated list of commands
(in upper or lower case) or lookup tables. The search stops upon the
first command that fires for the client IP address.

permit_mynetworks
Allowlist the client and terminate the search if the client IP
address matches $mynetworks. Do not subject the client to any
before/after 220 greeting tests. Pass the connection
immediately to a Postfix SMTP server process.
Pattern matching of domain names is controlled by the presence
or absence of "postscreen_access_list" in the
parent_domain_matches_subdomains parameter value.

type:table
Query the specified lookup table. Each table lookup result is an
access list, except that access lists inside a table cannot
specify type:table entries.
To discourage the use of hash, btree, etc. tables, there is no
support for substring matching like smtpd(8). Use CIDR tables
instead.

permit
Allowlist the client and terminate the search. Do not subject
the client to any before/after 220 greeting tests. Pass the
connection immediately to a Postfix SMTP server process.

reject
Denylist the client and terminate the search. Subject the client
to the action configured with the postscreen_denylist_action
configuration parameter.

dunno All postscreen(8) access lists implicitly have this command at
the end.
When dunno is executed inside a lookup table, return from the
lookup table and evaluate the next command.
When dunno is executed outside a lookup table, terminate the
search, and subject the client to the configured before/after
220 greeting tests.

Example:

/usr/local/etc/postfix/main.cf:
postscreen_access_list = permit_mynetworks,
cidr:$config_directory/postscreen_access.cidr
# Postfix < 3.6 use postscreen_blacklist_action.
postscreen_denylist_action = enforce

/usr/local/etc/postfix/postscreen_access.cidr:
# Rules are evaluated in the order as specified.
# Denylist 192.168.* except 192.168.0.1.
192.168.0.1 dunno
192.168.0.0/16 reject

This feature is available in Postfix 2.8.

postscreen_allowlist_interfaces (default: static:all)
A list of local postscreen(8) server IP addresses where a
non-allowlisted remote SMTP client can obtain postscreen(8)'s temporary
allowlist status. This status is required before the client can talk to
a Postfix SMTP server process. By default, a client can obtain
postscreen(8)'s allowlist status on any local postscreen(8) server IP
address.

When postscreen(8) listens on both primary and backup MX addresses, the
postscreen_allowlist_interfaces parameter can be configured to give the
temporary allowlist status only when a client connects to a primary MX
address. Once a client is allowlisted it can talk to a Postfix SMTP
server on any address. Thus, clients that connect only to backup MX
addresses will never become allowlisted, and will never be allowed to
talk to a Postfix SMTP server process.

Specify a list of network addresses or network/netmask patterns,
separated by commas and/or whitespace. The netmask specifies the number
of bits in the network part of a host address. Continue long lines by
starting the next line with whitespace.

You can also specify "/file/name" or "type:table" patterns. A
"/file/name" pattern is replaced by its contents; a "type:table" lookup
table is matched when a table entry matches a lookup string (the lookup
result is ignored).

The list is matched left to right, and the search stops on the first
match. Specify "!pattern" to exclude an address or network block from
the list.

Note: IP version 6 address information must be specified inside [] in
the postscreen_allowlist_interfaces value, and in files specified with
"/file/name". IP version 6 addresses contain the ":" character, and
would otherwise be confused with a "type:table" pattern.

Example:

/usr/local/etc/postfix/main.cf:
# Don't allowlist connections to the backup IP address.
# Postfix < 3.6 use postscreen_whitelist_interfaces.
postscreen_allowlist_interfaces = !168.100.189.8, static:all

This feature is available in Postfix 3.6 and later.

Available as postscreen_whitelist_interfaces in Postfix 2.9 - 3.5.

postscreen_bare_newline_action (default: ignore)
The action that postscreen(8) takes when a remote SMTP client sends a
bare newline character, that is, a newline not preceded by carriage
return. Specify one of the following:

ignore Ignore the failure of this test. Allow other tests to complete.
Do not repeat this test before the result from some other test
expires. This option is useful for testing and collecting
statistics without blocking mail permanently.

enforce
Allow other tests to complete. Reject attempts to deliver mail
with a 550 SMTP reply, and log the helo/sender/recipient
information. Repeat this test the next time the client
connects.

drop Drop the connection immediately with a 521 SMTP reply. Repeat
this test the next time the client connects.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.8.

postscreen_bare_newline_enable (default: no)
Enable "bare newline" SMTP protocol tests in the postscreen(8) server.
These tests are expensive: a remote SMTP client must disconnect after
it passes the test, before it can talk to a real Postfix SMTP server.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.8.

postscreen_bare_newline_ttl (default: 30d)
The amount of time that postscreen(8) will use the result from a
successful "bare newline" SMTP protocol test. During this time, the
client IP address is excluded from this test. The default is long
because a remote SMTP client must disconnect after it passes the test,
before it can talk to a real Postfix SMTP server.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.8.

postscreen_blacklist_action (default: ignore)
Renamed to postscreen_denylist_action in Postfix 3.6.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.8 - 3.5.

postscreen_cache_cleanup_interval (default: 12h)
The amount of time between postscreen(8) cache cleanup runs. Cache
cleanup increases the load on the cache database and should therefore
not be run frequently. This feature requires that the cache database
supports the "delete" and "sequence" operators. Specify a zero
interval to disable cache cleanup.

After each cache cleanup run, the postscreen(8) daemon logs the number
of entries that were retained and dropped. A cleanup run is logged as
"partial" when the daemon terminates early after "postfix reload",
"postfix stop", or no requests for $max_idle seconds.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.8.

postscreen_cache_map (default: btree:$data_directory/postscreen_cache)
Persistent storage for the postscreen(8) server decisions.

To share a postscreen(8) cache between multiple postscreen(8)
instances, use "postscreen_cache_map = proxy:btree:/path/to/file".
This requires Postfix version 2.9 or later; earlier proxymap(8)
implementations don't support cache cleanup. For an alternative
approach see the memcache_table(5) manpage.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.8.

postscreen_cache_retention_time (default: 7d)
The amount of time that postscreen(8) will cache an expired temporary
allowlist entry before it is removed. This prevents clients from being
logged as "NEW" just because their cache entry expired an hour ago. It
also prevents the cache from filling up with clients that passed some
deep protocol test once and never came back.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.8.

postscreen_client_connection_count_limit (default:
$smtpd_client_connection_count_limit)
How many simultaneous connections any remote SMTP client is allowed to
have with the postscreen(8) daemon. By default, this limit is the same
as with the Postfix SMTP server. Note that the triage process can take
several seconds, with the time spent in postscreen_greet_wait delay,
and with the time spent talking to the postscreen(8) built-in dummy
SMTP protocol engine.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.8.

postscreen_command_count_limit (default: 20)
The limit on the total number of commands per SMTP session for
postscreen(8)'s built-in SMTP protocol engine. This SMTP engine defers
or rejects all attempts to deliver mail, therefore there is no need to
enforce separate limits on the number of junk commands and error
commands.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.8.

postscreen_command_filter (default: $smtpd_command_filter)
A mechanism to transform commands from remote SMTP clients. See
smtpd_command_filter for further details.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.8 and later.

postscreen_command_time_limit (default: normal: 300s, overload: 10s)
The time limit to read an entire command line with postscreen(8)'s
built-in SMTP protocol engine.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.8.

postscreen_denylist_action (default: ignore)
The action that postscreen(8) takes when a remote SMTP client is
permanently denylisted with the postscreen_access_list parameter.
Specify one of the following:

ignore (default)
Ignore this result. Allow other tests to complete. Repeat this
test the next time the client connects. This option is useful
for testing and collecting statistics without blocking mail.

enforce
Allow other tests to complete. Reject attempts to deliver mail
with a 550 SMTP reply, and log the helo/sender/recipient
information. Repeat this test the next time the client
connects.

drop Drop the connection immediately with a 521 SMTP reply. Repeat
this test the next time the client connects.

This feature is available in Postfix 3.6 and later.

Available as postscreen_blacklist_action in Postfix 2.8 - 3.5.

postscreen_disable_vrfy_command (default: $disable_vrfy_command)
Disable the SMTP VRFY command in the postscreen(8) daemon. See
disable_vrfy_command for details.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.8.

postscreen_discard_ehlo_keyword_address_maps (default:
$smtpd_discard_ehlo_keyword_address_maps)
Lookup tables, indexed by the remote SMTP client address, with case
insensitive lists of EHLO keywords (pipelining, starttls, auth, etc.)
that the postscreen(8) server will not send in the EHLO response to a
remote SMTP client. See smtpd_discard_ehlo_keywords for details. The
table is not searched by hostname for robustness reasons.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.8 and later.

postscreen_discard_ehlo_keywords (default: $smtpd_discard_ehlo_keywords)
A case insensitive list of EHLO keywords (pipelining, starttls, auth,
etc.) that the postscreen(8) server will not send in the EHLO response
to a remote SMTP client. See smtpd_discard_ehlo_keywords for details.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.8 and later.

postscreen_dnsbl_action (default: ignore)
The action that postscreen(8) takes when a remote SMTP client's
combined DNSBL score is equal to or greater than a threshold (as
defined with the postscreen_dnsbl_sites and postscreen_dnsbl_threshold
parameters). Specify one of the following:

ignore (default)
Ignore the failure of this test. Allow other tests to complete.
Repeat this test the next time the client connects. This option
is useful for testing and collecting statistics without blocking
mail.

enforce
Allow other tests to complete. Reject attempts to deliver mail
with a 550 SMTP reply, and log the helo/sender/recipient
information. Repeat this test the next time the client
connects.

drop Drop the connection immediately with a 521 SMTP reply. Repeat
this test the next time the client connects.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.8.

postscreen_dnsbl_allowlist_threshold (default: 0)
Allow a remote SMTP client to skip "before" and "after 220 greeting"
protocol tests, based on its combined DNSBL score as defined with the
postscreen_dnsbl_sites parameter.

Specify a negative value to enable this feature. When a client passes
the postscreen_dnsbl_allowlist_threshold without having failed other
tests, all pending or disabled tests are flagged as completed with a
time-to-live value equal to postscreen_dnsbl_ttl. When a test was
already completed, its time-to-live value is updated if it was less
than postscreen_dnsbl_ttl.

This feature is available in Postfix 3.6 and later.

Available as postscreen_dnsbl_whitelist_threshold in Postfix 2.11 -
3.5.

postscreen_dnsbl_max_ttl (default:
${postscreen_dnsbl_ttl?{$postscreen_dnsbl_ttl}:{1}}h)
The maximum amount of time that postscreen(8) will use the result from
a successful DNS-based reputation test before a client IP address is
required to pass that test again. If the DNS reply specifies a shorter
TTL value, that value will be used unless it would be smaller than
postscreen_dnsbl_min_ttl.

This feature is available in Postfix 3.1. The default setting is
backwards-compatible with older Postfix versions.

postscreen_dnsbl_min_ttl (default: 60s)
The minimum amount of time that postscreen(8) will use the result from
a successful DNS-based reputation test before a client IP address is
required to pass that test again. If the DNS reply specifies a larger
TTL value, that value will be used unless it would be larger than
postscreen_dnsbl_max_ttl.

This feature is available in Postfix 3.1.

postscreen_dnsbl_reply_map (default: empty)
A mapping from an actual DNSBL domain name which includes a secret
password, to the DNSBL domain name that postscreen will reply with when
it rejects mail. When no mapping is found, the actual DNSBL domain
will be used.

For maximal stability it is best to use a file that is read into memory
such as pcre:, regexp: or texthash: (texthash: is similar to hash:,
except a) there is no need to run postmap(1) before the file can be
used, and b) texthash: does not detect changes after the file is read).

Example:

/usr/local/etc/postfix/main.cf:
postscreen_dnsbl_reply_map = texthash:$config_directory/dnsbl_reply

/usr/local/etc/postfix/dnsbl_reply:
secret.zen.spamhaus.org zen.spamhaus.org

This feature is available in Postfix 2.8.

postscreen_dnsbl_sites (default: empty)
Optional list of patterns with DNS allow/denylist domains, filters and
weight factors. When the list is non-empty, the dnsblog(8) daemon will
query these domains with the reversed IP addresses of remote SMTP
clients, and postscreen(8) will update an SMTP client's DNSBL score
with each non-error reply as described below.

Caution: when postscreen rejects mail, its SMTP response contains the
DNSBL domain name. Use the postscreen_dnsbl_reply_map feature to hide
"password" information in DNSBL domain names.

When a client's score is equal to or greater than the threshold
specified with postscreen_dnsbl_threshold, postscreen(8) can drop the
connection with the remote SMTP client.

Specify a list of domain=filter*weight patterns, separated by comma or
whitespace.

o When a pattern specifies no "=filter", postscreen(8) will use
any non-error DNSBL query result. Otherwise, postscreen(8) will
use only DNSBL query results that match the filter. The filter
has the form d.d.d.d, where each d is a number, or a pattern
inside [] that contains one or more ";"-separated numbers or
number..number ranges.

o When a pattern specifies no "*weight", the weight of the pattern
is 1. Otherwise, the weight must be an integral number.
Specify a negative number for allowlisting.

o When a pattern matches one or more DNSBL query results,
postscreen(8) adds that pattern's weight once to the remote SMTP
client's DNSBL score.

Examples:

To use example.com as a high-confidence blocklist, and to block mail
with example.net and example.org only when both agree:

postscreen_dnsbl_threshold = 2
postscreen_dnsbl_sites = example.com*2, example.net, example.org

To filter only DNSBL replies containing 127.0.0.4:

postscreen_dnsbl_sites = example.com=127.0.0.4

This feature is available in Postfix 2.8.

postscreen_dnsbl_threshold (default: 1)
The inclusive lower bound for blocking a remote SMTP client, based on
its combined DNSBL score as defined with the postscreen_dnsbl_sites
parameter.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.8.

postscreen_dnsbl_timeout (default: 10s)
The time limit for DNSBL or DNSWL lookups. This is separate from the
timeouts in the dnsblog(8) daemon which are defined by system
resolver(3) routines.

This feature is available in Postfix 3.0.

postscreen_dnsbl_ttl (default: 1h)
The amount of time that postscreen(8) will use the result from a
successful DNS-based reputation test before a client IP address is
required to pass that test again.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.8-3.0. It was replaced by
postscreen_dnsbl_max_ttl in Postfix 3.1.

postscreen_dnsbl_whitelist_threshold (default: 0)
Renamed to postscreen_dnsbl_allowlist_threshold in Postfix 3.6.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.11 - 3.5.

postscreen_enforce_tls (default: $smtpd_enforce_tls)
Mandatory TLS: announce STARTTLS support to remote SMTP clients, and
require that clients use TLS encryption. See
smtpd_postscreen_enforce_tls for details.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.8 and later. Preferably, use
postscreen_tls_security_level instead.

postscreen_expansion_filter (default: see postconf -d output)
List of characters that are permitted in postscreen_reject_footer
attribute expansions. See smtpd_expansion_filter for further details.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.8 and later.

postscreen_forbidden_commands (default: $smtpd_forbidden_commands)
List of commands that the postscreen(8) server considers in violation
of the SMTP protocol. See smtpd_forbidden_commands for syntax, and
postscreen_non_smtp_command_action for possible actions.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.8.

postscreen_greet_action (default: ignore)
The action that postscreen(8) takes when a remote SMTP client speaks
before its turn within the time specified with the
postscreen_greet_wait parameter. Specify one of the following:

enforce
Allow other tests to complete. Reject attempts to deliver mail
with a 550 SMTP reply, and log the helo/sender/recipient
information. Repeat this test the next time the client
connects.

drop Drop the connection immediately with a 521 SMTP reply. Repeat
this test the next time the client connects.

In either case, postscreen(8) will not allowlist the remote SMTP client
IP address.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.8.

postscreen_greet_banner (default: $smtpd_banner)
The text in the optional "220-text..." server response that
postscreen(8) sends ahead of the real Postfix SMTP server's "220
text..." response, in an attempt to confuse bad SMTP clients so that
they speak before their turn (pre-greet). Specify an empty value to
disable this feature.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.8.

postscreen_greet_ttl (default: 1d)
The amount of time that postscreen(8) will use the result from a
successful PREGREET test. During this time, the client IP address is
excluded from this test. The default is relatively short, because a
good client can immediately talk to a real Postfix SMTP server.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.8.

postscreen_greet_wait (default: normal: 6s, overload: 2s)
The amount of time that postscreen(8) will wait for an SMTP client to
send a command before its turn, and for DNS blocklist lookup results to
arrive (default: up to 2 seconds under stress, up to 6 seconds
otherwise).

This feature is available in Postfix 2.8.

postscreen_helo_required (default: $smtpd_helo_required)
Require that a remote SMTP client sends HELO or EHLO before commencing
a MAIL transaction.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.8.

postscreen_non_smtp_command_action (default: drop)
The action that postscreen(8) takes when a remote SMTP client sends
non-SMTP commands as specified with the postscreen_forbidden_commands
parameter. Specify one of the following:

enforce
Allow other tests to complete. Reject attempts to deliver mail
with a 550 SMTP reply, and log the helo/sender/recipient
information. Repeat this test the next time the client
connects.

drop Drop the connection immediately with a 521 SMTP reply. Repeat
this test the next time the client connects. This action is the
same as with the Postfix SMTP server's smtpd_forbidden_commands
feature.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.8.

postscreen_non_smtp_command_enable (default: no)
Enable "non-SMTP command" tests in the postscreen(8) server. These
tests are expensive: a client must disconnect after it passes the test,
before it can talk to a real Postfix SMTP server.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.8.

postscreen_non_smtp_command_ttl (default: 30d)
The amount of time that postscreen(8) will use the result from a
successful "non_smtp_command" SMTP protocol test. During this time, the
client IP address is excluded from this test. The default is long
because a client must disconnect after it passes the test, before it
can talk to a real Postfix SMTP server.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.8.

postscreen_pipelining_action (default: enforce)
The action that postscreen(8) takes when a remote SMTP client sends
multiple commands instead of sending one command and waiting for the
server to respond. Specify one of the following:

enforce
Allow other tests to complete. Reject attempts to deliver mail
with a 550 SMTP reply, and log the helo/sender/recipient
information. Repeat this test the next time the client
connects.

drop Drop the connection immediately with a 521 SMTP reply. Repeat
this test the next time the client connects.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.8.

postscreen_pipelining_enable (default: no)
Enable "pipelining" SMTP protocol tests in the postscreen(8) server.
These tests are expensive: a good client must disconnect after it
passes the test, before it can talk to a real Postfix SMTP server.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.8.

postscreen_pipelining_ttl (default: 30d)
The amount of time that postscreen(8) will use the result from a
successful "pipelining" SMTP protocol test. During this time, the
client IP address is excluded from this test. The default is long
because a good client must disconnect after it passes the test, before
it can talk to a real Postfix SMTP server.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.8.

postscreen_post_queue_limit (default: $default_process_limit)
The number of clients that can be waiting for service from a real
Postfix SMTP server process. When this queue is full, all clients will
receive a 421 response.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.8.

postscreen_pre_queue_limit (default: $default_process_limit)
The number of non-allowlisted clients that can be waiting for a
decision whether they will receive service from a real Postfix SMTP
server process. When this queue is full, all non-allowlisted clients
will receive a 421 response.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.8.

postscreen_reject_footer (default: $smtpd_reject_footer)
Optional information that is appended after a 4XX or 5XX postscreen(8)
server response. See smtpd_reject_footer for further details.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.8 and later.

postscreen_reject_footer_maps (default: $smtpd_reject_footer_maps)
Optional lookup table for information that is appended after a 4XX or
5XX postscreen(8) server response. See smtpd_reject_footer_maps for
further details.

This feature is available in Postfix 3.4 and later.

postscreen_tls_security_level (default: $smtpd_tls_security_level)
The SMTP TLS security level for the postscreen(8) server; when a
non-empty value is specified, this overrides the obsolete parameters
postscreen_use_tls and postscreen_enforce_tls. See
smtpd_tls_security_level for details.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.8 and later.

postscreen_upstream_proxy_protocol (default: empty)
The name of the proxy protocol used by an optional before-postscreen
proxy agent. When a proxy agent is used, this protocol conveys local
and remote address and port information. Specify
"postscreen_upstream_proxy_protocol = haproxy" to enable the haproxy
protocol; version 2 is supported with Postfix 3.5 and later.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.10 and later.

postscreen_upstream_proxy_timeout (default: 5s)
The time limit for the proxy protocol specified with the
postscreen_upstream_proxy_protocol parameter.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.10 and later.

postscreen_use_tls (default: $smtpd_use_tls)
Opportunistic TLS: announce STARTTLS support to remote SMTP clients,
but do not require that clients use TLS encryption.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.8 and later. Preferably, use
postscreen_tls_security_level instead.

postscreen_watchdog_timeout (default: 10s)
How much time a postscreen(8) process may take to respond to a remote
SMTP client command or to perform a cache operation before it is
terminated by a built-in watchdog timer. This is a safety mechanism
that prevents postscreen(8) from becoming non-responsive due to a bug
in Postfix itself or in system software. To avoid false alarms and
unnecessary cache corruption this limit cannot be set under 10s.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.8.

postscreen_whitelist_interfaces (default: static:all)
Renamed to postscreen_allowlist_interfaces in Postfix 3.6.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.9 - 3.5.

prepend_delivered_header (default: command, file, forward)
The message delivery contexts where the Postfix local(8) delivery agent
prepends a Delivered-To: message header with the address that the mail
was delivered to. This information is used for mail delivery loop
detection.

By default, the Postfix local delivery agent prepends a Delivered-To:
header when forwarding mail and when delivering to file (mailbox) and
command. Turning off the Delivered-To: header when forwarding mail is
not recommended.

Specify zero or more of forward, file, or command.

Example:

prepend_delivered_header = forward

process_id (read-only)
The process ID of a Postfix command or daemon process.

process_id_directory (default: pid)
The location of Postfix PID files relative to $queue_directory. This
is a read-only parameter.

process_name (read-only)
The process name of a Postfix command or daemon process.

propagate_unmatched_extensions (default: canonical, virtual)
What address lookup tables copy an address extension from the lookup
key to the lookup result.

For example, with a virtual(5) mapping of "joe@example.com =>
joe.user@example.net", the address "joe+foo@example.com" would rewrite
to "joe.user+foo@example.net".

Specify zero or more of canonical, virtual, alias, forward, include or
generic. These cause address extension propagation with canonical(5),
virtual(5), and aliases(5) maps, with local(8) .forward and :include:
file lookups, and with smtp(8) generic maps, respectively.

Note: enabling this feature for types other than canonical and virtual
is likely to cause problems when mail is forwarded to other sites,
especially with mail that is sent to a mailing list exploder address.

Examples:

propagate_unmatched_extensions = canonical, virtual, alias,
forward, include
propagate_unmatched_extensions = canonical, virtual

proxy_interfaces (default: empty)
The remote network interface addresses that this mail system receives
mail on by way of a proxy or network address translation unit.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.0 and later.

You must specify your "outside" proxy/NAT addresses when your system is
a backup MX host for other domains, otherwise mail delivery loops will
happen when the primary MX host is down.

Example:

proxy_interfaces = 1.2.3.4

proxy_read_maps (default: see postconf -d output)
The lookup tables that the proxymap(8) server is allowed to access for
the read-only service.

Specify zero or more "type:name" lookup tables, separated by whitespace
or comma. Table references that don't begin with proxy: are ignored.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.0 and later.

proxy_write_maps (default: see postconf -d output)
The lookup tables that the proxymap(8) server is allowed to access for
the read-write service. Postfix-owned local database files should be
stored under the Postfix-owned data_directory. Table references that
don't begin with proxy: are ignored.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.5 and later.

proxymap_service_name (default: proxymap)
The name of the proxymap read-only table lookup service. This service
is normally implemented by the proxymap(8) daemon.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.6 and later.

proxywrite_service_name (default: proxywrite)
The name of the proxywrite read-write table lookup service. This
service is normally implemented by the proxymap(8) daemon.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.6 and later.

qmgr_clog_warn_time (default: 300s)
The minimal delay between warnings that a specific destination is
clogging up the Postfix active queue. Specify 0 to disable.

This feature is enabled with the helpful_warnings parameter.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.0 and later.

qmgr_daemon_timeout (default: 1000s)
How much time a Postfix queue manager process may take to handle a
request before it is terminated by a built-in watchdog timer.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.8 and later.

qmgr_fudge_factor (default: 100)
Obsolete feature: the percentage of delivery resources that a busy mail
system will use up for delivery of a large mailing list message.

This feature exists only in the oqmgr(8) old queue manager. The current
queue manager solves the problem in a better way.

qmgr_ipc_timeout (default: 60s)
The time limit for the queue manager to send or receive information
over an internal communication channel. The purpose is to break out of
deadlock situations. If the time limit is exceeded the software either
retries or aborts the operation.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.8 and later.

qmgr_message_active_limit (default: 20000)
The maximal number of messages in the active queue.

qmgr_message_recipient_limit (default: 20000)
The maximal number of recipients held in memory by the Postfix queue
manager, and the maximal size of the short-term, in-memory "dead"
destination status cache.

qmgr_message_recipient_minimum (default: 10)
The minimal number of in-memory recipients for any message. This takes
priority over any other in-memory recipient limits (i.e., the global
qmgr_message_recipient_limit and the per transport _recipient_limit) if
necessary. The minimum value allowed for this parameter is 1.

qmqpd_authorized_clients (default: empty)
What remote QMQP clients are allowed to connect to the Postfix QMQP
server port.

By default, no client is allowed to use the service. This is because
the QMQP server will relay mail to any destination.

Specify a list of client patterns. A list pattern specifies a host
name, a domain name, an internet address, or a network/mask pattern,
where the mask specifies the number of bits in the network part. When
a pattern specifies a file name, its contents are substituted for the
file name; when a pattern is a "type:table" table specification, table
lookup is used instead.

Patterns are separated by whitespace and/or commas. In order to reverse
the result, precede a pattern with an exclamation point (!). The form
"!/file/name" is supported only in Postfix version 2.4 and later.

Pattern matching of domain names is controlled by the presence or
absence of "qmqpd_authorized_clients" in the
parent_domain_matches_subdomains parameter value.

Example:

qmqpd_authorized_clients = !192.168.0.1, 192.168.0.0/24

qmqpd_client_port_logging (default: no)
Enable logging of the remote QMQP client port in addition to the
hostname and IP address. The logging format is "host[address]:port".

This feature is available in Postfix 2.5 and later.

qmqpd_error_delay (default: 1s)
How long the Postfix QMQP server will pause before sending a negative
reply to the remote QMQP client. The purpose is to slow down confused
or malicious clients.

qmqpd_timeout (default: 300s)
The time limit for sending or receiving information over the network.
If a read or write operation blocks for more than $qmqpd_timeout
seconds the Postfix QMQP server gives up and disconnects.

queue_directory (default: see postconf -d output)
The location of the Postfix top-level queue directory. This is the root
directory of Postfix daemon processes that run chrooted.

queue_file_attribute_count_limit (default: 100)
The maximal number of (name=value) attributes that may be stored in a
Postfix queue file. The limit is enforced by the cleanup(8) server.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.0 and later.

queue_minfree (default: 0)
The minimal amount of free space in bytes in the queue file system that
is needed to receive mail. This is currently used by the Postfix SMTP
server to decide if it will accept any mail at all.

By default, the Postfix SMTP server rejects MAIL FROM commands when the
amount of free space is less than 1.5*$message_size_limit (Postfix
version 2.1 and later). To specify a higher minimum free space limit,
specify a queue_minfree value that is at least 1.5*$message_size_limit.

With Postfix versions 2.0 and earlier, a queue_minfree value of zero
means there is no minimum required amount of free space.

queue_run_delay (default: 300s)
The time between deferred queue scans by the queue manager; prior to
Postfix 2.4 the default value was 1000s.

This parameter should be set less than or equal to
$minimal_backoff_time. See also $maximal_backoff_time.

queue_service_name (default: qmgr)
The name of the qmgr(8) service. This service manages the Postfix queue
and schedules delivery requests.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.0 and later.

rbl_reply_maps (default: empty)
Optional lookup tables with RBL response templates. The tables are
indexed by the RBL domain name. By default, Postfix uses the default
template as specified with the default_rbl_reply configuration
parameter. See there for a discussion of the syntax of RBL reply
templates.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.0 and later.

readme_directory (default: see postconf -d output)
The location of Postfix README files that describe how to build,
configure or operate a specific Postfix subsystem or feature.

receive_override_options (default: empty)
Enable or disable recipient validation, built-in content filtering, or
address mapping. Typically, these are specified in master.cf as
command-line arguments for the smtpd(8), qmqpd(8) or pickup(8) daemons.

Specify zero or more of the following options. The options override
main.cf settings and are either implemented by smtpd(8), qmqpd(8), or
pickup(8) themselves, or they are forwarded to the cleanup server.

no_unknown_recipient_checks
Do not try to reject unknown recipients (SMTP server only).
This is typically specified AFTER an external content filter.

no_address_mappings
Disable canonical address mapping, virtual alias map expansion,
address masquerading, and automatic BCC (blind carbon-copy)
recipients. This is typically specified BEFORE an external
content filter.

no_header_body_checks
Disable header/body_checks. This is typically specified AFTER an
external content filter.

no_milters
Disable Milter (mail filter) applications. This is typically
specified AFTER an external content filter.

Note: when the "BEFORE content filter" receive_override_options setting
is specified in the main.cf file, specify the "AFTER content filter"
receive_override_options setting in master.cf (and vice versa).

Examples:

receive_override_options =
no_unknown_recipient_checks, no_header_body_checks
receive_override_options = no_address_mappings

This feature is available in Postfix 2.1 and later.

recipient_bcc_maps (default: empty)
Optional BCC (blind carbon-copy) address lookup tables, indexed by
envelope recipient address. The BCC address (multiple results are not
supported) is added when mail enters from outside of Postfix.

Specify zero or more "type:name" lookup tables, separated by whitespace
or comma. Tables will be searched in the specified order until a match
is found.

The table search order is as follows:

o Look up the "user+extension@domain.tld" address including the
optional address extension.

o Look up the "user@domain.tld" address without the optional
address extension.

o Look up the "user+extension" address local part when the
recipient domain equals $myorigin, $mydestination,
$inet_interfaces or $proxy_interfaces.

o Look up the "user" address local part when the recipient domain
equals $myorigin, $mydestination, $inet_interfaces or
$proxy_interfaces.

o Look up the "@domain.tld" part.

Note: with Postfix 2.2 and earlier the sender will unconditionally be
notified when the BCC address is undeliverable.

Example:

recipient_bcc_maps = hash:$config_directory/recipient_bcc

After a change, run "postmap /usr/local/etc/postfix/recipient_bcc".

This feature is available in Postfix 2.1 and later.

recipient_canonical_classes (default: envelope_recipient, header_recipient)
What addresses are subject to recipient_canonical_maps address mapping.
By default, recipient_canonical_maps address mapping is applied to
envelope recipient addresses, and to header recipient addresses.

Specify one or more of: envelope_recipient, header_recipient

This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.

recipient_canonical_maps (default: empty)
Optional address mapping lookup tables for envelope and header
recipient addresses. The table format and lookups are documented in
canonical(5).

Note: $recipient_canonical_maps is processed before $canonical_maps.

Example:

recipient_canonical_maps = hash:$config_directory/recipient_canonical

recipient_delimiter (default: empty)
The set of characters that can separate an email address localpart,
user name, or a .forward file name from its extension. For example,
with "recipient_delimiter = +", the software tries user+foo@example.com
before trying user@example.com, user+foo before trying user, and
.forward+foo before trying .forward.

More formally, an email address localpart or user name is separated
from its extension by the first character that matches the
recipient_delimiter set. The delimiter character and extension may then
be used to generate an extended .forward file name. This implementation
recognizes one delimiter character and one extension per email address
localpart or email address. With Postfix 2.10 and earlier, the
recipient_delimiter specifies a single character.

See canonical(5), local(8), relocated(5) and virtual(5) for the effects
of recipient_delimiter on lookups in aliases, canonical, virtual, and
relocated maps, and see the propagate_unmatched_extensions parameter
for propagating an extension from one email address to another.

When used in command_execution_directory, forward_path, or luser_relay,
${recipient_delimiter} is replaced with the actual recipient delimiter
that was found in the recipient email address (Postfix 2.11 and later),
or it is replaced with the main.cf recipient_delimiter parameter value
(Postfix 2.10 and earlier).

The recipient_delimiter is not applied to the mailer-daemon address,
the postmaster address, or the double-bounce address. With the default
"owner_request_special = yes" setting, the recipient_delimiter is also
not applied to addresses with the special "owner-" prefix or the
special "-request" suffix.

Examples:

# Handle Postfix-style extensions.
recipient_delimiter = +

# Handle both Postfix and qmail extensions (Postfix 2.11 and later).
recipient_delimiter = +-

# Use .forward for mail without address extension, and for mail with
# an unrecognized address extension.
forward_path = $home/.forward${recipient_delimiter}${extension},
$home/.forward

reject_code (default: 554)
The numerical Postfix SMTP server response code when a remote SMTP
client request is rejected by the "reject" restriction.

Do not change this unless you have a complete understanding of RFC
5321.

reject_tempfail_action (default: defer_if_permit)
The Postfix SMTP server's action when a reject-type restriction fails
due to a temporary error condition. Specify "defer" to defer the remote
SMTP client request immediately. With the default "defer_if_permit"
action, the Postfix SMTP server continues to look for opportunities to
reject mail, and defers the client request only if it would otherwise
be accepted.

For finer control, see: unverified_recipient_tempfail_action,
unverified_sender_tempfail_action, unknown_address_tempfail_action, and
unknown_helo_hostname_tempfail_action.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.6 and later.

relay_clientcerts (default: empty)
List of tables with remote SMTP client-certificate fingerprints or
public key fingerprints (Postfix 2.9 and later) for which the Postfix
SMTP server will allow access with the permit_tls_clientcerts feature.
The fingerprint digest algorithm is configurable via the
smtpd_tls_fingerprint_digest parameter (hard-coded as md5 prior to
Postfix version 2.5).

The default algorithm is sha256 with Postfix >= 3.6 and the
compatibility_level set to 3.6 or higher. With Postfix <= 3.5, the
default algorithm is md5. The best-practice algorithm is now sha256.
Recent advances in hash function cryptanalysis have led to md5 and sha1
being deprecated in favor of sha256. However, as long as there are no
known "second pre-image" attacks against the older algorithms, their
use in this context, though not recommended, is still likely safe.

Postfix lookup tables are in the form of (key, value) pairs. Since we
only need the key, the value can be chosen freely, e.g. the name of
the user or host: D7:04:2F:A7:0B:8C:A5:21:FA:31:77:E1:41:8A:EE:80
lutzpc.at.home

Example:

relay_clientcerts = hash:$config_directory/relay_clientcerts

For more fine-grained control, use check_ccert_access to select an
appropriate access(5) policy for each client. See
RESTRICTION_CLASS_README.

This feature is available with Postfix version 2.2.

relay_destination_concurrency_limit (default:
$default_destination_concurrency_limit)
The maximal number of parallel deliveries to the same destination via
the relay message delivery transport. This limit is enforced by the
queue manager. The message delivery transport name is the first field
in the entry in the master.cf file.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.0 and later.

relay_destination_recipient_limit (default:
$default_destination_recipient_limit)
The maximal number of recipients per message for the relay message
delivery transport. This limit is enforced by the queue manager. The
message delivery transport name is the first field in the entry in the
master.cf file.

Setting this parameter to a value of 1 changes the meaning of
relay_destination_concurrency_limit from concurrency per domain into
concurrency per recipient.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.0 and later.

relay_domains (default: Postfix >= 3.0: empty, Postfix < 3.0: $mydestination)
What destination domains (and subdomains thereof) this system will
relay mail to. For details about how the relay_domains value is used,
see the description of the permit_auth_destination and
reject_unauth_destination SMTP recipient restrictions.

Domains that match $relay_domains are delivered with the
$relay_transport mail delivery transport. The SMTP server validates
recipient addresses with $relay_recipient_maps and rejects non-existent
recipients. See also the relay domains address class in the
ADDRESS_CLASS_README file.

Note: Postfix will not automatically forward mail for domains that list
this system as their primary or backup MX host. See the
permit_mx_backup restriction in the postconf(5) manual page.

Specify a list of host or domain names, "/file/name" patterns or
"type:table" lookup tables, separated by commas and/or whitespace.
Continue long lines by starting the next line with whitespace. A
"/file/name" pattern is replaced by its contents; a "type:table" lookup
table is matched when a (parent) domain appears as lookup key. Specify
"!pattern" to exclude a domain from the list. The form "!/file/name" is
supported only in Postfix version 2.4 and later.

Pattern matching of domain names is controlled by the presence or
absence of "relay_domains" in the parent_domain_matches_subdomains
parameter value.

relay_domains_reject_code (default: 554)
The numerical Postfix SMTP server response code when a client request
is rejected by the reject_unauth_destination recipient restriction.

Do not change this unless you have a complete understanding of RFC
5321.

relay_recipient_maps (default: empty)
Optional lookup tables with all valid addresses in the domains that
match $relay_domains. Specify @domain as a wild-card for domains that
have no valid recipient list, and become a source of backscatter mail:
Postfix accepts spam for non-existent recipients and then floods
innocent people with undeliverable mail. Technically, tables listed
with $relay_recipient_maps are used as lists: Postfix needs to know
only if a lookup string is found or not, but it does not use the result
from the table lookup.

Specify zero or more "type:name" lookup tables, separated by whitespace
or comma. Tables will be searched in the specified order until a match
is found.

If this parameter is non-empty, then the Postfix SMTP server will
reject mail to unknown relay users. This feature is off by default.

See also the relay domains address class in the ADDRESS_CLASS_README
file.

Example:

relay_recipient_maps = hash:$config_directory/relay_recipients

This feature is available in Postfix 2.0 and later.

relay_transport (default: relay)
The default mail delivery transport and next-hop destination for remote
delivery to domains listed with $relay_domains. In order of decreasing
precedence, the nexthop destination is taken from $relay_transport,
$sender_dependent_relayhost_maps, $relayhost, or from the recipient
domain. This information can be overruled with the transport(5) table.

See also the relay domains address class in the ADDRESS_CLASS_README
file.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.0 and later.

relayhost (default: empty)
The next-hop destination(s) for non-local mail; overrides non-local
domains in recipient addresses. This information is overruled with
relay_transport, sender_dependent_default_transport_maps,
default_transport, sender_dependent_relayhost_maps and with the
transport(5) table.

On an intranet, specify the organizational domain name. If your
internal DNS uses no MX records, specify the name of the intranet
gateway host instead.

In the case of SMTP or LMTP delivery, specify one or more destinations
in the form of a domain name, hostname, hostname:port, [hostname]:port,
[hostaddress] or [hostaddress]:port, separated by comma or whitespace.
The form [hostname] turns off MX lookups. Multiple destinations are
supported in Postfix 3.5 and later.

If you're connected via UUCP, see the UUCP_README file for useful
information.

Examples:

relayhost = $mydomain
relayhost = [gateway.example.com]
relayhost = mail1.example:587, mail2.example:587
relayhost = [an.ip.add.ress]

relocated_maps (default: empty)
Optional lookup tables with new contact information for users or
domains that no longer exist. The table format and lookups are
documented in relocated(5).

Specify zero or more "type:name" lookup tables, separated by whitespace
or comma. Tables will be searched in the specified order until a match
is found.

If you use this feature, run "postmap /usr/local/etc/postfix/relocated"
to build the necessary DBM or DB file after change, then "postfix
reload" to make the changes visible.

Examples:

relocated_maps = dbm:$config_directory/relocated
relocated_maps = hash:$config_directory/relocated

remote_header_rewrite_domain (default: empty)
Rewrite or add message headers in mail from remote clients if the
remote_header_rewrite_domain parameter value is non-empty, updating
incomplete addresses with the domain specified in the
remote_header_rewrite_domain parameter, and adding missing headers.

The local_header_rewrite_clients parameter controls what clients
Postfix considers local.

Examples:

The safe setting: append "domain.invalid" to incomplete header
addresses from remote SMTP clients, so that those addresses cannot be
confused with local addresses.

remote_header_rewrite_domain = domain.invalid

The default, purist, setting: don't rewrite headers from remote clients
at all.

remote_header_rewrite_domain =

require_home_directory (default: no)
Require that a local(8) recipient's home directory exists before mail
delivery is attempted. By default this test is disabled. It can be
useful for environments that import home directories to the mail server
(IMPORTING HOME DIRECTORIES IS NOT RECOMMENDED).

reset_owner_alias (default: no)
Reset the local(8) delivery agent's idea of the owner-alias attribute,
when delivering mail to a child alias that does not have its own owner
alias.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.8 and later. With older Postfix
releases, the behavior is as if this parameter is set to "yes".

As documented in aliases(5), when an alias name has a companion alias
named owner-name, this will replace the envelope sender address, so
that delivery errors will be reported to the owner alias instead of the
sender. This configuration is recommended for mailing lists.

A less known property of the owner alias is that it also forces the
local(8) delivery agent to write local and remote addresses from alias
expansion to a new queue file, instead of attempting to deliver mail to
local addresses as soon as they come out of alias expansion.

Writing local addresses from alias expansion to a new queue file allows
for robust handling of temporary delivery errors: errors with one local
member have no effect on deliveries to other members of the list. On
the other hand, delivery to local addresses as soon as they come out of
alias expansion is fragile: a temporary error with one local address
from alias expansion will cause the entire alias to be expanded
repeatedly until the error goes away, or until the message expires in
the queue. In that case, a problem with one list member results in
multiple message deliveries to other list members.

The default behavior of Postfix 2.8 and later is to keep the
owner-alias attribute of the parent alias, when delivering mail to a
child alias that does not have its own owner alias. Then, local
addresses from that child alias will be written to a new queue file,
and a temporary error with one local address will not affect delivery
to other mailing list members.

Unfortunately, older Postfix releases reset the owner-alias attribute
when delivering mail to a child alias that does not have its own owner
alias. To be precise, this resets only the decision to create a new
queue file, not the decision to override the envelope sender address.
The local(8) delivery agent then attempts to deliver local addresses as
soon as they come out of child alias expansion. If delivery to any
address from child alias expansion fails with a temporary error
condition, the entire mailing list may be expanded repeatedly until the
mail expires in the queue, resulting in multiple deliveries of the same
message to mailing list members.

resolve_dequoted_address (default: yes)
Resolve a recipient address safely instead of correctly, by looking
inside quotes.

By default, the Postfix address resolver does not quote the address
localpart as per RFC 822, so that additional @ or % or ! operators
remain visible. This behavior is safe but it is also technically
incorrect.

If you specify "resolve_dequoted_address = no", then the Postfix
resolver will not know about additional @ etc. operators in the address
localpart. This opens opportunities for obscure mail relay attacks with
user@domain@domain addresses when Postfix provides backup MX service
for Sendmail systems.

resolve_null_domain (default: no)
Resolve an address that ends in the "@" null domain as if the local
hostname were specified, instead of rejecting the address as invalid.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.1 and later. Earlier versions
always resolve the null domain as the local hostname.

The Postfix SMTP server uses this feature to reject mail from or to
addresses that end in the "@" null domain, and from addresses that
rewrite into a form that ends in the "@" null domain.

resolve_numeric_domain (default: no)
Resolve "user@ipaddress" as "user@[ipaddress]", instead of rejecting
the address as invalid.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

respectful_logging (default: see 'postconf -d' output)
Avoid logging that implies white is better than black. Instead use
'allowlist', 'denylist', and variations of those words.

This feature is available in Postfix 3.6 and later.

rewrite_service_name (default: rewrite)
The name of the address rewriting service. This service rewrites
addresses to standard form and resolves them to a (delivery method,
next-hop host, recipient) triple.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.0 and later.

sample_directory (default: /usr/local/etc/postfix)
The name of the directory with example Postfix configuration files.
Starting with Postfix 2.1, these files have been replaced with the
postconf(5) manual page.

send_cyrus_sasl_authzid (default: no)
When authenticating to a remote SMTP or LMTP server with the default
setting "no", send no SASL authoriZation ID (authzid); send only the
SASL authentiCation ID (authcid) plus the authcid's password.

The non-default setting "yes" enables the behavior of older Postfix
versions. These always send a SASL authzid that is equal to the SASL
authcid, but this causes interoperability problems with some SMTP
servers.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.4.4 and later.

sender_based_routing (default: no)
This parameter should not be used. It was replaced by
sender_dependent_relayhost_maps in Postfix version 2.3.

sender_bcc_maps (default: empty)
Optional BCC (blind carbon-copy) address lookup tables, indexed by
envelope sender address. The BCC address (multiple results are not
supported) is added when mail enters from outside of Postfix.

Specify zero or more "type:name" lookup tables, separated by whitespace
or comma. Tables will be searched in the specified order until a match
is found.

The table search order is as follows:

o Look up the "user+extension@domain.tld" address including the
optional address extension.

o Look up the "user@domain.tld" address without the optional
address extension.

o Look up the "user+extension" address local part when the sender
domain equals $myorigin, $mydestination, $inet_interfaces or
$proxy_interfaces.

o Look up the "user" address local part when the sender domain
equals $myorigin, $mydestination, $inet_interfaces or
$proxy_interfaces.

o Look up the "@domain.tld" part.

Note: with Postfix 2.2 and earlier the sender will be notified when the
BCC address is undeliverable.

Example:

sender_bcc_maps = hash:$config_directory/sender_bcc

After a change, run "postmap /usr/local/etc/postfix/sender_bcc".

This feature is available in Postfix 2.1 and later.

sender_canonical_classes (default: envelope_sender, header_sender)
What addresses are subject to sender_canonical_maps address mapping.
By default, sender_canonical_maps address mapping is applied to
envelope sender addresses, and to header sender addresses.

Specify one or more of: envelope_sender, header_sender

This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.

sender_canonical_maps (default: empty)
Optional address mapping lookup tables for envelope and header sender
addresses. The table format and lookups are documented in
canonical(5).

Example: you want to rewrite the SENDER address "user@ugly.example" to
"user@pretty.example", while still being able to send mail to the
RECIPIENT address "user@ugly.example".

Note: $sender_canonical_maps is processed before $canonical_maps.

Example:

sender_canonical_maps = hash:$config_directory/sender_canonical

sender_dependent_default_transport_maps (default: empty)
A sender-dependent override for the global default_transport parameter
setting. The tables are searched by the envelope sender address and
@domain. A lookup result of DUNNO terminates the search without
overriding the global default_transport parameter setting. This
information is overruled with the transport(5) table.

Specify zero or more "type:name" lookup tables, separated by whitespace
or comma. Tables will be searched in the specified order until a match
is found.

Note: this overrides default_transport, not transport_maps, and
therefore the expected syntax is that of default_transport, not the
syntax of transport_maps. Specifically, this does not support the
transport_maps syntax for null transport, null nexthop, or null email
addresses.

For safety reasons, this feature does not allow $number substitutions
in regular expression maps.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.7 and later.

sender_dependent_relayhost_maps (default: empty)
A sender-dependent override for the global relayhost parameter setting.
The tables are searched by the envelope sender address and @domain. A
lookup result of DUNNO terminates the search without overriding the
global relayhost parameter setting (Postfix 2.6 and later). This
information is overruled with relay_transport,
sender_dependent_default_transport_maps, default_transport and with the
transport(5) table.

Specify zero or more "type:name" lookup tables, separated by whitespace
or comma. Tables will be searched in the specified order until a match
is found.

For safety reasons, this feature does not allow $number substitutions
in regular expression maps.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

sendmail_fix_line_endings (default: always)
Controls how the Postfix sendmail command converts email message line
endings from <CR><LF> into UNIX format (<LF>).

always Always convert message lines ending in <CR><LF>. This setting is
the default with Postfix 2.9 and later.

strict Convert message lines ending in <CR><LF> only if the first input
line ends in <CR><LF>. This setting is backwards-compatible with
Postfix 2.8 and earlier.

never Never convert message lines ending in <CR><LF>. This setting
exists for completeness only.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.9 and later.

sendmail_path (default: see postconf -d output)
A Sendmail compatibility feature that specifies the location of the
Postfix sendmail(1) command. This command can be used to submit mail
into the Postfix queue.

service_name (read-only)
The master.cf service name of a Postfix daemon process. This can be
used to distinguish the logging from different services that use the
same program name.

Example master.cf entries:

# Distinguish inbound MTA logging from submission and smtps logging.
smtp inet n - n - - smtpd
submission inet n - n - - smtpd
-o syslog_name=postfix/$service_name
smtps inet n - n - - smtpd
-o syslog_name=postfix/$service_name

# Distinguish outbound MTA logging from inbound relay logging.
smtp unix - - n - - smtp
relay unix - - n - - smtp
-o syslog_name=postfix/$service_name

service_throttle_time (default: 60s)
How long the Postfix master(8) waits before forking a server that
appears to be malfunctioning.

setgid_group (default: postdrop)
The group ownership of set-gid Postfix commands and of group-writable
Postfix directories. When this parameter value is changed you need to
re-run "postfix set-permissions" (with Postfix version 2.0 and earlier:
"/usr/local/etc/postfix/post-install set-permissions".

shlib_directory (default: see 'postconf -d' output)
The location of Postfix dynamically-linked libraries (libpostfix-*.so),
and the default location of Postfix database plugins (postfix-*.so)
that have a relative pathname in the dynamicmaps.cf file. The
shlib_directory parameter defaults to "no" when Postfix
dynamically-linked libraries and database plugins are disabled at
compile time, otherwise it typically defaults to /usr/lib/postfix or
/usr/local/lib/postfix.

Notes:

o The directory specified with shlib_directory should contain only
Postfix-related files. Postfix dynamically-linked libraries and
database plugins should not be installed in a "public" system
directory such as /usr/lib or /usr/local/lib. Linking Postfix
dynamically-linked library files or database plugins into
non-Postfix programs is not supported. Postfix
dynamically-linked libraries and database plugins implement a
Postfix-internal API that changes without maintaining
compatibility.

o You can change the shlib_directory value after Postfix is built.
However, you may have to run ldconfig or equivalent to prevent
Postfix programs from failing because the libpostfix-*.so files
are not found. No ldconfig command is needed if you keep the
libpostfix-*.so files in the compiled-in default
$shlib_directory location.

This feature is available in Postfix 3.0 and later.

show_user_unknown_table_name (default: yes)
Display the name of the recipient table in the "User unknown"
responses. The extra detail makes troubleshooting easier but also
reveals information that is nobody else's business.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.0 and later.

showq_service_name (default: showq)
The name of the showq(8) service. This service produces mail queue
status reports.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.0 and later.

smtp_address_preference (default: any)
The address type ("ipv6", "ipv4" or "any") that the Postfix SMTP client
will try first, when a destination has IPv6 and IPv4 addresses with
equal MX preference. This feature has no effect unless the
inet_protocols setting enables both IPv4 and IPv6.

Postfix SMTP client address preference has evolved. With Postfix 2.8
the default is "ipv6"; earlier implementations are hard-coded to prefer
IPv6 over IPv4.

Notes for mail delivery between sites that have both IPv4 and IPv6
connectivity:

o The setting "smtp_address_preference = ipv6" is unsafe. It can
fail to deliver mail when there is an outage that affects IPv6,
while the destination is still reachable over IPv4.

o The setting "smtp_address_preference = any" is safe. With this,
mail will eventually be delivered even if there is an outage
that affects IPv6 or IPv4, as long as it does not affect both.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.8 and later.

smtp_address_verify_target (default: rcpt)
In the context of email address verification, the SMTP protocol stage
that determines whether an email address is deliverable. Specify one
of "rcpt" or "data". The latter is needed with remote SMTP servers
that reject recipients after the DATA command. Use transport_maps to
apply this feature selectively:

/usr/local/etc/postfix/main.cf:
transport_maps = hash:$config_directory/transport

/usr/local/etc/postfix/transport:
smtp-domain-that-verifies-after-data smtp-data-target:
lmtp-domain-that-verifies-after-data lmtp-data-target:

/usr/local/etc/postfix/master.cf:
smtp-data-target unix - - n - - smtp
-o smtp_address_verify_target=data
lmtp-data-target unix - - n - - lmtp
-o lmtp_address_verify_target=data

Unselective use of the "data" target does no harm, but will result in
unnecessary "lost connection after DATA" events at remote SMTP/LMTP
servers.

This feature is available in Postfix 3.0 and later.

smtp_always_send_ehlo (default: yes)
Always send EHLO at the start of an SMTP session.

With "smtp_always_send_ehlo = no", the Postfix SMTP client sends EHLO
only when the word "ESMTP" appears in the server greeting banner
(example: 220 spike.porcupine.org ESMTP Postfix).

smtp_balance_inet_protocols (default: yes)
When a remote destination resolves to a combination of IPv4 and IPv6
addresses, ensure that the Postfix SMTP client can try both address
types before it runs into the smtp_mx_address_limit.

This avoids an interoperability problem when a destination resolves to
primarily IPv6 addresses, the smtp_address_limit feature eliminates
most or all IPv4 addresses, and the destination is not reachable over
IPv6.

This feature is available in Postfix 3.3 and later.

smtp_bind_address (default: empty)
An optional numerical network address that the Postfix SMTP client
should bind to when making an IPv4 connection.

This can be specified in the main.cf file for all SMTP clients, or it
can be specified in the master.cf file for a specific client, for
example:

/usr/local/etc/postfix/master.cf:
smtp ... smtp -o smtp_bind_address=11.22.33.44

See smtp_bind_address_enforce for how Postfix should handle errors
(Postfix 3.7 and later).

Note 1: when inet_interfaces specifies no more than one IPv4 address,
and that address is a non-loopback address, it is automatically used as
the smtp_bind_address. This supports virtual IP hosting, but can be a
problem on multi-homed firewalls. See the inet_interfaces documentation
for more detail.

Note 2: address information may be enclosed inside [], but this form is
not required here.

smtp_bind_address6 (default: empty)
An optional numerical network address that the Postfix SMTP client
should bind to when making an IPv6 connection.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.

This can be specified in the main.cf file for all SMTP clients, or it
can be specified in the master.cf file for a specific client, for
example:

/usr/local/etc/postfix/master.cf:
smtp ... smtp -o smtp_bind_address6=1:2:3:4:5:6:7:8

See smtp_bind_address_enforce for how Postfix should handle errors
(Postfix 3.7 and later).

Note 1: when inet_interfaces specifies no more than one IPv6 address,
and that address is a non-loopback address, it is automatically used as
the smtp_bind_address6. This supports virtual IP hosting, but can be a
problem on multi-homed firewalls. See the inet_interfaces documentation
for more detail.

Note 2: address information may be enclosed inside [], but this form is
not recommended here.

smtp_bind_address_enforce (default: no)
Defer delivery when the Postfix SMTP client cannot apply the
smtp_bind_address or smtp_bind_address6 setting. By default, the
Postfix SMTP client will continue delivery after logging a warning.

This feature is available in Postfix 3.7 and later.

smtp_body_checks (default: empty)
Restricted body_checks(5) tables for the Postfix SMTP client. These
tables are searched while mail is being delivered. Actions that change
the delivery time or destination are not available.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.5 and later.

smtp_cname_overrides_servername (default: version dependent)
When the remote SMTP servername is a DNS CNAME, replace the servername
with the result from CNAME expansion for the purpose of logging, SASL
password lookup, TLS policy decisions, or TLS certificate verification.
The value "no" hardens Postfix smtp_tls_per_site hostname-based
policies against false hostname information in DNS CNAME records, and
makes SASL password file lookups more predictable. This is the default
setting as of Postfix 2.3.

When DNS CNAME records are validated with secure DNS lookups
(smtp_dns_support_level = dnssec), they are always allowed to override
the above servername (Postfix 2.11 and later).

This feature is available in Postfix 2.2.9 and later.

smtp_connect_timeout (default: 30s)
The Postfix SMTP client time limit for completing a TCP connection, or
zero (use the operating system built-in time limit).

When no connection can be made within the deadline, the Postfix SMTP
client tries the next address on the mail exchanger list. Specify 0 to
disable the time limit (i.e. use whatever timeout is implemented by the
operating system).

smtp_connection_cache_destinations (default: empty)
Permanently enable SMTP connection caching for the specified
destinations. With SMTP connection caching, a connection is not closed
immediately after completion of a mail transaction. Instead, the
connection is kept open for up to $smtp_connection_cache_time_limit
seconds. This allows connections to be reused for other deliveries,
and can improve mail delivery performance.

Specify a comma or white space separated list of destinations or
pseudo-destinations:

o if mail is sent without a relay host: a domain name (the
right-hand side of an email address, without the [] around a
numeric IP address),

o if mail is sent via a relay host: a relay host name (without []
or non-default TCP port), as specified in main.cf or in the
transport map,

o if mail is sent via a UNIX-domain socket: a pathname (without
the unix: prefix),

o a /file/name with domain names and/or relay host names as
defined above,

o a "type:table" with domain names and/or relay host names on the
left-hand side. The right-hand side result from "type:table"
lookups is ignored.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.

smtp_connection_cache_on_demand (default: yes)
Temporarily enable SMTP connection caching while a destination has a
high volume of mail in the active queue. With SMTP connection caching,
a connection is not closed immediately after completion of a mail
transaction. Instead, the connection is kept open for up to
$smtp_connection_cache_time_limit seconds. This allows connections to
be reused for other deliveries, and can improve mail delivery
performance.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.

smtp_connection_cache_time_limit (default: 2s)
When SMTP connection caching is enabled, the amount of time that an
unused SMTP client socket is kept open before it is closed. Do not
specify larger values without permission from the remote sites.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.

smtp_connection_reuse_count_limit (default: 0)
When SMTP connection caching is enabled, the number of times that an
SMTP session may be reused before it is closed, or zero (no limit).
With a reuse count limit of N, a connection is used up to N+1 times.

NOTE: This feature is unsafe. When a high-volume destination has
multiple inbound MTAs, then the slowest inbound MTA will attract the
most connections to that destination. This limitation does not exist
with the smtp_connection_reuse_time_limit feature.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.11.

smtp_connection_reuse_time_limit (default: 300s)
The amount of time during which Postfix will use an SMTP connection
repeatedly. The timer starts when the connection is initiated (i.e. it
includes the connect, greeting and helo latency, in addition to the
latencies of subsequent mail delivery transactions).

This feature addresses a performance stability problem with remote SMTP
servers. This problem is not specific to Postfix: it can happen when
any MTA sends large amounts of SMTP email to a site that has multiple
MX hosts.

The problem starts when one of a set of MX hosts becomes slower than
the rest. Even though SMTP clients connect to fast and slow MX hosts
with equal probability, the slow MX host ends up with more simultaneous
inbound connections than the faster MX hosts, because the slow MX host
needs more time to serve each client request.

The slow MX host becomes a connection attractor. If one MX host
becomes N times slower than the rest, it dominates mail delivery
latency unless there are more than N fast MX hosts to counter the
effect. And if the number of MX hosts is smaller than N, the mail
delivery latency becomes effectively that of the slowest MX host
divided by the total number of MX hosts.

The solution uses connection caching in a way that differs from Postfix
version 2.2. By limiting the amount of time during which a connection
can be used repeatedly (instead of limiting the number of deliveries
over that connection), Postfix not only restores fairness in the
distribution of simultaneous connections across a set of MX hosts, it
also favors deliveries over connections that perform well, which is
exactly what we want.

The default reuse time limit, 300s, is comparable to the various smtp
transaction timeouts which are fair estimates of maximum excess latency
for a slow delivery. Note that hosts may accept thousands of messages
over a single connection within the default connection reuse time
limit. This number is much larger than the default Postfix version 2.2
limit of 10 messages per cached connection. It may prove necessary to
lower the limit to avoid interoperability issues with MTAs that exhibit
bugs when many messages are delivered via a single connection. A lower
reuse time limit risks losing the benefit of connection reuse when the
average connection and mail delivery latency exceeds the reuse time
limit.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

smtp_data_done_timeout (default: 600s)
The Postfix SMTP client time limit for sending the SMTP ".", and for
receiving the remote SMTP server response.

When no response is received within the deadline, a warning is logged
that the mail may be delivered multiple times.

smtp_data_init_timeout (default: 120s)
The Postfix SMTP client time limit for sending the SMTP DATA command,
and for receiving the remote SMTP server response.

Time units: s (seconds), m (minutes), h (hours), d (days), w (weeks).
The default time unit is s (seconds).

smtp_data_xfer_timeout (default: 180s)
The Postfix SMTP client time limit for sending the SMTP message
content. When the connection makes no progress for more than
$smtp_data_xfer_timeout seconds the Postfix SMTP client terminates the
transfer.

Time units: s (seconds), m (minutes), h (hours), d (days), w (weeks).
The default time unit is s (seconds).

smtp_defer_if_no_mx_address_found (default: no)
Defer mail delivery when no MX record resolves to an IP address.

The default (no) is to return the mail as undeliverable. With older
Postfix versions the default was to keep trying to deliver the mail
until someone fixed the MX record or until the mail was too old.

Note: the Postfix SMTP client always ignores MX records with equal or
worse preference than the local MTA itself.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.1 and later.

smtp_delivery_status_filter (default: $default_delivery_status_filter)
Optional filter for the smtp(8) delivery agent to change the delivery
status code or explanatory text of successful or unsuccessful
deliveries. See default_delivery_status_filter for details.

NOTE: This feature modifies Postfix SMTP client error or non-error
messages that may or may not be derived from remote SMTP server
responses. In contrast, the smtp_reply_filter feature modifies remote
SMTP server responses only.

smtp_destination_concurrency_limit (default:
$default_destination_concurrency_limit)
The maximal number of parallel deliveries to the same destination via
the smtp message delivery transport. This limit is enforced by the
queue manager. The message delivery transport name is the first field
in the entry in the master.cf file.

smtp_destination_recipient_limit (default:
$default_destination_recipient_limit)
The maximal number of recipients per message for the smtp message
delivery transport. This limit is enforced by the queue manager. The
message delivery transport name is the first field in the entry in the
master.cf file.

Setting this parameter to a value of 1 changes the meaning of
smtp_destination_concurrency_limit from concurrency per domain into
concurrency per recipient.

smtp_discard_ehlo_keyword_address_maps (default: empty)
Lookup tables, indexed by the remote SMTP server address, with case
insensitive lists of EHLO keywords (pipelining, starttls, auth, etc.)
that the Postfix SMTP client will ignore in the EHLO response from a
remote SMTP server. See smtp_discard_ehlo_keywords for details. The
table is not indexed by hostname for consistency with
smtpd_discard_ehlo_keyword_address_maps.

Specify zero or more "type:name" lookup tables, separated by whitespace
or comma. Tables will be searched in the specified order until a match
is found.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.

smtp_discard_ehlo_keywords (default: empty)
A case insensitive list of EHLO keywords (pipelining, starttls, auth,
etc.) that the Postfix SMTP client will ignore in the EHLO response
from a remote SMTP server.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.

Notes:

o Specify the silent-discard pseudo keyword to prevent this action
from being logged.

o Use the smtp_discard_ehlo_keyword_address_maps feature to
discard EHLO keywords selectively.

smtp_dns_reply_filter (default: empty)
Optional filter for Postfix SMTP client DNS lookup results. Specify
zero or more lookup tables. The lookup tables are searched in the
given order for a match with the DNS lookup result, converted to the
following form:

name ttl class type preference value

The class field is always "IN", the preference field exists only for MX
records, the names of hosts, domains, etc. end in ".", and those names
are in ASCII form (xn--mumble form in the case of UTF8 names).

When a match is found, the table lookup result specifies an action. By
default, the table query and the action name are case-insensitive.
Currently, only the IGNORE action is implemented.

Notes:

o Postfix DNS reply filters have no effect on implicit DNS lookups
through nsswitch.conf or equivalent mechanisms.

o The Postfix SMTP/LMTP client uses smtp_dns_reply_filter and
lmtp_dns_reply_filter only to discover a remote SMTP or LMTP
service (record types MX, A, AAAA, and TLSA). These lookups are
also made to implement the features reject_unverified_sender and
reject_unverified_recipient.

o The Postfix SMTP/LMTP client defers mail delivery when a filter
removes all lookup results from a successful query.

o Postfix SMTP server uses smtpd_dns_reply_filter only to look up
MX, A, AAAA, and TXT records to implement the features
reject_unknown_helo_hostname, reject_unknown_sender_domain,
reject_unknown_recipient_domain, reject_rbl_*, and
reject_rhsbl_*.

o The Postfix SMTP server logs a warning or defers mail delivery
when a filter removes all lookup results from a successful
query.

Example: ignore Google AAAA records in Postfix SMTP client DNS lookups,
because Google sometimes hard-rejects mail from IPv6 clients with valid
PTR etc. records.

/usr/local/etc/postfix/main.cf:
smtp_dns_reply_filter = pcre:$config_directory/smtp_dns_reply_filter

/usr/local/etc/postfix/smtp_dns_reply_filter:
# /domain ttl IN AAAA address/ action, all case-insensitive.
# Note: the domain name ends in ".".
/^\S+\.google\.com\.\s+\S+\s+\S+\s+AAAA\s+/ IGNORE

This feature is available in Postfix 3.0 and later.

smtp_dns_resolver_options (default: empty)
DNS Resolver options for the Postfix SMTP client. Specify zero or more
of the following options, separated by comma or whitespace. Option
names are case-sensitive. Some options refer to domain names that are
specified in the file /etc/resolv.conf or equivalent.

res_defnames
Append the current domain name to single-component names (those
that do not contain a "." character). This can produce incorrect
results, and is the hard-coded behavior prior to Postfix 2.8.

res_dnsrch
Search for host names in the current domain and in parent
domains. This can produce incorrect results and is therefore not
recommended.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.8 and later.

smtp_dns_support_level (default: empty)
Level of DNS support in the Postfix SMTP client. With
"smtp_dns_support_level" left at its empty default value, the legacy
"disable_dns_lookups" parameter controls whether DNS is enabled in the
Postfix SMTP client, otherwise the legacy parameter is ignored.

Specify one of the following:

disabled
Disable DNS lookups. No MX lookups are performed and hostname
to address lookups are unconditionally "native". This setting
is not appropriate for hosts that deliver mail to the public
Internet. Some obsolete how-to documents recommend disabling
DNS lookups in some configurations with content_filters. This
is no longer required and strongly discouraged.

enabled
Enable DNS lookups. Nexthop destination domains not enclosed in
"[]" will be subject to MX lookups. If "dns" and "native" are
included in the "smtp_host_lookup" parameter value, DNS will be
queried first to resolve MX-host A records, followed by "native"
lookups if no answer is found in DNS.

dnssec Enable DNSSEC lookups. The "dnssec" setting differs from the
"enabled" setting above in the following ways:

o Any MX lookups will set RES_USE_DNSSEC and RES_USE_EDNS0 to
request DNSSEC-validated responses. If the MX response is
DNSSEC-validated the corresponding hostnames are considered
validated.

o The address lookups of validated hostnames are also validated,
(provided of course "smtp_host_lookup" includes "dns", see
below).

o Temporary failures in DNSSEC-enabled hostname-to-address
resolution block any "native" lookups. Additional "native"
lookups only happen when DNSSEC lookups hard-fail (NODATA or
NXDOMAIN).

The Postfix SMTP client considers non-MX "[nexthop]" and
"[nexthop]:port" destinations equivalent to statically-validated MX
records of the form "nexthop. IN MX 0 nexthop." Therefore, with
"dnssec" support turned on, validated hostname-to-address lookups apply
to the nexthop domain of any "[nexthop]" or "[nexthop]:port"
destination. This is also true for LMTP "inet:host" and
"inet:host:port" destinations, as LMTP hostnames are never subject to
MX lookups.

The "dnssec" setting is recommended only if you plan to use the dane or
dane-only TLS security level, otherwise enabling DNSSEC support in
Postfix offers no additional security. Postfix DNSSEC support relies
on an upstream recursive nameserver that validates DNSSEC signatures.
Such a DNS server will always filter out forged DNS responses, even
when Postfix itself is not configured to use DNSSEC.

When using Postfix DANE support the "smtp_host_lookup" parameter should
include "dns", as DANE is not applicable to hosts resolved via "native"
lookups.

As mentioned above, Postfix is not a validating stub resolver; it
relies on the system's configured DNSSEC-validating recursive
nameserver to perform all DNSSEC validation. Since this nameserver's
DNSSEC-validated responses will be fully trusted, it is strongly
recommended that the MTA host have a local DNSSEC-validating recursive
caching nameserver listening on a loopback address, and be configured
to use only this nameserver for all lookups. Otherwise, Postfix may
remain subject to man-in-the-middle attacks that forge responses from
the recursive nameserver

DNSSEC support requires a version of Postfix compiled against a
reasonably-modern DNS resolver(3) library that implements the
RES_USE_DNSSEC and RES_USE_EDNS0 resolver options.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.11 and later.

smtp_enforce_tls (default: no)
Enforcement mode: require that remote SMTP servers use TLS encryption,
and never send mail in the clear. This also requires that the remote
SMTP server hostname matches the information in the remote server
certificate, and that the remote SMTP server certificate was issued by
a CA that is trusted by the Postfix SMTP client. If the certificate
doesn't verify or the hostname doesn't match, delivery is deferred and
mail stays in the queue.

The server hostname is matched against all names provided as dNSNames
in the SubjectAlternativeName. If no dNSNames are specified, the
CommonName is checked. The behavior may be changed with the
smtp_tls_enforce_peername option.

This option is useful only if you are definitely sure that you will
only connect to servers that support RFC 2487 _and_ that provide valid
server certificates. Typical use is for clients that send all their
email to a dedicated mailhub.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later. With Postfix 2.3
and later use smtp_tls_security_level instead.

smtp_fallback_relay (default: $fallback_relay)
Optional list of relay destinations that will be used when an SMTP
destination is not found, or when delivery fails due to a non-permanent
error. With Postfix 2.2 and earlier this parameter is called
fallback_relay.

By default, smtp_fallback_relay is empty, mail is returned to the
sender when a destination is not found, and delivery is deferred after
it fails due to a non-permanent error.

With bulk email deliveries, it can be beneficial to run the fallback
relay MTA on the same host, so that it can reuse the sender IP address.
This speeds up deliveries that are delayed by IP-based reputation
systems (greylist, etc.).

To prevent mailer loops between MX hosts and fall-back hosts, Postfix
version 2.2 and later will not use the fallback relays for destinations
that it is MX host for (assuming DNS lookup is turned on).

smtp_generic_maps (default: empty)
Optional lookup tables that perform address rewriting in the Postfix
SMTP client, typically to transform a locally valid address into a
globally valid address when sending mail across the Internet. This is
needed when the local machine does not have its own Internet domain
name, but uses something like localdomain.local instead.

Specify zero or more "type:name" lookup tables, separated by whitespace
or comma. Tables will be searched in the specified order until a match
is found.

The table format and lookups are documented in generic(5); examples are
shown in the ADDRESS_REWRITING_README and STANDARD_CONFIGURATION_README
documents.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.

smtp_header_checks (default: empty)
Restricted header_checks(5) tables for the Postfix SMTP client. These
tables are searched while mail is being delivered. Actions that change
the delivery time or destination are not available.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.5 and later.

smtp_helo_name (default: $myhostname)
The hostname to send in the SMTP HELO or EHLO command.

The default value is the machine hostname. Specify a hostname or
[ip.add.re.ss].

This information can be specified in the main.cf file for all SMTP
clients, or it can be specified in the master.cf file for a specific
client, for example:

/usr/local/etc/postfix/master.cf:
mysmtp ... smtp -o smtp_helo_name=foo.bar.com

This feature is available in Postfix 2.0 and later.

smtp_helo_timeout (default: 300s)
The Postfix SMTP client time limit for sending the HELO or EHLO
command, and for receiving the initial remote SMTP server response.

smtp_host_lookup (default: dns)
What mechanisms the Postfix SMTP client uses to look up a host's IP
address. This parameter is ignored when DNS lookups are disabled (see:
disable_dns_lookups and smtp_dns_support_level). The "dns" mechanism
is always tried before "native" if both are listed.

Specify one of the following:

dns Hosts can be found in the DNS (preferred).

native Use the native naming service only (nsswitch.conf, or equivalent
mechanism).

dns, native
Use the native service for hosts not found in the DNS.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.1 and later.

smtp_line_length_limit (default: 998)
The maximal length of message header and body lines that Postfix will
send via SMTP. This limit does not include the <CR><LF> at the end of
each line. Longer lines are broken by inserting "<CR><LF><SPACE>", to
minimize the damage to MIME formatted mail. Specify zero to disable
this limit.

The Postfix limit of 998 characters not including <CR><LF> is
consistent with the SMTP limit of 1000 characters including <CR><LF>.
The Postfix limit was 990 with Postfix 2.8 and earlier.

smtp_mail_timeout (default: 300s)
The Postfix SMTP client time limit for sending the MAIL FROM command,
and for receiving the remote SMTP server response.

smtp_mime_header_checks (default: empty)
Restricted mime_header_checks(5) tables for the Postfix SMTP client.
These tables are searched while mail is being delivered. Actions that
change the delivery time or destination are not available.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.5 and later.

smtp_min_data_rate (default: 500)
The minimum plaintext data transfer rate in bytes/second for DATA
requests, when deadlines are enabled with smtp_per_request_deadline.
After a write operation transfers N plaintext message bytes (possibly
after TLS encryption), and after the DATA request deadline is
decremented by the elapsed time of that write operation, the DATA
request deadline is incremented by N/smtp_min_data_rate seconds.
However, the deadline will never be incremented beyond the time limit
specified with smtp_data_xfer_timeout.

This feature is available in Postfix 3.7 and later.

smtp_mx_address_limit (default: 5)
The maximal number of MX (mail exchanger) IP addresses that can result
from Postfix SMTP client mail exchanger lookups, or zero (no limit).
Prior to Postfix version 2.3, this limit was disabled by default.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.1 and later.

smtp_mx_session_limit (default: 2)
The maximal number of SMTP sessions per delivery request before the
Postfix SMTP client gives up or delivers to a fall-back relay host, or
zero (no limit). This restriction ignores sessions that fail to
complete the SMTP initial handshake (Postfix version 2.2 and earlier)
or that fail to complete the EHLO and TLS handshake (Postfix version
2.3 and later).

This feature is available in Postfix 2.1 and later.

smtp_nested_header_checks (default: empty)
Restricted nested_header_checks(5) tables for the Postfix SMTP client.
These tables are searched while mail is being delivered. Actions that
change the delivery time or destination are not available.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.5 and later.

smtp_never_send_ehlo (default: no)
Never send EHLO at the start of an SMTP session. See also the
smtp_always_send_ehlo parameter.

smtp_per_record_deadline (default: no)
Change the behavior of the smtp_*_timeout time limits, from a time
limit per read or write system call, to a time limit to send or receive
a complete record (an SMTP command line, SMTP response line, SMTP
message content line, or TLS protocol message). This limits the impact
from hostile peers that trickle data one byte at a time.

Note: when per-record deadlines are enabled, a short timeout may cause
problems with TLS over very slow network connections. The reasons are
that a TLS protocol message can be up to 16 kbytes long (with TLSv1),
and that an entire TLS protocol message must be sent or received within
the per-record deadline.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.9-3.6. With older Postfix
releases, the behavior is as if this parameter is set to "no". Postfix
3.7 and later use smtp_per_request_deadline.

smtp_per_request_deadline (default: no)
Change the behavior of the smtp_*_timeout time limits, from a time
limit per plaintext or TLS read or write call, to a combined time limit
for sending a complete SMTP request and for receiving a complete SMTP
response. The deadline limits only the time spent waiting for plaintext
or TLS read or write calls, not time spent elsewhere. The per-request
deadline limits the impact from hostile peers that trickle data one
byte at a time.

See smtp_min_data_rate for how the per-request deadline is managed
during the DATA phase.

Note: when per-request deadlines are enabled, a short time limit may
cause problems with TLS over very slow network connections. The reason
is that a TLS protocol message can be up to 16 kbytes long (with
TLSv1), and that an entire TLS protocol message must be transferred
within the per-request deadline.

This feature is available in Postfix 3.7 and later. A weaker feature,
called smtp_per_record_deadline, is available with Postfix 2.9-3.6.

This feature is available in Postfix 3.7 and later.

smtp_pix_workaround_delay_time (default: 10s)
How long the Postfix SMTP client pauses before sending ".<CR><LF>" in
order to work around the PIX firewall "<CR><LF>.<CR><LF>" bug.

Choosing too short a time makes this workaround ineffective when
sending large messages over slow network connections.

smtp_pix_workaround_maps (default: empty)
Lookup tables, indexed by the remote SMTP server address, with
per-destination workarounds for CISCO PIX firewall bugs. The table is
not indexed by hostname for consistency with
smtp_discard_ehlo_keyword_address_maps.

Specify zero or more "type:name" lookup tables, separated by whitespace
or comma. Tables will be searched in the specified order until a match
is found.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.4 and later.

smtp_pix_workaround_threshold_time (default: 500s)
How long a message must be queued before the Postfix SMTP client turns
on the PIX firewall "<CR><LF>.<CR><LF>" bug workaround for delivery
through firewalls with "smtp fixup" mode turned on.

By default, the workaround is turned off for mail that is queued for
less than 500 seconds. In other words, the workaround is normally
turned off for the first delivery attempt.

Specify 0 to enable the PIX firewall "<CR><LF>.<CR><LF>" bug workaround
upon the first delivery attempt.

smtp_pix_workarounds (default: disable_esmtp, delay_dotcrlf)
A list that specifies zero or more workarounds for CISCO PIX firewall
bugs. These workarounds are implemented by the Postfix SMTP client.
Workaround names are separated by comma or space, and are case
insensitive. This parameter setting can be overruled with
per-destination smtp_pix_workaround_maps settings.

delay_dotcrlf
Insert a delay before sending ".<CR><LF>" after the end of the
message content. The delay is subject to the
smtp_pix_workaround_delay_time and
smtp_pix_workaround_threshold_time parameter settings.

disable_esmtp
Disable all extended SMTP commands: send HELO instead of EHLO.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.4 and later. The default
settings are backwards compatible with earlier Postfix versions.

smtp_quit_timeout (default: 300s)
The Postfix SMTP client time limit for sending the QUIT command, and
for receiving the remote SMTP server response.

smtp_quote_rfc821_envelope (default: yes)
Quote addresses in Postfix SMTP client MAIL FROM and RCPT TO commands
as required by RFC 5321. This includes putting quotes around an address
localpart that ends in ".".

The default is to comply with RFC 5321. If you have to send mail to a
broken SMTP server, configure a special SMTP client in master.cf:

/usr/local/etc/postfix/master.cf:
broken-smtp . . . smtp -o smtp_quote_rfc821_envelope=no

and route mail for the destination in question to the "broken-smtp"
message delivery with a transport(5) table.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.1 and later.

smtp_randomize_addresses (default: yes)
Randomize the order of equal-preference MX host addresses. This is a
performance feature of the Postfix SMTP client.

smtp_rcpt_timeout (default: 300s)
The Postfix SMTP client time limit for sending the SMTP RCPT TO
command, and for receiving the remote SMTP server response.

smtp_reply_filter (default: empty)
A mechanism to transform replies from remote SMTP servers one line at a
time. This is a last-resort tool to work around server replies that
break interoperability with the Postfix SMTP client. Other uses
involve fault injection to test Postfix's handling of invalid
responses.

Notes:

o In the case of a multi-line reply, the Postfix SMTP client uses
the final reply line's numerical SMTP reply code and enhanced
status code.

o The numerical SMTP reply code (XYZ) takes precedence over the
enhanced status code (X.Y.Z). When the enhanced status code
initial digit differs from the SMTP reply code initial digit, or
when no enhanced status code is present, the Postfix SMTP client
uses a generic enhanced status code (X.0.0) instead.

Specify the name of a "type:table" lookup table. The search string is a
single SMTP reply line as received from the remote SMTP server, except
that the trailing <CR><LF> are removed. When the lookup succeeds, the
result replaces the single SMTP reply line.

Examples:

/usr/local/etc/postfix/main.cf:
smtp_reply_filter = pcre:$config_directory/reply_filter

/usr/local/etc/postfix/reply_filter:
# Transform garbage into "250-filler..." so that it looks like
# one line from a multi-line reply. It does not matter what we
# substitute here as long it has the right syntax. The Postfix
# SMTP client will use the final line's numerical SMTP reply
# code and enhanced status code.
!/^([2-5][0-9][0-9]($|[- ]))/ 250-filler for garbage

This feature is available in Postfix 2.7.

smtp_rset_timeout (default: 20s)
The Postfix SMTP client time limit for sending the RSET command, and
for receiving the remote SMTP server response. The SMTP client sends
RSET in order to finish a recipient address probe, or to verify that a
cached session is still usable.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.1 and later.

smtp_sasl_auth_cache_name (default: empty)
An optional table to prevent repeated SASL authentication failures with
the same remote SMTP server hostname, username and password. Each table
(key, value) pair contains a server name, a username and password, and
the full server response. This information is stored when a remote SMTP
server rejects an authentication attempt with a 535 reply code. As
long as the smtp_sasl_password_maps information does not change, and as
long as the smtp_sasl_auth_cache_name information does not expire (see
smtp_sasl_auth_cache_time) the Postfix SMTP client avoids SASL
authentication attempts with the same server, username and password,
and instead bounces or defers mail as controlled with the
smtp_sasl_auth_soft_bounce configuration parameter.

Use a per-destination delivery concurrency of 1 (for example,
"smtp_destination_concurrency_limit = 1",
"relay_destination_concurrency_limit = 1", etc.), otherwise multiple
delivery agents may experience a login failure at the same time.

The table must be accessed via the proxywrite service, i.e. the map
name must start with "proxy:". The table should be stored under the
directory specified with the data_directory parameter.

This feature uses cryptographic hashing to protect plain-text
passwords, and requires that Postfix is compiled with TLS support.

Example:

smtp_sasl_auth_cache_name = proxy:btree:/var/lib/postfix/sasl_auth_cache

This feature is available in Postfix 2.5 and later.

smtp_sasl_auth_cache_time (default: 90d)
The maximal age of an smtp_sasl_auth_cache_name entry before it is
removed.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.5 and later.

smtp_sasl_auth_enable (default: no)
Enable SASL authentication in the Postfix SMTP client. By default, the
Postfix SMTP client uses no authentication.

Example:

smtp_sasl_auth_enable = yes

smtp_sasl_auth_soft_bounce (default: yes)
When a remote SMTP server rejects a SASL authentication request with a
535 reply code, defer mail delivery instead of returning mail as
undeliverable. The latter behavior was hard-coded prior to Postfix
version 2.5.

Note: the setting "yes" overrides the global soft_bounce parameter, but
the setting "no" does not.

Example:

# Default as of Postfix 2.5
smtp_sasl_auth_soft_bounce = yes
# The old hard-coded default
smtp_sasl_auth_soft_bounce = no

This feature is available in Postfix 2.5 and later.

smtp_sasl_mechanism_filter (default: empty)
If non-empty, a Postfix SMTP client filter for the remote SMTP server's
list of offered SASL mechanisms. Different client and server
implementations may support different mechanism lists; by default, the
Postfix SMTP client will use the intersection of the two.
smtp_sasl_mechanism_filter specifies an optional third mechanism list
to intersect with.

Specify mechanism names, "/file/name" patterns or "type:table" lookup
tables. The right-hand side result from "type:table" lookups is
ignored. Specify "!pattern" to exclude a mechanism name from the list.
The form "!/file/name" is supported only in Postfix version 2.4 and
later.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.

Examples:

smtp_sasl_mechanism_filter = plain, login
smtp_sasl_mechanism_filter = $config_directory/smtp_mechs
smtp_sasl_mechanism_filter = !gssapi, !login, static:rest

smtp_sasl_password_maps (default: empty)
Optional Postfix SMTP client lookup tables with one username:password
entry per sender, remote hostname or next-hop domain. Per-sender lookup
is done only when sender-dependent authentication is enabled. If no
username:password entry is found, then the Postfix SMTP client will not
attempt to authenticate to the remote host.

The Postfix SMTP client opens the lookup table before going to chroot
jail, so you can leave the password file in /usr/local/etc/postfix.

Specify zero or more "type:name" lookup tables, separated by whitespace
or comma. Tables will be searched in the specified order until a match
is found.

smtp_sasl_path (default: empty)
Implementation-specific information that the Postfix SMTP client passes
through to the SASL plug-in implementation that is selected with
smtp_sasl_type. Typically this specifies the name of a configuration
file or rendezvous point.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

smtp_sasl_security_options (default: noplaintext, noanonymous)
Postfix SMTP client SASL security options; as of Postfix 2.3 the list
of available features depends on the SASL client implementation that is
selected with smtp_sasl_type.

The following security features are defined for the cyrus client SASL
implementation:

Specify zero or more of the following:

noplaintext
Disallow methods that use plaintext passwords.

noactive
Disallow methods subject to active (non-dictionary) attack.

nodictionary
Disallow methods subject to passive (dictionary) attack.

noanonymous
Disallow methods that allow anonymous authentication.

mutual_auth
Only allow methods that provide mutual authentication (not
available with SASL version 1).

Example:

smtp_sasl_security_options = noplaintext

smtp_sasl_tls_security_options (default: $smtp_sasl_security_options)
The SASL authentication security options that the Postfix SMTP client
uses for TLS encrypted SMTP sessions.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.

smtp_sasl_tls_verified_security_options (default:
$smtp_sasl_tls_security_options)
The SASL authentication security options that the Postfix SMTP client
uses for TLS encrypted SMTP sessions with a verified server
certificate.

When mail is sent to the public MX host for the recipient's domain,
server certificates are by default optional, and delivery proceeds even
if certificate verification fails. For delivery via a submission
service that requires SASL authentication, it may be appropriate to
send plaintext passwords only when the connection to the server is
strongly encrypted and the server identity is verified.

The smtp_sasl_tls_verified_security_options parameter makes it possible
to only enable plaintext mechanisms when a secure connection to the
server is available. Submission servers subject to this policy must
either have verifiable certificates or offer suitable non-plaintext
SASL mechanisms.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.6 and later.

smtp_sasl_type (default: cyrus)
The SASL plug-in type that the Postfix SMTP client should use for
authentication. The available types are listed with the "postconf -A"
command.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

smtp_send_dummy_mail_auth (default: no)
Whether or not to append the "AUTH=<>" option to the MAIL FROM command
in SASL-authenticated SMTP sessions. The default is not to send this,
to avoid problems with broken remote SMTP servers. Before Postfix 2.9
the behavior is as if "smtp_send_dummy_mail_auth = yes".

This feature is available in Postfix 2.9 and later.

smtp_send_xforward_command (default: no)
Send the non-standard XFORWARD command when the Postfix SMTP server
EHLO response announces XFORWARD support.

This allows a Postfix SMTP delivery agent, used for injecting mail into
a content filter, to forward the name, address, protocol and HELO name
of the original client to the content filter and downstream queuing
SMTP server. This can produce more useful logging than
localhost[127.0.0.1] etc.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.1 and later.

smtp_sender_dependent_authentication (default: no)
Enable sender-dependent authentication in the Postfix SMTP client; this
is available only with SASL authentication, and disables SMTP
connection caching to ensure that mail from different senders will use
the appropriate credentials.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

smtp_skip_4xx_greeting (default: yes)
Skip SMTP servers that greet with a 4XX status code (go away, try again
later).

By default, the Postfix SMTP client moves on the next mail exchanger.
Specify "smtp_skip_4xx_greeting = no" if Postfix should defer delivery
immediately.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.0 and earlier. Later Postfix
versions always skip remote SMTP servers that greet with a 4XX status
code.

smtp_skip_5xx_greeting (default: yes)
Skip remote SMTP servers that greet with a 5XX status code.

By default, the Postfix SMTP client moves on the next mail exchanger.
Specify "smtp_skip_5xx_greeting = no" if Postfix should bounce the mail
immediately. Caution: the latter behavior appears to contradict RFC
2821.

smtp_skip_quit_response (default: yes)
Do not wait for the response to the SMTP QUIT command.

smtp_starttls_timeout (default: 300s)
Time limit for Postfix SMTP client write and read operations during TLS
startup and shutdown handshake procedures.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.

smtp_tcp_port (default: smtp)
The default TCP port that the Postfix SMTP client connects to. Specify
a symbolic name (see services(5)) or a numeric port.

smtp_tls_CAfile (default: empty)
A file containing CA certificates of root CAs trusted to sign either
remote SMTP server certificates or intermediate CA certificates. These
are loaded into memory before the smtp(8) client enters the chroot
jail. If the number of trusted roots is large, consider using
smtp_tls_CApath instead, but note that the latter directory must be
present in the chroot jail if the smtp(8) client is chrooted. This file
may also be used to augment the client certificate trust chain, but it
is best to include all the required certificates directly in
$smtp_tls_cert_file (or, Postfix >= 3.4 $smtp_tls_chain_files).

Specify "smtp_tls_CAfile = /path/to/system_CA_file" to use ONLY the
system-supplied default Certification Authority certificates.

Specify "tls_append_default_CA = no" to prevent Postfix from appending
the system-supplied default CAs and trusting third-party certificates.

Example:

smtp_tls_CAfile = $config_directory/CAcert.pem

This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.

smtp_tls_CApath (default: empty)
Directory with PEM format Certification Authority certificates that the
Postfix SMTP client uses to verify a remote SMTP server certificate.
Don't forget to create the necessary "hash" links with, for example,
"$OPENSSL_HOME/bin/c_rehash /usr/local/etc/postfix/certs".

To use this option in chroot mode, this directory (or a copy) must be
inside the chroot jail.

Specify "smtp_tls_CApath = /path/to/system_CA_directory" to use ONLY
the system-supplied default Certification Authority certificates.

Specify "tls_append_default_CA = no" to prevent Postfix from appending
the system-supplied default CAs and trusting third-party certificates.

Example:

smtp_tls_CApath = $config_directory/certs

This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.

smtp_tls_block_early_mail_reply (default: no)
Try to detect a mail hijacking attack based on a TLS protocol
vulnerability (CVE-2009-3555), where an attacker prepends malicious
HELO, MAIL, RCPT, DATA commands to a Postfix SMTP client TLS session.
The attack would succeed with non-Postfix SMTP servers that reply to
the malicious HELO, MAIL, RCPT, DATA commands after negotiating the
Postfix SMTP client TLS session.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.7.

smtp_tls_cert_file (default: empty)
File with the Postfix SMTP client RSA certificate in PEM format. This
file may also contain the Postfix SMTP client private RSA key, and
these may be the same as the Postfix SMTP server RSA certificate and
key file. With Postfix >= 3.4 the preferred way to configure client
keys and certificates is via the "smtp_tls_chain_files" parameter.

Do not configure client certificates unless you must present client TLS
certificates to one or more servers. Client certificates are not
usually needed, and can cause problems in configurations that work well
without them. The recommended setting is to let the defaults stand:

smtp_tls_cert_file =
smtp_tls_key_file =
smtp_tls_eccert_file =
smtp_tls_eckey_file =
# Obsolete DSA parameters
smtp_tls_dcert_file =
smtp_tls_dkey_file =
# Postfix >= 3.4 interface
smtp_tls_chain_files =

The best way to use the default settings is to comment out the above
parameters in main.cf if present.

To enable remote SMTP servers to verify the Postfix SMTP client
certificate, the issuing CA certificates must be made available to the
server. You should include the required certificates in the client
certificate file, the client certificate first, then the issuing CA(s)
(bottom-up order).

Example: the certificate for "client.example.com" was issued by
"intermediate CA" which itself has a certificate issued by "root CA".
As the "root" super-user create the client.pem file with:

# umask 077
# cat client_key.pem client_cert.pem intermediate_CA.pem > chain.pem

If you also want to verify remote SMTP server certificates issued by
these CAs, you can add the CA certificates to the smtp_tls_CAfile, in
which case it is not necessary to have them in the smtp_tls_cert_file,
smtp_tls_dcert_file (obsolete) or smtp_tls_eccert_file.

A certificate supplied here must be usable as an SSL client certificate
and hence pass the "openssl verify -purpose sslclient ..." test.

Example:

smtp_tls_cert_file = $config_directory/chain.pem

This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.

smtp_tls_chain_files (default: empty)
List of one or more PEM files, each holding one or more private keys
directly followed by a corresponding certificate chain. The file names
are separated by commas and/or whitespace. This parameter obsoletes
the legacy algorithm-specific key and certificate file settings. When
this parameter is non-empty, the legacy parameters are ignored, and a
warning is logged if any are also non-empty.

With the proliferation of multiple private key algorithms-which, as of
OpenSSL 1.1.1, include DSA (obsolete), RSA, ECDSA, Ed25519 and Ed448-it
is increasingly impractical to use separate parameters to configure the
key and certificate chain for each algorithm. Therefore, Postfix now
supports storing multiple keys and corresponding certificate chains in
a single file or in a set of files.

Each key must appear immediately before the corresponding certificate,
optionally followed by additional issuer certificates that complete the
certificate chain for that key. When multiple files are specified,
they are equivalent to a single file that is concatenated from those
files in the given order. Thus, while a key must always precede its
certificate and issuer chain, it can be in a separate file, so long as
that file is listed immediately before the file that holds the
corresponding certificate chain. Once all the files are concatenated,
the sequence of PEM objects must be: key1, cert1, [chain1], key2,
cert2, [chain2], ..., keyN, certN, [chainN].

Storing the private key in the same file as the corresponding
certificate is more reliable. With the key and certificate in separate
files, there is a chance that during key rollover a Postfix process
might load a private key and certificate from separate files that don't
match. Various operational errors may even result in a persistent
broken configuration in which the certificate does not match the
private key.

The file or files must contain at most one key of each type. If, for
example, two or more RSA keys and corresponding chains are listed,
depending on the version of OpenSSL either only the last one will be
used or a configuration error may be detected. Note that while
"Ed25519" and "Ed448" are considered separate algorithms, the various
ECDSA curves (typically one of prime256v1, secp384r1 or secp521r1) are
considered as different parameters of a single "ECDSA" algorithm, so it
is not presently possible to configure keys for more than one ECDSA
curve.

Example (separate files for each key and corresponding certificate
chain):

/usr/local/etc/postfix/main.cf:
smtp_tls_chain_files =
${config_directory}/ed25519.pem,
${config_directory}/ed448.pem,
${config_directory}/rsa.pem

/usr/local/etc/postfix/ed25519.pem:
-----BEGIN PRIVATE KEY-----
MC4CAQAwBQYDK2VwBCIEIEJfbbO4BgBQGBg9NAbIJaDBqZb4bC4cOkjtAH+Efbz3
-----END PRIVATE KEY-----
-----BEGIN CERTIFICATE-----
MIIBKzCB3qADAgECAhQaw+rflRreYuUZBp0HuNn/e5rMZDAFBgMrZXAwFDESMBAG
...
nC0egv51YPDWxEHom4QA
-----END CERTIFICATE-----

/usr/local/etc/postfix/ed448.pem:
-----BEGIN PRIVATE KEY-----
MEcCAQAwBQYDK2VxBDsEOQf+m0P+G0qi+NZ0RolyeiE5zdlPQR8h8y4jByBifpIe
LNler7nzHQJ1SLcOiXFHXlxp/84VZuh32A==
-----END PRIVATE KEY-----
-----BEGIN CERTIFICATE-----
MIIBdjCB96ADAgECAhQSv4oP972KypOZPNPF4fmsiQoRHzAFBgMrZXEwFDESMBAG
...
pQcWsx+4J29e6YWH3Cy/CdUaexKP4RPCZDrPX7bk5C2BQ+eeYOxyThMA
-----END CERTIFICATE-----

/usr/local/etc/postfix/rsa.pem:
-----BEGIN PRIVATE KEY-----
MIIEvQIBADANBgkqhkiG9w0BAQEFAASCBKcwggSjAgEAAoIBAQDc4QusgkahH9rL
...
ahQkZ3+krcaJvDSMgvu0tDc=
-----END PRIVATE KEY-----
-----BEGIN CERTIFICATE-----
MIIC+DCCAeCgAwIBAgIUIUkrbk1GAemPCT8i9wKsTGDH7HswDQYJKoZIhvcNAQEL
...
Rirz15HGVNTK8wzFd+nulPzwUo6dH2IU8KazmyRi7OGvpyrMlm15TRE2oyE=
-----END CERTIFICATE-----

Example (all keys and certificates in a single file):

/usr/local/etc/postfix/main.cf:
smtp_tls_chain_files = ${config_directory}/chains.pem

/usr/local/etc/postfix/chains.pem:
-----BEGIN PRIVATE KEY-----
MC4CAQAwBQYDK2VwBCIEIEJfbbO4BgBQGBg9NAbIJaDBqZb4bC4cOkjtAH+Efbz3
-----END PRIVATE KEY-----
-----BEGIN CERTIFICATE-----
MIIBKzCB3qADAgECAhQaw+rflRreYuUZBp0HuNn/e5rMZDAFBgMrZXAwFDESMBAG
...
nC0egv51YPDWxEHom4QA
-----END CERTIFICATE-----
-----BEGIN PRIVATE KEY-----
MEcCAQAwBQYDK2VxBDsEOQf+m0P+G0qi+NZ0RolyeiE5zdlPQR8h8y4jByBifpIe
LNler7nzHQJ1SLcOiXFHXlxp/84VZuh32A==
-----END PRIVATE KEY-----
-----BEGIN CERTIFICATE-----
MIIBdjCB96ADAgECAhQSv4oP972KypOZPNPF4fmsiQoRHzAFBgMrZXEwFDESMBAG
...
pQcWsx+4J29e6YWH3Cy/CdUaexKP4RPCZDrPX7bk5C2BQ+eeYOxyThMA
-----END CERTIFICATE-----
-----BEGIN PRIVATE KEY-----
MIIEvQIBADANBgkqhkiG9w0BAQEFAASCBKcwggSjAgEAAoIBAQDc4QusgkahH9rL
...
ahQkZ3+krcaJvDSMgvu0tDc=
-----END PRIVATE KEY-----
-----BEGIN CERTIFICATE-----
MIIC+DCCAeCgAwIBAgIUIUkrbk1GAemPCT8i9wKsTGDH7HswDQYJKoZIhvcNAQEL
...
Rirz15HGVNTK8wzFd+nulPzwUo6dH2IU8KazmyRi7OGvpyrMlm15TRE2oyE=
-----END CERTIFICATE-----

This feature is available in Postfix 3.4 and later.

smtp_tls_cipherlist (default: empty)
Obsolete Postfix < 2.3 control for the Postfix SMTP client TLS cipher
list. As this feature applies to all TLS security levels, it is easy to
create interoperability problems by choosing a non-default cipher list.
Do not use a non-default TLS cipher list on hosts that deliver email to
the public Internet: you will be unable to send email to servers that
only support the ciphers you exclude. Using a restricted cipher list
may be more appropriate for an internal MTA, where one can exert some
control over the TLS software and settings of the peer servers.

Note: do not use "" quotes around the parameter value.

This feature is available in Postfix version 2.2. It is not used with
Postfix 2.3 and later; use smtp_tls_mandatory_ciphers instead.

smtp_tls_ciphers (default: medium)
The minimum TLS cipher grade that the Postfix SMTP client will use with
opportunistic TLS encryption. Cipher types listed in
smtp_tls_exclude_ciphers are excluded from the base definition of the
selected cipher grade. The default value is "medium" for Postfix
releases after the middle of 2015, "export" for older releases.

When TLS is mandatory the cipher grade is chosen via the
smtp_tls_mandatory_ciphers configuration parameter, see there for
syntax details. See smtp_tls_policy_maps for information on how to
configure ciphers on a per-destination basis.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.6 and later. With earlier
Postfix releases only the smtp_tls_mandatory_ciphers parameter is
implemented, and opportunistic TLS always uses "export" or better (i.e.
all) ciphers.

smtp_tls_connection_reuse (default: no)
Try to make multiple deliveries per TLS-encrypted connection. This
uses the tlsproxy(8) service to encrypt an SMTP connection, uses the
scache(8) service to save that connection, and relies on hints from the
qmgr(8) daemon.

See "Client-side TLS connection reuse" for background details.

This feature is available in Postfix 3.4 and later.

smtp_tls_dane_insecure_mx_policy (default: see postconf -d output)
The TLS policy for MX hosts with "secure" TLSA records when the nexthop
destination security level is dane, but the MX record was found via an
"insecure" MX lookup. The choices are:

may The TLSA records will be ignored and TLS will be optional. If
the MX host does not appear to support STARTTLS, or the STARTTLS
handshake fails, mail may be sent in the clear.

encrypt
The TLSA records will signal a requirement to use TLS. While
TLS encryption will be required, authentication will not be
performed.

dane The TLSA records will be used just as with "secure" MX records.
TLS encryption will be required, and, if at least one of the
TLSA records is "usable", authentication will be required. When
authentication succeeds, it will be logged only as "Trusted",
not "Verified", because the MX host name could have been forged.
The default setting for Postfix >= 3.6 is "dane" with
"smtp_tls_security_level = dane", otherwise "may". This behavior
was backported to Postfix versions 3.5.9, 3.4.19, 3.3.16.
3.2.21. With earlier Postfix versions the default setting was
always "dane".

Though with "insecure" MX records an active attacker can compromise
SMTP transport security by returning forged MX records, such attacks
are "tamper-evident" since any forged MX hostnames will be recorded in
the mail logs. Attackers who place a high value on staying hidden may
be deterred from forging MX records.

This feature is available in Postfix 3.1 and later. The may policy is
backwards-compatible with earlier Postfix versions.

smtp_tls_dcert_file (default: empty)
File with the Postfix SMTP client DSA certificate in PEM format. This
file may also contain the Postfix SMTP client private DSA key. The DSA
algorithm is obsolete and should not be used.

See the discussion under smtp_tls_cert_file for more details.

Example:

smtp_tls_dcert_file = $config_directory/client-dsa.pem

This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.

smtp_tls_dkey_file (default: $smtp_tls_dcert_file)
File with the Postfix SMTP client DSA private key in PEM format. This
file may be combined with the Postfix SMTP client DSA certificate file
specified with $smtp_tls_dcert_file. The DSA algorithm is obsolete and
should not be used.

The private key must be accessible without a pass-phrase, i.e. it must
not be encrypted. File permissions should grant read-only access to the
system superuser account ("root"), and no access to anyone else.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.

smtp_tls_eccert_file (default: empty)
File with the Postfix SMTP client ECDSA certificate in PEM format.
This file may also contain the Postfix SMTP client ECDSA private key.
With Postfix >= 3.4 the preferred way to configure client keys and
certificates is via the "smtp_tls_chain_files" parameter.

See the discussion under smtp_tls_cert_file for more details.

Example:

smtp_tls_eccert_file = $config_directory/ecdsa-ccert.pem

This feature is available in Postfix 2.6 and later, when Postfix is
compiled and linked with OpenSSL 1.0.0 or later.

smtp_tls_eckey_file (default: $smtp_tls_eccert_file)
File with the Postfix SMTP client ECDSA private key in PEM format.
This file may be combined with the Postfix SMTP client ECDSA
certificate file specified with $smtp_tls_eccert_file. With Postfix >=
3.4 the preferred way to configure client keys and certificates is via
the "smtp_tls_chain_files" parameter.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.6 and later, when Postfix is
compiled and linked with OpenSSL 1.0.0 or later.

smtp_tls_enforce_peername (default: yes)
With mandatory TLS encryption, require that the remote SMTP server
hostname matches the information in the remote SMTP server certificate.
As of RFC 2487 the requirements for hostname checking for MTA clients
are not specified.

This option can be set to "no" to disable strict peer name checking.
This setting has no effect on sessions that are controlled via the
smtp_tls_per_site table.

Disabling the hostname verification can make sense in a closed
environment where special CAs are created. If not used carefully, this
option opens the danger of a "man-in-the-middle" attack (the CommonName
of this attacker will be logged).

This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later. With Postfix 2.3
and later use smtp_tls_security_level instead.

smtp_tls_exclude_ciphers (default: empty)
List of ciphers or cipher types to exclude from the Postfix SMTP client
cipher list at all TLS security levels. This is not an OpenSSL
cipherlist, it is a simple list separated by whitespace and/or commas.
The elements are a single cipher, or one or more "+" separated cipher
properties, in which case only ciphers matching all the properties are
excluded.

Examples (some of these will cause problems):

smtp_tls_exclude_ciphers = aNULL
smtp_tls_exclude_ciphers = MD5, DES
smtp_tls_exclude_ciphers = DES+MD5
smtp_tls_exclude_ciphers = AES256-SHA, DES-CBC3-MD5
smtp_tls_exclude_ciphers = kEDH+aRSA

The first setting disables anonymous ciphers. The next setting disables
ciphers that use the MD5 digest algorithm or the (single) DES
encryption algorithm. The next setting disables ciphers that use MD5
and DES together. The next setting disables the two ciphers
"AES256-SHA" and "DES-CBC3-MD5". The last setting disables ciphers that
use "EDH" key exchange with RSA authentication.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

smtp_tls_fingerprint_cert_match (default: empty)
List of acceptable remote SMTP server certificate fingerprints for the
"fingerprint" TLS security level (smtp_tls_security_level =
fingerprint). At this security level, Certification Authorities are not
used, and certificate expiration times are ignored. Instead, server
certificates are verified directly via their certificate fingerprint or
public key fingerprint (Postfix 2.9 and later). The fingerprint is a
message digest of the server certificate (or public key). The digest
algorithm is selected via the smtp_tls_fingerprint_digest parameter.

The colons between each pair of nibbles in the fingerprint value are
optional (Postfix >= 3.6). These were required in earlier Postfix
releases.

When an smtp_tls_policy_maps table entry specifies the "fingerprint"
security level, any "match" attributes in that entry specify the list
of valid fingerprints for the corresponding destination. Multiple
fingerprints can be combined with a "|" delimiter in a single match
attribute, or multiple match attributes can be employed.

Example: Certificate fingerprint verification with internal mailhub.
Two matching fingerprints are listed. The relayhost may be multiple
physical hosts behind a load-balancer, each with its own private/public
key and self-signed certificate. Alternatively, a single relayhost may
be in the process of switching from one set of private/public keys to
another, and both keys are trusted just prior to the transition.

relayhost = [mailhub.example.com]
smtp_tls_security_level = fingerprint
smtp_tls_fingerprint_digest = sha256
smtp_tls_fingerprint_cert_match =
cd:fc:d8:db:f8:c4:82:96:6c:...:28:71:e8:f5:8d:a5:0d:9b:d4:a6
dd:5c:ef:f5:c3:bc:64:25:36:...:99:36:06:ce:40:ef:de:2e:ad:a4

Example: Certificate fingerprint verification with selected
destinations. As in the example above, we show two matching
fingerprints:

/usr/local/etc/postfix/main.cf:
smtp_tls_policy_maps = hash:$config_directory/tls_policy
smtp_tls_fingerprint_digest = sha256

/usr/local/etc/postfix/tls_policy:
example.com fingerprint
match=51:e9:af:2e:1e:40:1f:...:64:0a:30:35:2d:09:16:31:5a:eb:82:76
match=b6:b4:72:34:e2:59:cd:...:c2:ca:63:0d:4d:cc:2c:7d:84:de:e6:2f

This feature is available in Postfix 2.5 and later.

smtp_tls_fingerprint_digest (default: see postconf -d output)
The message digest algorithm used to construct remote SMTP server
certificate fingerprints. At the "fingerprint" TLS security level
(smtp_tls_security_level = fingerprint), the server certificate is
verified by directly matching its certificate fingerprint or its public
key fingerprint (Postfix 2.9 and later). The fingerprint is the message
digest of the server certificate (or its public key) using the selected
algorithm. With a digest algorithm resistant to "second pre-image"
attacks, it is not feasible to create a new public key and a matching
certificate (or public/private key-pair) that has the same fingerprint.

The default algorithm is sha256 with Postfix >= 3.6 and the
compatibility_level set to 3.6 or higher. With Postfix <= 3.5, the
default algorithm is md5.

The best-practice algorithm is now sha256. Recent advances in hash
function cryptanalysis have led to md5 and sha1 being deprecated in
favor of sha256. However, as long as there are no known "second
pre-image" attacks against the older algorithms, their use in this
context, though not recommended, is still likely safe.

While additional digest algorithms are often available with OpenSSL's
libcrypto, only those used by libssl in SSL cipher suites are available
to Postfix. You'll likely find support for md5, sha1, sha256 and
sha512.

To find the fingerprint of a specific certificate file, with a specific
digest algorithm, run:

$ openssl x509 -noout -fingerprint -digest -in certfile.pem

The text to the right of the "=" sign is the desired fingerprint. For
example:

$ openssl x509 -noout -fingerprint -sha256 -in cert.pem
SHA256 Fingerprint=D4:6A:AB:19:24:...:BB:A6:CB:66:82:C0:8E:9B:EE:29:A8:1A

To extract the public key fingerprint from an X.509 certificate, you
need to extract the public key from the certificate and compute the
appropriate digest of its DER (ASN.1) encoding. With OpenSSL the
"-pubkey" option of the "x509" command extracts the public key always
in "PEM" format. We pipe the result to another OpenSSL command that
converts the key to DER and then to the "dgst" command to compute the
fingerprint.

The actual command to transform the key to DER format depends on the
version of OpenSSL used. As of OpenSSL 1.0.0, the "pkey" command
supports all key types.

# OpenSSL >= 1.0 with SHA-256 fingerprints.
$ openssl x509 -in cert.pem -noout -pubkey |
openssl pkey -pubin -outform DER |
openssl dgst -sha256 -c
(stdin)= 64:3f:1f:f6:e5:1e:d4:2a:56:...:fc:09:1a:61:98:b5:bc:7c:60:58

The Postfix SMTP server and client log the peer (leaf) certificate
fingerprint and the public key fingerprint when the TLS loglevel is 2
or higher.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.5 and later.

smtp_tls_force_insecure_host_tlsa_lookup (default: no)
Lookup the associated DANE TLSA RRset even when a hostname is not an
alias and its address records lie in an unsigned zone. This is
unlikely to ever yield DNSSEC validated results, since child zones of
unsigned zones are also unsigned in the absence of DLV or locally
configured non-root trust-anchors. We anticipate that such mechanisms
will not be used for just the "_tcp" subdomain of a host. Suppressing
the TLSA RRset lookup reduces latency and avoids potential
interoperability problems with nameservers for unsigned zones that are
not prepared to handle the new TLSA RRset.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.11.

smtp_tls_key_file (default: $smtp_tls_cert_file)
File with the Postfix SMTP client RSA private key in PEM format. This
file may be combined with the Postfix SMTP client RSA certificate file
specified with $smtp_tls_cert_file. With Postfix >= 3.4 the preferred
way to configure client keys and certificates is via the
"smtp_tls_chain_files" parameter.

Example:

smtp_tls_key_file = $smtp_tls_cert_file

This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.

smtp_tls_loglevel (default: 0)
Enable additional Postfix SMTP client logging of TLS activity. Each
logging level also includes the information that is logged at a lower
logging level.

0 Disable logging of TLS activity.

1 Log only a summary message on TLS handshake completion - no
logging of remote SMTP server certificate trust-chain
verification errors if server certificate verification is not
required. With Postfix 2.8 and earlier, log the summary message
and unconditionally log trust-chain verification errors.

2 Also log levels during TLS negotiation.

3 Also log the hexadecimal and ASCII dump of the TLS negotiation
process.

4 Also log the hexadecimal and ASCII dump of complete
transmission after STARTTLS.

Do not use "smtp_tls_loglevel = 2" or higher except in case of
problems. Use of loglevel 4 is strongly discouraged.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.

smtp_tls_mandatory_ciphers (default: medium)
The minimum TLS cipher grade that the Postfix SMTP client will use with
mandatory TLS encryption. The default value "medium" is suitable for
most destinations with which you may want to enforce TLS, and is beyond
the reach of today's cryptanalytic methods. See smtp_tls_policy_maps
for information on how to configure ciphers on a per-destination basis.

The following cipher grades are supported:

high Enable only "HIGH" grade OpenSSL ciphers. This setting may be
appropriate when all mandatory TLS destinations (e.g. when all
mail is routed to a suitably capable relayhost) support at least
one "HIGH" grade cipher. The underlying cipherlist is specified
via the tls_high_cipherlist configuration parameter, which you
are strongly encouraged not to change.

medium Enable "MEDIUM" grade or better OpenSSL ciphers. The underlying
cipherlist is specified via the tls_medium_cipherlist
configuration parameter, which you are strongly encouraged not
to change.

null Enable only the "NULL" OpenSSL ciphers, these provide
authentication without encryption. This setting is only
appropriate in the rare case that all servers are prepared to
use NULL ciphers (not normally enabled in TLS servers). A
plausible use-case is an LMTP server listening on a UNIX-domain
socket that is configured to support "NULL" ciphers. The
underlying cipherlist is specified via the tls_null_cipherlist
configuration parameter, which you are strongly encouraged not
to change.

low Enable "LOW" grade or stronger OpenSSL ciphers. In Postfix >=
3.8 this cipher grade is always identical to "medium". Recent
versions of OpenSSL do not support any "LOW" grade ciphers. In
earlier Postfix releases the underlying cipherlist was specified
via the tls_low_cipherlist configuration parameter, which you
are strongly encouraged not to change. This obsolete cipher
grade SHOULD NOT be used.

export Enable "EXPORT" grade or stronger OpenSSL ciphers. In Postfix
>= 3.8 this cipher grade is always identical to "medium".
Recent versions of OpenSSL do not support any "EXPORT" grade
ciphers. In earlier Postfix releases the underlying cipherlist
was specified via the tls_export_cipherlist configuration
parameter, which you are strongly encouraged not to change.
This obsolete cipher grade SHOULD NOT be used.

The underlying cipherlists for grades other than "null" include
anonymous ciphers, but these are automatically filtered out if the
Postfix SMTP client is configured to verify server certificates. You
are very unlikely to need to take any steps to exclude anonymous
ciphers, they are excluded automatically as necessary. If you must
exclude anonymous ciphers at the "may" or "encrypt" security levels,
when the Postfix SMTP client does not need or use peer certificates,
set "smtp_tls_exclude_ciphers = aNULL". To exclude anonymous ciphers
only when TLS is enforced, set "smtp_tls_mandatory_exclude_ciphers =
aNULL".

This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

smtp_tls_mandatory_exclude_ciphers (default: empty)
Additional list of ciphers or cipher types to exclude from the Postfix
SMTP client cipher list at mandatory TLS security levels. This list
works in addition to the exclusions listed with
smtp_tls_exclude_ciphers (see there for syntax details).

Starting with Postfix 2.6, the mandatory cipher exclusions can be
specified on a per-destination basis via the TLS policy "exclude"
attribute. See smtp_tls_policy_maps for notes and examples.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

smtp_tls_mandatory_protocols (default: see postconf -d output)
TLS protocols that the Postfix SMTP client will use with mandatory TLS
encryption. In main.cf the values are separated by whitespace, commas
or colons. In the policy table "protocols" attribute (see
smtp_tls_policy_maps) the only valid separator is colon. An empty value
means allow all protocols.

The valid protocol names (see SSL_get_version(3)) are "SSLv2", "SSLv3",
"TLSv1", "TLSv1.1", "TLSv1.2" and "TLSv1.3". Starting with Postfix
3.6, the default value is ">=TLSv1", which sets TLS 1.0 as the lowest
supported TLS protocol version (see below). Older releases use the "!"
exclusion syntax, also described below.

As of Postfix 3.6, the preferred way to limit the range of acceptable
protocols is to set a lowest acceptable TLS protocol version and/or a
highest acceptable TLS protocol version. To set the lower bound
include an element of the form: ">=version" where version is a either
one of the TLS protocol names listed above, or a hexadecimal number
corresponding to the desired TLS protocol version (0301 for TLS 1.0,
0302 for TLS 1.1, etc.). For the upper bound, use "<=version". There
must be no whitespace between the ">=" or "<=" symbols and the protocol
name or number.

Hexadecimal protocol numbers make it possible to specify protocol
bounds for TLS versions that are known to OpenSSL, but might not be
known to Postfix. They cannot be used with the legacy exclusion
syntax. Leading "0" or "0x" prefixes are supported, but not required.
Therefore, "301", "0301", "0x301" and "0x0301" are all equivalent to
"TLSv1". Hexadecimal versions unknown to OpenSSL will fail to set the
upper or lower bound, and a warning will be logged. Hexadecimal
versions should only be used when Postfix is linked with some future
version of OpenSSL that supports TLS 1.4 or later, but Postfix does not
yet support a symbolic name for that protocol version.

Hexadecimal example (Postfix >= 3.6):

# Allow only TLS 1.2 through (hypothetical) TLS 1.4, once supported
# in some future version of OpenSSL (presently a warning is logged).
smtp_tls_mandatory_protocols = >=TLSv1.2, <=0305
# Allow only TLS 1.2 and up:
smtp_tls_mandatory_protocols = >=0x0303

With Postfix < 3.6 there is no support for a minimum or maximum
version, and the protocol range is configured via protocol exclusions.
To require at least TLS 1.0, set "smtp_tls_mandatory_protocols =
!SSLv2, !SSLv3". Listing the protocols to include, rather than the
protocols to exclude, is supported, but not recommended. The exclusion
syntax more accurately matches the underlying OpenSSL interface.

When using the exclusion syntax, take care to ensure that the range of
protocols supported by the Postfix SMTP client is contiguous. When a
protocol version is enabled, disabling any higher version implicitly
disables all versions above that higher version. Thus, for example:

smtp_tls_mandatory_protocols = !SSLv2, !SSLv3, !TLSv1.1

also disables any protocol versions higher than TLSv1.1 leaving only
"TLSv1" enabled.

Support for "TLSv1.3" was introduced in OpenSSL 1.1.1. Disabling this
protocol via "!TLSv1.3" is supported since Postfix 3.4 (or patch
releases >= 3.0.14, 3.1.10, 3.2.7 and 3.3.2).

While the vast majority of SMTP servers with DANE TLSA records now
support at least TLS 1.2, a few still only support TLS 1.0. If you use
"dane" or "dane-only" it is best not to disable TLSv1, except perhaps
via the policy table for destinations which you are sure will support
"TLSv1.2".

See the documentation of the smtp_tls_policy_maps parameter and
TLS_README for more information about security levels.

Example:
# Preferred syntax with Postfix >= 3.6:
smtp_tls_mandatory_protocols = >=TLSv1.2, <=TLSv1.3
# Legacy syntax:
smtp_tls_mandatory_protocols = !SSLv2, !SSLv3, !TLSv1, !TLSv1.1

This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

smtp_tls_note_starttls_offer (default: no)
Log the hostname of a remote SMTP server that offers STARTTLS, when TLS
is not already enabled for that server.

The logfile record looks like:

postfix/smtp[pid]: Host offered STARTTLS: [name.of.host]

This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.

smtp_tls_per_site (default: empty)
Optional lookup tables with the Postfix SMTP client TLS usage policy by
next-hop destination and by remote SMTP server hostname. When both
lookups succeed, the more specific per-site policy (NONE, MUST, etc.)
overrides the less specific one (MAY), and the more secure per-site
policy (MUST, etc.) overrides the less secure one (NONE). With Postfix
2.3 and later smtp_tls_per_site is strongly discouraged: use
smtp_tls_policy_maps instead.

Use of the bare hostname as the per-site table lookup key is
discouraged. Always use the full destination nexthop (enclosed in []
with a possible ":port" suffix). A recipient domain or MX-enabled
transport next-hop with no port suffix may look like a bare hostname,
but is still a suitable destination.

Specify a next-hop destination or server hostname on the left-hand
side; no wildcards are allowed. The next-hop destination is either the
recipient domain, or the destination specified with a transport(5)
table, the relayhost parameter, or the relay_transport parameter. On
the right hand side specify one of the following keywords:

NONE Don't use TLS at all. This overrides a less specific MAY lookup
result from the alternate host or next-hop lookup key, and
overrides the global smtp_use_tls, smtp_enforce_tls, and
smtp_tls_enforce_peername settings.

MAY Try to use TLS if the server announces support, otherwise use an
unencrypted connection. This has less precedence than a more
specific result (including NONE) from the alternate host or
next-hop lookup key, and has less precedence than the more
specific global "smtp_enforce_tls = yes" or
"smtp_tls_enforce_peername = yes".

MUST_NOPEERMATCH
Require TLS encryption, but do not require that the remote SMTP
server hostname matches the information in the remote SMTP
server certificate, or that the server certificate was issued by
a trusted CA. This overrides a less secure NONE or a less
specific MAY lookup result from the alternate host or next-hop
lookup key, and overrides the global smtp_use_tls,
smtp_enforce_tls and smtp_tls_enforce_peername settings.

MUST Require TLS encryption, require that the remote SMTP server
hostname matches the information in the remote SMTP server
certificate, and require that the remote SMTP server certificate
was issued by a trusted CA. This overrides a less secure NONE or
MUST_NOPEERMATCH or a less specific MAY lookup result from the
alternate host or next-hop lookup key, and overrides the global
smtp_use_tls, smtp_enforce_tls and smtp_tls_enforce_peername
settings.

The above keywords correspond to the "none", "may", "encrypt" and
"verify" security levels for the new smtp_tls_security_level parameter
introduced in Postfix 2.3. Starting with Postfix 2.3, and independently
of how the policy is specified, the smtp_tls_mandatory_ciphers and
smtp_tls_mandatory_protocols parameters apply when TLS encryption is
mandatory. Connections for which encryption is optional typically
enable all "export" grade and better ciphers (see smtp_tls_ciphers and
smtp_tls_protocols).

As long as no secure DNS lookup mechanism is available, false hostnames
in MX or CNAME responses can change the server hostname that Postfix
uses for TLS policy lookup and server certificate verification. Even
with a perfect match between the server hostname and the server
certificate, there is no guarantee that Postfix is connected to the
right server. See TLS_README (Closing a DNS loophole with obsolete
per-site TLS policies) for a possible work-around.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later. With Postfix 2.3
and later use smtp_tls_policy_maps instead.

smtp_tls_policy_maps (default: empty)
Optional lookup tables with the Postfix SMTP client TLS security policy
by next-hop destination; when a non-empty value is specified, this
overrides the obsolete smtp_tls_per_site parameter. See TLS_README for
a more detailed discussion of TLS security levels.

Specify zero or more "type:name" lookup tables, separated by whitespace
or comma. Tables will be searched in the specified order until a match
is found.

The TLS policy table is indexed by the full next-hop destination, which
is either the recipient domain, or the verbatim next-hop specified in
the transport table, $local_transport, $virtual_transport,
$relay_transport or $default_transport. This includes any enclosing
square brackets and any non-default destination server port suffix. The
LMTP socket type prefix (inet: or unix:) is not included in the lookup
key.

Only the next-hop domain, or $myhostname with LMTP over UNIX-domain
sockets, is used as the nexthop name for certificate verification. The
port and any enclosing square brackets are used in the table lookup
key, but are not used for server name verification.

When the lookup key is a domain name without enclosing square brackets
or any :port suffix (typically the recipient domain), and the full
domain is not found in the table, just as with the transport(5) table,
the parent domain starting with a leading "." is matched recursively.
This allows one to specify a security policy for a recipient domain and
all its sub-domains.

The lookup result is a security level, followed by an optional list of
whitespace and/or comma separated name=value attributes that override
related main.cf settings. The TLS security levels in order of
increasing security are:

none No TLS. No additional attributes are supported at this level.

may Opportunistic TLS. Since sending in the clear is acceptable,
demanding stronger than default TLS security merely reduces
interoperability. The optional "ciphers", "exclude", and
"protocols" attributes (available for opportunistic TLS with
Postfix >= 2.6) and "connection_reuse" attribute (Postfix >=
3.4) override the "smtp_tls_ciphers",
"smtp_tls_exclude_ciphers", "smtp_tls_protocols", and
"smtp_tls_connection_reuse" configuration parameters. In the
policy table, multiple ciphers, protocols or excluded ciphers
must be separated by colons, as attribute values may not contain
whitespace or commas. When opportunistic TLS handshakes fail,
Postfix retries the connection with TLS disabled. This allows
mail delivery to sites with non-interoperable TLS
implementations.

encrypt
Mandatory TLS encryption. At this level and higher, the optional
"protocols" attribute overrides the main.cf
smtp_tls_mandatory_protocols parameter, the optional "ciphers"
attribute overrides the main.cf smtp_tls_mandatory_ciphers
parameter, the optional "exclude" attribute (Postfix >= 2.6)
overrides the main.cf smtp_tls_mandatory_exclude_ciphers
parameter, and the optional "connection_reuse" attribute
(Postfix >= 3.4) overrides the main.cf smtp_tls_connection_reuse
parameter. In the policy table, multiple ciphers, protocols or
excluded ciphers must be separated by colons, as attribute
values may not contain whitespace or commas.

dane Opportunistic DANE TLS. The TLS policy for the destination is
obtained via TLSA records in DNSSEC. If no TLSA records are
found, the effective security level used is may. If TLSA
records are found, but none are usable, the effective security
level is encrypt. When usable TLSA records are obtained for the
remote SMTP server, the server certificate must match the TLSA
records. RFC 7672 (DANE) TLS authentication and DNSSEC support
is available with Postfix 2.11 and later. The optional
"connection_reuse" attribute (Postfix >= 3.4) overrides the
main.cf smtp_tls_connection_reuse parameter. When the effective
security level used is may, the optional "ciphers", "exclude",
and "protocols" attributes (Postfix >= 2.6) override the
"smtp_tls_ciphers", "smtp_tls_exclude_ciphers", and
"smtp_tls_protocols" configuration parameters. When the
effective security level used is encrypt, the optional
"ciphers", "exclude", and "protocols" attributes (Postfix >=
2.6) override the "smtp_tls_mandatory_ciphers",
"smtp_tls_mandatory_exclude_ciphers", and
"smtp_tls_mandatory_protocols" configuration parameters.

dane-only
Mandatory DANE TLS. The TLS policy for the destination is
obtained via TLSA records in DNSSEC. If no TLSA records are
found, or none are usable, no connection is made to the server.
When usable TLSA records are obtained for the remote SMTP
server, the server certificate must match the TLSA records. RFC
7672 (DANE) TLS authentication and DNSSEC support is available
with Postfix 2.11 and later. The optional "ciphers", "exclude",
and "protocols" attributes (Postfix >= 2.6) override the
"smtp_tls_mandatory_ciphers",
"smtp_tls_mandatory_exclude_ciphers", and
"smtp_tls_mandatory_protocols" configuration parameters. The
optional "connection_reuse" attribute (Postfix >= 3.4) overrides
the main.cf smtp_tls_connection_reuse parameter.

fingerprint
Certificate fingerprint verification. Available with Postfix 2.5
and later. At this security level, there are no trusted
Certification Authorities. The certificate trust chain,
expiration date, ... are not checked. Instead, the optional
"match" attribute, or else the main.cf
smtp_tls_fingerprint_cert_match parameter, lists the certificate
fingerprints or the public key fingerprint (Postfix 2.9 and
later) of the valid server certificate. The digest algorithm
used to calculate the fingerprint is selected by the
smtp_tls_fingerprint_digest parameter. Multiple fingerprints can
be combined with a "|" delimiter in a single match attribute, or
multiple match attributes can be employed. The ":" character is
not used as a delimiter as it occurs between each pair of
fingerprint (hexadecimal) digits. The optional "ciphers",
"exclude", and "protocols" attributes (Postfix >= 2.6) override
the "smtp_tls_mandatory_ciphers",
"smtp_tls_mandatory_exclude_ciphers", and
"smtp_tls_mandatory_protocols" configuration parameters. The
optional "connection_reuse" attribute (Postfix >= 3.4) overrides
the main.cf smtp_tls_connection_reuse parameter.

verify Mandatory TLS verification. At this security level, DNS MX
lookups are trusted to be secure enough, and the name verified
in the server certificate is usually obtained indirectly via
unauthenticated DNS MX lookups. The optional "match" attribute
overrides the main.cf smtp_tls_verify_cert_match parameter. In
the policy table, multiple match patterns and strategies must be
separated by colons. In practice explicit control over matching
is more common with the "secure" policy, described below. The
optional "ciphers", "exclude", and "protocols" attributes
(Postfix >= 2.6) override the "smtp_tls_mandatory_ciphers",
"smtp_tls_mandatory_exclude_ciphers", and
"smtp_tls_mandatory_protocols" configuration parameters. The
optional "connection_reuse" attribute (Postfix >= 3.4) overrides
the main.cf smtp_tls_connection_reuse parameter.

secure Secure-channel TLS. At this security level, DNS MX lookups,
though potentially used to determine the candidate next-hop
gateway IP addresses, are not trusted to be secure enough for
TLS peername verification. Instead, the default name verified in
the server certificate is obtained directly from the next-hop,
or is explicitly specified via the optional "match" attribute
which overrides the main.cf smtp_tls_secure_cert_match
parameter. In the policy table, multiple match patterns and
strategies must be separated by colons. The match attribute is
most useful when multiple domains are supported by a common
server: the policy entries for additional domains specify
matching rules for the primary domain certificate. While
transport table overrides that route the secondary domains to
the primary nexthop also allow secure verification, they risk
delivery to the wrong destination when domains change hands or
are re-assigned to new gateways. With the "match" attribute
approach, routing is not perturbed, and mail is deferred if
verification of a new MX host fails. The optional "ciphers",
"exclude", and "protocols" attributes (Postfix >= 2.6) override
the "smtp_tls_mandatory_ciphers",
"smtp_tls_mandatory_exclude_ciphers", and
"smtp_tls_mandatory_protocols" configuration parameters. The
optional "connection_reuse" attribute (Postfix >= 3.4) overrides
the main.cf smtp_tls_connection_reuse parameter.

Example:

/usr/local/etc/postfix/main.cf:
smtp_tls_policy_maps = hash:$config_directory/tls_policy
# Postfix 2.5 and later.
#
# The default digest is sha256 with Postfix >= 3.6 and
# compatibility level >= 3.
#
smtp_tls_fingerprint_digest = sha256

/usr/local/etc/postfix/tls_policy:
example.edu none
example.mil may
example.gov encrypt protocols=TLSv1
example.com verify ciphers=high
example.net secure
.example.net secure match=.example.net:example.net
[mail.example.org]:587 secure match=nexthop
# Postfix 2.5 and later
[thumb.example.org] fingerprint
match=b6:b4:72:34:e2:59:cd:...:c2:ca:63:0d:4d:cc:2c:7d:84:de:e6:2f
match=51:e9:af:2e:1e:40:1f:...:64:0a:30:35:2d:09:16:31:5a:eb:82:76

Note: The "hostname" strategy if listed in a non-default setting of
smtp_tls_secure_cert_match or in the "match" attribute in the policy
table can render the "secure" level vulnerable to DNS forgery. Do not
use the "hostname" strategy for secure-channel configurations in
environments where DNS security is not assured.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

smtp_tls_protocols (default: see postconf -d output)
TLS protocols that the Postfix SMTP client will use with opportunistic
TLS encryption. In main.cf the values are separated by whitespace,
commas or colons. In the policy table "protocols" attribute (see
smtp_tls_policy_maps) the only valid separator is colon. An empty
value means allow all protocols.

As of Postfix 3.6, the preferred way to limit the range of acceptable
protocols is to set the lowest acceptable TLS protocol version and/or
the highest acceptable TLS protocol version. To set the lower bound
include an element of the form: ">=version" where version is either one
of the TLS protocol names listed above, or a hexadecimal number
corresponding to the desired TLS protocol version (0301 for TLS 1.0,
0302 for TLS 1.1, etc.). For the upper bound, use "<=version". There
must be no whitespace between the ">=" or "<=" symbols and the protocol
name or number.

Hexadecimal example (Postfix >= 3.6):

# Allow only TLS 1.0 through (hypothetical) TLS 1.4, once supported
# in some future version of OpenSSL (presently a warning is logged).
smtp_tls_protocols = >=TLSv1, <=0305
# Allow only TLS 1.0 and up:
smtp_tls_protocols = >=0x0301

With Postfix < 3.6 there is no support for a minimum or maximum
version, and the protocol range is configured via protocol exclusions.
To require at least TLS 1.0, set "smtp_tls_protocols = !SSLv2, !SSLv3".
Listing the protocols to include, rather than protocols to exclude, is
supported, but not recommended. The exclusion form more accurately
matches the underlying OpenSSL interface.

When using the exclusion syntax, take care to ensure that the range of
protocols advertised by an SSL/TLS client is contiguous. When a
protocol version is enabled, disabling any higher version implicitly
disables all versions above that higher version. Thus, for example:

smtp_tls_protocols = !SSLv2, !SSLv3, !TLSv1.1
also disables any protocols version higher than TLSv1.1 leaving only
"TLSv1" enabled.

Support for "TLSv1.3" was introduced in OpenSSL 1.1.1. Disabling this
protocol via "!TLSv1.3" is supported since Postfix 3.4 (or patch
releases >= 3.0.14, 3.1.10, 3.2.7 and 3.3.2).

Example:
# Preferred syntax with Postfix >= 3.6:
smtp_tls_protocols = >=TLSv1, <=TLSv1.3
# Legacy syntax:
smtp_tls_protocols = !SSLv2, !SSLv3

This feature is available in Postfix 2.6 and later.

smtp_tls_scert_verifydepth (default: 9)
The verification depth for remote SMTP server certificates. A depth of
1 is sufficient if the issuing CA is listed in a local CA file.

The default verification depth is 9 (the OpenSSL default) for
compatibility with earlier Postfix behavior. Prior to Postfix 2.5, the
default value was 5, but the limit was not actually enforced. If you
have set this to a lower non-default value, certificates with longer
trust chains may now fail to verify. Certificate chains with 1 or 2 CAs
are common, deeper chains are more rare and any number between 5 and 9
should suffice in practice. You can choose a lower number if, for
example, you trust certificates directly signed by an issuing CA but
not any CAs it delegates to.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.

smtp_tls_secure_cert_match (default: nexthop, dot-nexthop)
How the Postfix SMTP client verifies the server certificate peername
for the "secure" TLS security level. In a "secure" TLS policy table
($smtp_tls_policy_maps) entry the optional "match" attribute overrides
this main.cf setting.

This parameter specifies one or more patterns or strategies separated
by commas, whitespace or colons. In the policy table the only valid
separator is the colon character.

For a description of the pattern and strategy syntax see the
smtp_tls_verify_cert_match parameter. The "hostname" strategy should be
avoided in this context, as in the absence of a secure global DNS,
using the results of MX lookups in certificate verification is not
immune to active (man-in-the-middle) attacks on DNS.

Sample main.cf setting:

smtp_tls_secure_cert_match = nexthop

Sample policy table override:

example.net secure match=example.com:.example.com
.example.net secure match=example.com:.example.com

This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

smtp_tls_security_level (default: empty)
The default SMTP TLS security level for the Postfix SMTP client. When
a non-empty value is specified, this overrides the obsolete parameters
smtp_use_tls, smtp_enforce_tls, and smtp_tls_enforce_peername; when no
value is specified for smtp_tls_enforce_peername or the obsolete
parameters, the default SMTP TLS security level is none.

Specify one of the following security levels:

none No TLS. TLS will not be used unless enabled for specific
destinations via smtp_tls_policy_maps.

may Opportunistic TLS. Use TLS if this is supported by the remote
SMTP server, otherwise use plaintext. Since sending in the clear
is acceptable, demanding stronger than default TLS security
merely reduces interoperability. The "smtp_tls_ciphers" and
"smtp_tls_protocols" (Postfix >= 2.6) configuration parameters
provide control over the protocols and cipher grade used with
opportunistic TLS. With earlier releases the opportunistic TLS
cipher grade is always "export" and no protocols are disabled.
When TLS handshakes fail, the connection is retried with TLS
disabled. This allows mail delivery to sites with
non-interoperable TLS implementations.

encrypt
Mandatory TLS encryption. Since a minimum level of security is
intended, it is reasonable to be specific about sufficiently
secure protocol versions and ciphers. At this security level and
higher, the main.cf parameters smtp_tls_mandatory_protocols and
smtp_tls_mandatory_ciphers specify the TLS protocols and minimum
cipher grade which the administrator considers secure enough for
mandatory encrypted sessions. This security level is not an
appropriate default for systems delivering mail to the Internet.

dane Opportunistic DANE TLS. At this security level, the TLS policy
for the destination is obtained via DNSSEC. For TLSA policy to
be in effect, the destination domain's containing DNS zone must
be signed and the Postfix SMTP client's operating system must be
configured to send its DNS queries to a recursive DNS nameserver
that is able to validate the signed records. Each MX host's DNS
zone should also be signed, and should publish DANE TLSA (RFC
7672) records that specify how that MX host's TLS certificate is
to be verified. TLSA records do not preempt the normal SMTP MX
host selection algorithm, if some MX hosts support TLSA and
others do not, TLS security will vary from delivery to delivery.
It is up to the domain owner to configure their MX hosts and
their DNS sensibly. To configure the Postfix SMTP client for
DNSSEC lookups see the documentation for the
smtp_dns_support_level main.cf parameter. When DNSSEC-validated
TLSA records are not found the effective tls security level is
"may". When TLSA records are found, but are all unusable the
effective security level is "encrypt". For purposes of protocol
and cipher selection, the "dane" security level is treated like
a "mandatory" TLS security level, and weak ciphers and protocols
are disabled. Since DANE authenticates server certificates the
"aNULL" cipher-suites are transparently excluded at this level,
no need to configure this manually. RFC 7672 (DANE) TLS
authentication is available with Postfix 2.11 and later.

dane-only
Mandatory DANE TLS. This is just like "dane" above, but DANE
TLSA authentication is required. There is no fallback to "may"
or "encrypt" when TLSA records are missing or unusable. RFC
7672 (DANE) TLS authentication is available with Postfix 2.11
and later.

fingerprint
Certificate fingerprint verification. At this security level,
there are no trusted Certification Authorities. The certificate
trust chain, expiration date, etc., are not checked. Instead,
the smtp_tls_fingerprint_cert_match parameter lists the
certificate fingerprint or public key fingerprint (Postfix 2.9
and later) of the valid server certificate. The digest algorithm
used to calculate the fingerprint is selected by the
smtp_tls_fingerprint_digest parameter. Available with Postfix
2.5 and later.

verify Mandatory TLS verification. At this security level, DNS MX
lookups are trusted to be secure enough, and the name verified
in the server certificate is usually obtained indirectly via
unauthenticated DNS MX lookups. The smtp_tls_verify_cert_match
parameter controls how the server name is verified. In practice
explicit control over matching is more common at the "secure"
level, described below. This security level is not an
appropriate default for systems delivering mail to the Internet.

Examples:

# No TLS. Formerly: smtp_use_tls=no and smtp_enforce_tls=no.
smtp_tls_security_level = none

# Opportunistic TLS.
smtp_tls_security_level = may
# Do not tweak opportunistic ciphers or protocols unless it is essential
# to do so (if a security vulnerability is found in the SSL library that
# can be mitigated by disabling a particular protocol or raising the
# cipher grade).
smtp_tls_ciphers = medium
smtp_tls_protocols = >=TLSv1
# Legacy (Postfix < 3.6) syntax:
smtp_tls_protocols = !SSLv2, !SSLv3

# Mandatory (high-grade) TLS encryption.
smtp_tls_security_level = encrypt
smtp_tls_mandatory_ciphers = high

# Authenticated TLS 1.2 or better matching the nexthop domain or a
# subdomain.
smtp_tls_security_level = secure
smtp_tls_mandatory_ciphers = high
smtp_tls_mandatory_protocols = >=TLSv1.2
smtp_tls_secure_cert_match = nexthop, dot-nexthop

# Certificate fingerprint verification (Postfix >= 2.5).
# The CA-less "fingerprint" security level only scales to a limited
# number of destinations. As a global default rather than a per-site
# setting, this is practical only when mail for all recipients is sent
# to a central mail hub.
relayhost = [mailhub.example.com]
smtp_tls_security_level = fingerprint
smtp_tls_mandatory_protocols = >=TLSv1.2
smtp_tls_mandatory_ciphers = high
smtp_tls_fingerprint_cert_match =
3D:95:34:51:...:40:99:C0:C1
EC:3B:2D:B0:...:A3:9D:72:F6

This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

smtp_tls_servername (default: empty)
Optional name to send to the remote SMTP server in the TLS Server Name
Indication (SNI) extension. The SNI extension is always on when DANE
is used to authenticate the server, and in that case the SNI name sent
is the one required by RFC7672 and this parameter is ignored.

Some SMTP servers use the received SNI name to select an appropriate
certificate chain to present to the client. While this may improve
interoperability with such servers, it may reduce interoperability with
other servers that choose to abort the connection when they don't have
a certificate chain configured for the requested name. Such servers
should select a default certificate chain and continue the handshake,
but some may not. Therefore, absent DANE, no SNI name is sent by
default.

The SNI name must be either a valid DNS hostname, or else one of the
special values hostname or nexthop, which select either the remote
hostname or the nexthop domain respectively. DNS names for SNI must be
in A-label (punycode) form. Invalid DNS names log a configuration
error warning and mail delivery is deferred.

Except when using a relayhost to forward all email, the only sensible
non-empty main.cf setting for this parameter is hostname. Other
non-empty values are only practical on a per-destination basis via the
servername attribute of the Postfix TLS policy table. When in doubt,
leave this parameter empty, and configure per-destination SNI as
needed.

This feature is available in Postfix 3.4 and later.

smtp_tls_session_cache_database (default: empty)
Name of the file containing the optional Postfix SMTP client TLS
session cache. Specify a database type that supports enumeration, such
as btree or sdbm; there is no need to support concurrent access. The
file is created if it does not exist. The smtp(8) daemon does not use
this parameter directly, rather the cache is implemented indirectly in
the tlsmgr(8) daemon. This means that per-smtp-instance master.cf
overrides of this parameter are not effective. Note that each of the
cache databases supported by tlsmgr(8) daemon:
$smtpd_tls_session_cache_database, $smtp_tls_session_cache_database
(and with Postfix 2.3 and later $lmtp_tls_session_cache_database),
needs to be stored separately. It is not at this time possible to store
multiple caches in a single database.

Note: dbm databases are not suitable. TLS session objects are too
large.

As of version 2.5, Postfix no longer uses root privileges when opening
this file. The file should now be stored under the Postfix-owned
data_directory. As a migration aid, an attempt to open the file under a
non-Postfix directory is redirected to the Postfix-owned
data_directory, and a warning is logged.

Example:

smtp_tls_session_cache_database = btree:/var/lib/postfix/smtp_scache

This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.

smtp_tls_session_cache_timeout (default: 3600s)
The expiration time of Postfix SMTP client TLS session cache
information. A cache cleanup is performed periodically every
$smtp_tls_session_cache_timeout seconds. As with
$smtp_tls_session_cache_database, this parameter is implemented in the
tlsmgr(8) daemon and therefore per-smtp-instance master.cf overrides
are not possible.

As of Postfix 2.11 this setting cannot exceed 100 days. If set <= 0,
session caching is disabled. If set to a positive value less than 2
minutes, the minimum value of 2 minutes is used instead.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.

smtp_tls_trust_anchor_file (default: empty)
Zero or more PEM-format files with trust-anchor certificates and/or
public keys. If the parameter is not empty the root CAs in CAfile and
CApath are no longer trusted. Rather, the Postfix SMTP client will
only trust certificate-chains signed by one of the trust-anchors
contained in the chosen files. The specified trust-anchor certificates
and public keys are not subject to expiration, and need not be
(self-signed) root CAs. They may, if desired, be intermediate
certificates. Therefore, these certificates also may be found "in the
middle" of the trust chain presented by the remote SMTP server, and any
untrusted issuing parent certificates will be ignored. Specify a list
of pathnames separated by comma or whitespace.

Whether specified in main.cf, or on a per-destination basis, the
trust-anchor PEM file must be accessible to the Postfix SMTP client in
the chroot jail if applicable. The trust-anchor file should contain
only certificates and public keys, no private key material, and must be
readable by the non-privileged $mail_owner user. This allows
destinations to be bound to a set of specific CAs or public keys
without trusting the same CAs for all destinations.

The main.cf parameter supports single-purpose Postfix installations
that send mail to a fixed set of SMTP peers. At most sites, if
trust-anchor files are used at all, they will be specified on a
per-destination basis via the "tafile" attribute of the "verify" and
"secure" levels in smtp_tls_policy_maps.

The underlying mechanism is in support of RFC 7672 (DANE TLSA), which
defines mechanisms for an SMTP client MTA to securely determine server
TLS certificates via DNS.

If you want your trust anchors to be public keys, with OpenSSL you can
extract a single PEM public key from a PEM X.509 file containing a
single certificate, as follows:

$ openssl x509 -in cert.pem -out ta-key.pem -noout -pubkey

This feature is available in Postfix 2.11 and later.

smtp_tls_verify_cert_match (default: hostname)
How the Postfix SMTP client verifies the server certificate peername
for the "verify" TLS security level. In a "verify" TLS policy table
($smtp_tls_policy_maps) entry the optional "match" attribute overrides
this main.cf setting.

This parameter specifies one or more patterns or strategies separated
by commas, whitespace or colons. In the policy table the only valid
separator is the colon character.

Patterns specify domain names, or domain name suffixes:

example.com
Match the example.com domain, i.e. one of the names in the
server certificate must be example.com. Upper and lower case
distinctions are ignored.

.example.com
Match subdomains of the example.com domain, i.e. match a name in
the server certificate that consists of a non-zero number of
labels followed by a .example.com suffix. Case distinctions are
ignored.

Strategies specify a transformation from the next-hop domain to the
expected name in the server certificate:

nexthop
Match against the next-hop domain, which is either the recipient
domain, or the transport next-hop configured for the domain
stripped of any optional socket type prefix, enclosing square
brackets and trailing port. When MX lookups are not suppressed,
this is the original nexthop domain prior to the MX lookup, not
the result of the MX lookup. For LMTP delivery via UNIX-domain
sockets, the verified next-hop name is $myhostname. This
strategy is suitable for use with the "secure" policy. Case is
ignored.

dot-nexthop
As above, but match server certificate names that are subdomains
of the next-hop domain. Case is ignored.

hostname
Match against the hostname of the server, often obtained via an
unauthenticated DNS MX lookup. For LMTP delivery via UNIX-domain
sockets, the verified name is $myhostname. This matches the
verification strategy of the "MUST" keyword in the obsolete
smtp_tls_per_site table, and is suitable for use with the
"verify" security level. When the next-hop name is enclosed in
square brackets to suppress MX lookups, the "hostname" strategy
is the same as the "nexthop" strategy. Case is ignored.

Sample main.cf setting:

smtp_tls_verify_cert_match = hostname, nexthop, dot-nexthop

Sample policy table override:

example.com verify match=hostname:nexthop
.example.com verify match=example.com:.example.com:hostname

This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

smtp_tls_wrappermode (default: no)
Request that the Postfix SMTP client connects using the
SUBMISSIONS/SMTPS protocol instead of using the STARTTLS command.

This mode requires "smtp_tls_security_level = encrypt" or stronger.

Example: deliver all remote mail via a provider's server
"mail.example.com".

/usr/local/etc/postfix/main.cf:
# Client-side SMTPS requires "encrypt" or stronger.
smtp_tls_security_level = encrypt
smtp_tls_wrappermode = yes
# The [] suppress MX lookups.
relayhost = [mail.example.com]:465

More examples are in TLS_README, including examples for older Postfix
versions.

This feature is available in Postfix 3.0 and later.

smtp_use_tls (default: no)
Opportunistic mode: use TLS when a remote SMTP server announces
STARTTLS support, otherwise send the mail in the clear. Beware: some
SMTP servers offer STARTTLS even if it is not configured. With Postfix
< 2.3, if the TLS handshake fails, and no other server is available,
delivery is deferred and mail stays in the queue. If this is a concern
for you, use the smtp_tls_per_site feature instead.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later. With Postfix 2.3
and later use smtp_tls_security_level instead.

smtp_xforward_timeout (default: 300s)
The Postfix SMTP client time limit for sending the XFORWARD command,
and for receiving the remote SMTP server response.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.1 and later.

smtpd_authorized_verp_clients (default: $authorized_verp_clients)
What remote SMTP clients are allowed to specify the XVERP command.
This command requests that mail be delivered one recipient at a time
with a per recipient return address.

By default, no clients are allowed to specify XVERP.

This parameter was renamed with Postfix version 2.1. The default value
is backwards compatible with Postfix version 2.0.

Note: IP version 6 address information must be specified inside [] in
the smtpd_authorized_verp_clients value, and in files specified with
"/file/name". IP version 6 addresses contain the ":" character, and
would otherwise be confused with a "type:table" pattern.

smtpd_authorized_xclient_hosts (default: empty)
What remote SMTP clients are allowed to use the XCLIENT feature. This
command overrides remote SMTP client information that is used for
access control. Typical use is for SMTP-based content filters,
fetchmail-like programs, or SMTP server access rule testing. See the
XCLIENT_README document for details.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.1 and later.

By default, no clients are allowed to specify XCLIENT.

Note: IP version 6 address information must be specified inside [] in
the smtpd_authorized_xclient_hosts value, and in files specified with
"/file/name". IP version 6 addresses contain the ":" character, and
would otherwise be confused with a "type:table" pattern.

smtpd_authorized_xforward_hosts (default: empty)
What remote SMTP clients are allowed to use the XFORWARD feature. This
command forwards information that is used to improve logging after
SMTP-based content filters. See the XFORWARD_README document for
details.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.1 and later.

By default, no clients are allowed to specify XFORWARD.

Note: IP version 6 address information must be specified inside [] in
the smtpd_authorized_xforward_hosts value, and in files specified with
"/file/name". IP version 6 addresses contain the ":" character, and
would otherwise be confused with a "type:table" pattern.

smtpd_banner (default: $myhostname ESMTP $mail_name)
The text that follows the 220 status code in the SMTP greeting banner.
Some people like to see the mail version advertised. By default,
Postfix shows no version.

You MUST specify $myhostname at the start of the text. This is required
by the SMTP protocol.

Example:

smtpd_banner = $myhostname ESMTP $mail_name ($mail_version)

smtpd_client_auth_rate_limit (default: 0)
The maximal number of AUTH commands that any client is allowed to send
to this service per time unit, regardless of whether or not Postfix
actually accepts those commands. The time unit is specified with the
anvil_rate_time_unit configuration parameter.

By default, there is no limit on the number of AUTH commands that a
client may send.

To disable this feature, specify a limit of 0.

WARNING: The purpose of this feature is to limit abuse. It must not be
used to regulate legitimate mail traffic.

This feature is available in Postfix 3.1 and later.

smtpd_client_connection_count_limit (default: 50)
How many simultaneous connections any client is allowed to make to this
service. By default, the limit is set to half the default process
limit value.

To disable this feature, specify a limit of 0.

WARNING: The purpose of this feature is to limit abuse. It must not be
used to regulate legitimate mail traffic.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.

smtpd_client_connection_rate_limit (default: 0)
The maximal number of connection attempts any client is allowed to make
to this service per time unit. The time unit is specified with the
anvil_rate_time_unit configuration parameter.

By default, a client can make as many connections per time unit as
Postfix can accept.

To disable this feature, specify a limit of 0.

WARNING: The purpose of this feature is to limit abuse. It must not be
used to regulate legitimate mail traffic.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.

Example:

smtpd_client_connection_rate_limit = 1000

smtpd_client_event_limit_exceptions (default: $mynetworks)
Clients that are excluded from smtpd_client_*_count/rate_limit
restrictions. See the mynetworks parameter description for the
parameter value syntax.

By default, clients in trusted networks are excluded. Specify a list of
network blocks, hostnames or .domain names (the initial dot causes the
domain to match any name below it).

Note: IP version 6 address information must be specified inside [] in
the smtpd_client_event_limit_exceptions value, and in files specified
with "/file/name". IP version 6 addresses contain the ":" character,
and would otherwise be confused with a "type:table" pattern.

Pattern matching of domain names is controlled by the presence or
absence of "smtpd_client_event_limit_exceptions" in the
parent_domain_matches_subdomains parameter value (Postfix 3.0 and
later).

This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.

smtpd_client_ipv4_prefix_length (default: 32)
Aggregate smtpd_client_*_count and smtpd_client_*_rate statistics by
IPv4 network blocks with the specified network prefix. Aggregation uses
fewer anvil(8) resources to maintain counters. By default, aggregation
is disabled for IPv4.

This feature is available in Postfix 3.8 and later.

smtpd_client_ipv6_prefix_length (default: 84)
Aggregate smtpd_client_*_count and smtpd_client_*_rate statistics by
IPv6 network blocks with the specified network prefix. Aggregation uses
fewer the anvil(8) resources to maintain counters. By default,
aggregation is enabled for IPv6.

This feature is available in Postfix 3.8 and later.

smtpd_client_message_rate_limit (default: 0)
The maximal number of message delivery requests that any client is
allowed to make to this service per time unit, regardless of whether or
not Postfix actually accepts those messages. The time unit is
specified with the anvil_rate_time_unit configuration parameter.

By default, a client can send as many message delivery requests per
time unit as Postfix can accept.

To disable this feature, specify a limit of 0.

WARNING: The purpose of this feature is to limit abuse. It must not be
used to regulate legitimate mail traffic.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.

Example:

smtpd_client_message_rate_limit = 1000

smtpd_client_new_tls_session_rate_limit (default: 0)
The maximal number of new (i.e., uncached) TLS sessions that a remote
SMTP client is allowed to negotiate with this service per time unit.
The time unit is specified with the anvil_rate_time_unit configuration
parameter.

By default, a remote SMTP client can negotiate as many new TLS sessions
per time unit as Postfix can accept.

To disable this feature, specify a limit of 0. Otherwise, specify a
limit that is at least the per-client concurrent session limit, or else
legitimate client sessions may be rejected.

WARNING: The purpose of this feature is to limit abuse. It must not be
used to regulate legitimate mail traffic.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

Example:

smtpd_client_new_tls_session_rate_limit = 100

smtpd_client_port_logging (default: no)
Enable logging of the remote SMTP client port in addition to the
hostname and IP address. The logging format is "host[address]:port".

This feature is available in Postfix 2.5 and later.

smtpd_client_recipient_rate_limit (default: 0)
The maximal number of recipient addresses that any client is allowed to
send to this service per time unit, regardless of whether or not
Postfix actually accepts those recipients. The time unit is specified
with the anvil_rate_time_unit configuration parameter.

By default, a client can send as many recipient addresses per time unit
as Postfix can accept.

To disable this feature, specify a limit of 0.

WARNING: The purpose of this feature is to limit abuse. It must not be
used to regulate legitimate mail traffic.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.

Example:

smtpd_client_recipient_rate_limit = 1000

smtpd_client_restrictions (default: empty)
Optional restrictions that the Postfix SMTP server applies in the
context of a client connection request. See SMTPD_ACCESS_README,
section "Delayed evaluation of SMTP access restriction lists" for a
discussion of evaluation context and time.

The default is to allow all connection requests.

Specify a list of restrictions, separated by commas and/or whitespace.
Continue long lines by starting the next line with whitespace.
Restrictions are applied in the order as specified; the first
restriction that matches wins.

The following restrictions are specific to client hostname or client
network address information.

check_ccert_access type:table
By default use the remote SMTP client certificate fingerprint or
the public key fingerprint (Postfix 2.9 and later) as the lookup
key for the specified access(5) database; with Postfix version
2.2, also require that the remote SMTP client certificate is
verified successfully. The fingerprint digest algorithm is
configurable via the smtpd_tls_fingerprint_digest parameter
(hard-coded as md5 prior to Postfix version 2.5). This feature
requires "smtpd_tls_ask_ccert = yes" and is available with
Postfix version 2.2 and later.
The default algorithm is sha256 with Postfix >= 3.6 and the
compatibility_level set to 3.6 or higher. With Postfix <= 3.5,
the default algorithm is md5. The best-practice algorithm is
now sha256. Recent advances in hash function cryptanalysis have
led to md5 and sha1 being deprecated in favor of sha256.
However, as long as there are no known "second pre-image"
attacks against the older algorithms, their use in this context,
though not recommended, is still likely safe.
Alternatively, check_ccert_access accepts an explicit search
order (Postfix 3.5 and later). The default search order as
described above corresponds with:
check_ccert_access { type:table, { search_order =
cert_fingerprint, pubkey_fingerprint } }
The commas are optional.

check_client_access type:table
Search the specified access database for the client hostname,
parent domains, client IP address, or networks obtained by
stripping least significant octets. See the access(5) manual
page for details.

check_client_a_access type:table
Search the specified access(5) database for the IP addresses for
the client hostname, and execute the corresponding action.
Note: a result of "OK" is not allowed for safety reasons.
Instead, use DUNNO in order to exclude specific hosts from
denylists. This feature is available in Postfix 3.0 and later.

check_client_mx_access type:table
Search the specified access(5) database for the MX hosts for the
client hostname, and execute the corresponding action. If no MX
record is found, look up A or AAAA records, just like the
Postfix SMTP client would. Note: a result of "OK" is not allowed
for safety reasons. Instead, use DUNNO in order to exclude
specific hosts from denylists. This feature is available in
Postfix 2.7 and later.

check_client_ns_access type:table
Search the specified access(5) database for the DNS servers for
the client hostname, and execute the corresponding action.
Note: a result of "OK" is not allowed for safety reasons.
Instead, use DUNNO in order to exclude specific hosts from
denylists. This feature is available in Postfix 2.7 and later.

check_reverse_client_hostname_access type:table
Search the specified access database for the unverified reverse
client hostname, parent domains, client IP address, or networks
obtained by stripping least significant octets. See the
access(5) manual page for details. Note: a result of "OK" is
not allowed for safety reasons. Instead, use DUNNO in order to
exclude specific hosts from denylists. This feature is
available in Postfix 2.6 and later.

check_reverse_client_hostname_a_access type:table
Search the specified access(5) database for the IP addresses for
the unverified reverse client hostname, and execute the
corresponding action. Note: a result of "OK" is not allowed for
safety reasons. Instead, use DUNNO in order to exclude specific
hosts from denylists. This feature is available in Postfix 3.0
and later.

check_reverse_client_hostname_mx_access type:table
Search the specified access(5) database for the MX hosts for the
unverified reverse client hostname, and execute the
corresponding action. If no MX record is found, look up A or
AAAA records, just like the Postfix SMTP client would. Note: a
result of "OK" is not allowed for safety reasons. Instead, use
DUNNO in order to exclude specific hosts from denylists. This
feature is available in Postfix 2.7 and later.

check_reverse_client_hostname_ns_access type:table
Search the specified access(5) database for the DNS servers for
the unverified reverse client hostname, and execute the
corresponding action. Note: a result of "OK" is not allowed for
safety reasons. Instead, use DUNNO in order to exclude specific
hosts from denylists. This feature is available in Postfix 2.7
and later.

check_sasl_access type:table
Use the remote SMTP client SASL user name as the lookup key for
the specified access(5) database. The lookup key has the form
"username@domainname" when the smtpd_sasl_local_domain parameter
value is non-empty. Unlike the check_client_access feature,
check_sasl_access does not perform matches of parent domains or
IP subnet ranges. This feature is available with Postfix
version 2.11 and later.

permit_inet_interfaces
Permit the request when the client IP address matches
$inet_interfaces.

permit_mynetworks
Permit the request when the client IP address matches any
network or network address listed in $mynetworks.

permit_sasl_authenticated
Permit the request when the client is successfully authenticated
via the RFC 4954 (AUTH) protocol.

permit_tls_all_clientcerts
Permit the request when the remote SMTP client certificate is
verified successfully. This option must be used only if a
special CA issues the certificates and only this CA is listed as
a trusted CA. Otherwise, clients with a third-party certificate
would also be allowed to relay. Specify "tls_append_default_CA
= no" when the trusted CA is specified with smtpd_tls_CAfile or
smtpd_tls_CApath, to prevent Postfix from appending the
system-supplied default CAs. This feature requires
"smtpd_tls_ask_ccert = yes" and is available with Postfix
version 2.2 and later.

permit_tls_clientcerts
Permit the request when the remote SMTP client certificate
fingerprint or public key fingerprint (Postfix 2.9 and later) is
listed in $relay_clientcerts. The fingerprint digest algorithm
is configurable via the smtpd_tls_fingerprint_digest parameter
(hard-coded as md5 prior to Postfix version 2.5). This feature
requires "smtpd_tls_ask_ccert = yes" and is available with
Postfix version 2.2 and later.
The default algorithm is sha256 with Postfix >= 3.6 and the
compatibility_level set to 3.6 or higher. With Postfix <= 3.5,
the default algorithm is md5. The best-practice algorithm is
now sha256. Recent advances in hash function cryptanalysis have
led to md5 and sha1 being deprecated in favor of sha256.
However, as long as there are no known "second pre-image"
attacks against the older algorithms, their use in this context,
though not recommended, is still likely safe.

reject_rbl_client rbl_domain=d.d.d.d
Reject the request when the reversed client network address is
listed with the A record "d.d.d.d" under rbl_domain (Postfix
version 2.1 and later only). Each "d" is a number, or a pattern
inside "[]" that contains one or more ";"-separated numbers or
number..number ranges (Postfix version 2.8 and later). If no
"=d.d.d.d" is specified, reject the request when the reversed
client network address is listed with any A record under
rbl_domain.
The maps_rbl_reject_code parameter specifies the response code
for rejected requests (default: 554), the default_rbl_reply
parameter specifies the default server reply, and the
rbl_reply_maps parameter specifies tables with server replies
indexed by rbl_domain. This feature is available in Postfix 2.0
and later.

permit_dnswl_client dnswl_domain=d.d.d.d
Accept the request when the reversed client network address is
listed with the A record "d.d.d.d" under dnswl_domain. Each "d"
is a number, or a pattern inside "[]" that contains one or more
";"-separated numbers or number..number ranges. If no
"=d.d.d.d" is specified, accept the request when the reversed
client network address is listed with any A record under
dnswl_domain.
For safety, permit_dnswl_client is silently ignored when it
would override reject_unauth_destination. The result is
DEFER_IF_REJECT when allowlist lookup fails. This feature is
available in Postfix 2.8 and later.

reject_rhsbl_client rbl_domain=d.d.d.d
Reject the request when the client hostname is listed with the A
record "d.d.d.d" under rbl_domain (Postfix version 2.1 and later
only). Each "d" is a number, or a pattern inside "[]" that
contains one or more ";"-separated numbers or number..number
ranges (Postfix version 2.8 and later). If no "=d.d.d.d" is
specified, reject the request when the client hostname is listed
with any A record under rbl_domain. See the reject_rbl_client
description above for additional RBL related configuration
parameters. This feature is available in Postfix 2.0 and later;
with Postfix version 2.8 and later, reject_rhsbl_reverse_client
will usually produce better results.

permit_rhswl_client rhswl_domain=d.d.d.d
Accept the request when the client hostname is listed with the A
record "d.d.d.d" under rhswl_domain. Each "d" is a number, or a
pattern inside "[]" that contains one or more ";"-separated
numbers or number..number ranges. If no "=d.d.d.d" is specified,
accept the request when the client hostname is listed with any A
record under rhswl_domain.
Caution: client name allowlisting is fragile, since the client
name lookup can fail due to temporary outages. Client name
allowlisting should be used only to reduce false positives in
e.g. DNS-based blocklists, and not for making access rule
exceptions.
For safety, permit_rhswl_client is silently ignored when it
would override reject_unauth_destination. The result is
DEFER_IF_REJECT when allowlist lookup fails. This feature is
available in Postfix 2.8 and later.

reject_rhsbl_reverse_client rbl_domain=d.d.d.d
Reject the request when the unverified reverse client hostname
is listed with the A record "d.d.d.d" under rbl_domain. Each
"d" is a number, or a pattern inside "[]" that contains one or
more ";"-separated numbers or number..number ranges. If no
"=d.d.d.d" is specified, reject the request when the unverified
reverse client hostname is listed with any A record under
rbl_domain. See the reject_rbl_client description above for
additional RBL related configuration parameters. This feature
is available in Postfix 2.8 and later.

reject_unknown_client_hostname (with Postfix < 2.3:
reject_unknown_client)
Reject the request when 1) the client IP address->name mapping
fails, or 2) the name->address mapping fails, or 3) the
name->address mapping does not match the client IP address.
This is a stronger restriction than the
reject_unknown_reverse_client_hostname feature, which triggers
only under condition 1) above.
The unknown_client_reject_code parameter specifies the response
code for rejected requests (default: 450). The reply is always
450 in case the address->name or name->address lookup failed due
to a temporary problem.

reject_unknown_reverse_client_hostname
Reject the request when the client IP address has no
address->name mapping.
This is a weaker restriction than the
reject_unknown_client_hostname feature, which requires not only
that the address->name and name->address mappings exist, but
also that the two mappings reproduce the client IP address.
The unknown_client_reject_code parameter specifies the response
code for rejected requests (default: 450). The reply is always
450 in case the address->name lookup failed due to a temporary
problem.
This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

In addition, you can use any of the following generic restrictions.
These restrictions are applicable in any SMTP command context.

check_policy_service servername
Query the specified policy server. See the SMTPD_POLICY_README
document for details. This feature is available in Postfix 2.1
and later.

defer Defer the request. The client is told to try again later. This
restriction is useful at the end of a restriction list, to make
the default policy explicit.
The defer_code parameter specifies the SMTP server reply code
(default: 450).

defer_if_permit
Defer the request if some later restriction would result in an
explicit or implicit PERMIT action. This is useful when a
denylisting feature fails due to a temporary problem. This
feature is available in Postfix version 2.1 and later.

defer_if_reject
Defer the request if some later restriction would result in a
REJECT action. This is useful when an allowlisting feature
fails due to a temporary problem. This feature is available in
Postfix version 2.1 and later.

permit Permit the request. This restriction is useful at the end of a
restriction list, to make the default policy explicit.

reject_multi_recipient_bounce
Reject the request when the envelope sender is the null address,
and the message has multiple envelope recipients. This usage has
rare but legitimate applications: under certain conditions,
multi-recipient mail that was posted with the DSN option
NOTIFY=NEVER may be forwarded with the null sender address.
Note: this restriction can only work reliably when used in
smtpd_data_restrictions or smtpd_end_of_data_restrictions,
because the total number of recipients is not known at an
earlier stage of the SMTP conversation. Use at the RCPT stage
will only reject the second etc. recipient.
The multi_recipient_bounce_reject_code parameter specifies the
response code for rejected requests (default: 550). This
feature is available in Postfix 2.1 and later.

reject_plaintext_session
Reject the request when the connection is not encrypted. This
restriction should not be used before the client has had a
chance to negotiate encryption with the AUTH or STARTTLS
commands.
The plaintext_reject_code parameter specifies the response code
for rejected requests (default: 450). This feature is
available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

reject_unauth_pipelining
Reject the request when the client sends SMTP commands ahead of
time where it is not allowed, or when the client sends SMTP
commands ahead of time without knowing that Postfix actually
supports ESMTP command pipelining. This stops mail from bulk
mail software that improperly uses ESMTP command pipelining in
order to speed up deliveries.
With Postfix 2.6 and later, the SMTP server sets a per-session
flag whenever it detects illegal pipelining, including pipelined
HELO or EHLO commands. The reject_unauth_pipelining feature
simply tests whether the flag was set at any point in time
during the session.
With older Postfix versions, reject_unauth_pipelining checks the
current status of the input read queue, and its usage is not
recommended in contexts other than smtpd_data_restrictions.

reject Reject the request. This restriction is useful at the end of a
restriction list, to make the default policy explicit. The
reject_code configuration parameter specifies the response code
for rejected requests (default: 554).

sleep seconds
Pause for the specified number of seconds and proceed with the
next restriction in the list, if any. This may stop zombie mail
when used as:
/usr/local/etc/postfix/main.cf:
smtpd_client_restrictions =
sleep 1, reject_unauth_pipelining
smtpd_delay_reject = no
This feature is available in Postfix 2.3.

warn_if_reject
A safety net for testing. When "warn_if_reject" is placed before
a reject-type restriction, access table query, or
check_policy_service query, this logs a "reject_warning" message
instead of rejecting a request (when a reject-type restriction
fails due to a temporary error, this logs a "reject_warning"
message for any implicit "defer_if_permit" actions that would
normally prevent mail from being accepted by some later access
restriction). This feature has no effect on defer_if_reject
restrictions.

Other restrictions that are valid in this context:

o SMTP command specific restrictions that are described under the
smtpd_helo_restrictions, smtpd_sender_restrictions or
smtpd_recipient_restrictions parameters. When helo, sender or
recipient restrictions are listed under
smtpd_client_restrictions, they have effect only with
"smtpd_delay_reject = yes", so that $smtpd_client_restrictions
is evaluated at the time of the RCPT TO command.

Example:

smtpd_client_restrictions = permit_mynetworks, reject_unknown_client_hostname

smtpd_command_filter (default: empty)
A mechanism to transform commands from remote SMTP clients. This is a
last-resort tool to work around client commands that break
interoperability with the Postfix SMTP server. Other uses involve
fault injection to test Postfix's handling of invalid commands.

Specify the name of a "type:table" lookup table. The search string is
the SMTP command as received from the remote SMTP client, except that
initial whitespace and the trailing <CR><LF> are removed. The result
value is executed by the Postfix SMTP server.

There is no need to use smtpd_command_filter for the following cases:

o Use "resolve_numeric_domain = yes" to accept "user@ipaddress".

o Postfix already accepts the correct form "user@[ipaddress]". Use
virtual_alias_maps or canonical_maps to translate these into
domain names if necessary.

o Use "strict_rfc821_envelopes = no" to accept "RCPT TO:<User Name
<user@example.com>>". Postfix will ignore the "User Name" part
and deliver to the <user@example.com> address.

Examples of problems that can be solved with the smtpd_command_filter
feature:

/usr/local/etc/postfix/main.cf:
smtpd_command_filter = pcre:$config_directory/command_filter

/usr/local/etc/postfix/command_filter:
# Work around clients that send malformed HELO commands.
/^HELO\s*$/ HELO domain.invalid

# Work around clients that send empty lines.
/^\s*$/ NOOP

# Work around clients that send RCPT TO:<'user@domain'>.
# WARNING: do not lose the parameters that follow the address.
/^(RCPT\s+TO:\s*<)'([^[:space:]]+)'(>.*)/ $1$2$3

# Append XVERP to MAIL FROM commands to request VERP-style delivery.
# See VERP_README for more information on how to use Postfix VERP.
/^(MAIL\s+FROM:\s*<listname@example\.com>.*)/ $1 XVERP

# Bounce-never mail sink. Use notify_classes=bounce,resource,software
# to send bounced mail to the postmaster (with message body removed).
/^(RCPT\s+TO:\s*<.*>.*)\s+NOTIFY=\S+(.*)/ $1 NOTIFY=NEVER$2
/^(RCPT\s+TO:.*)/ $1 NOTIFY=NEVER

This feature is available in Postfix 2.7.

smtpd_data_restrictions (default: empty)
Optional access restrictions that the Postfix SMTP server applies in
the context of the SMTP DATA command. See SMTPD_ACCESS_README, section
"Delayed evaluation of SMTP access restriction lists" for a discussion
of evaluation context and time.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.0 and later.

The following restrictions are valid in this context:

o Generic restrictions that can be used in any SMTP command
context, described under smtpd_client_restrictions.

o SMTP command specific restrictions described under
smtpd_client_restrictions, smtpd_helo_restrictions,
smtpd_sender_restrictions or smtpd_recipient_restrictions.

o However, no recipient information is available in the case of
multi-recipient mail. Acting on only one recipient would be
misleading, because any decision will affect all recipients
equally. Acting on all recipients would require a possibly very
large amount of memory, and would also be misleading for the
reasons mentioned before.

Examples:

smtpd_data_restrictions = reject_unauth_pipelining
smtpd_data_restrictions = reject_multi_recipient_bounce

smtpd_delay_open_until_valid_rcpt (default: yes)
Postpone the start of an SMTP mail transaction until a valid RCPT TO
command is received. Specify "no" to create a mail transaction as soon
as the Postfix SMTP server receives a valid MAIL FROM command.

With sites that reject lots of mail, the default setting reduces the
use of disk, CPU and memory resources. The downside is that rejected
recipients are logged with NOQUEUE instead of a mail transaction ID.
This complicates the logfile analysis of multi-recipient mail.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

smtpd_delay_reject (default: yes)
Wait until the RCPT TO command before evaluating
$smtpd_client_restrictions, $smtpd_helo_restrictions and
$smtpd_sender_restrictions, or wait until the ETRN command before
evaluating $smtpd_client_restrictions and $smtpd_helo_restrictions.

This feature is turned on by default because some clients apparently
mis-behave when the Postfix SMTP server rejects commands before RCPT
TO.

The default setting has one major benefit: it allows Postfix to log
recipient address information when rejecting a client name/address or
sender address, so that it is possible to find out whose mail is being
rejected.

smtpd_discard_ehlo_keyword_address_maps (default: empty)
Lookup tables, indexed by the remote SMTP client address, with case
insensitive lists of EHLO keywords (pipelining, starttls, auth, etc.)
that the Postfix SMTP server will not send in the EHLO response to a
remote SMTP client. See smtpd_discard_ehlo_keywords for details. The
tables are not searched by hostname for robustness reasons.

Specify zero or more "type:name" lookup tables, separated by whitespace
or comma. Tables will be searched in the specified order until a match
is found.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.

smtpd_discard_ehlo_keywords (default: empty)
A case insensitive list of EHLO keywords (pipelining, starttls, auth,
etc.) that the Postfix SMTP server will not send in the EHLO response
to a remote SMTP client.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.

Notes:

o Specify the silent-discard pseudo keyword to prevent this action
from being logged.

o Use the smtpd_discard_ehlo_keyword_address_maps feature to
discard EHLO keywords selectively.

smtpd_dns_reply_filter (default: empty)
Optional filter for Postfix SMTP server DNS lookup results. See
smtp_dns_reply_filter for details including an example.

This feature is available in Postfix 3.0 and later.

smtpd_end_of_data_restrictions (default: empty)
Optional access restrictions that the Postfix SMTP server applies in
the context of the SMTP END-OF-DATA command. See SMTPD_ACCESS_README,
section "Delayed evaluation of SMTP access restriction lists" for a
discussion of evaluation context and time.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.

See smtpd_data_restrictions for details and limitations.

smtpd_enforce_tls (default: no)
Mandatory TLS: announce STARTTLS support to remote SMTP clients, and
require that clients use TLS encryption. According to RFC 2487 this
MUST NOT be applied in case of a publicly-referenced SMTP server. This
option is therefore off by default.

Note 1: "smtpd_enforce_tls = yes" implies "smtpd_tls_auth_only = yes".

Note 2: when invoked via "sendmail -bs", Postfix will never offer
STARTTLS due to insufficient privileges to access the server private
key. This is intended behavior.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later. With Postfix 2.3
and later use smtpd_tls_security_level instead.

smtpd_error_sleep_time (default: 1s)
With Postfix version 2.1 and later: the SMTP server response delay
after a client has made more than $smtpd_soft_error_limit errors, and
fewer than $smtpd_hard_error_limit errors, without delivering mail.

With Postfix version 2.0 and earlier: the SMTP server delay before
sending a reject (4xx or 5xx) response, when the client has made fewer
than $smtpd_soft_error_limit errors without delivering mail. When the
client has made $smtpd_soft_error_limit or more errors, delay all
responses with the larger of (number of errors) seconds or
$smtpd_error_sleep_time.

smtpd_etrn_restrictions (default: empty)
Optional restrictions that the Postfix SMTP server applies in the
context of a client ETRN command. See SMTPD_ACCESS_README, section
"Delayed evaluation of SMTP access restriction lists" for a discussion
of evaluation context and time.

The Postfix ETRN implementation accepts only destinations that are
eligible for the Postfix "fast flush" service. See the ETRN_README file
for details.

The following restrictions are specific to the domain name information
received with the ETRN command.

check_etrn_access type:table
Search the specified access database for the ETRN domain name or
its parent domains. See the access(5) manual page for details.

Other restrictions that are valid in this context:

o Generic restrictions that can be used in any SMTP command
context, described under smtpd_client_restrictions.

o SMTP command specific restrictions described under
smtpd_client_restrictions and smtpd_helo_restrictions.

Example:

smtpd_etrn_restrictions = permit_mynetworks, reject

smtpd_expansion_filter (default: see postconf -d output)
What characters are allowed in $name expansions of RBL reply templates.
Characters not in the allowed set are replaced by "_". Use C like
escapes to specify special characters such as whitespace.

The smtpd_expansion_filter value is not subject to Postfix
configuration parameter $name expansion.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.0 and later.

smtpd_forbid_unauth_pipelining (default: Postfix >= 3.9: yes)
Disconnect remote SMTP clients that violate RFC 2920 (or 5321) command
pipelining constraints. The server replies with "554 5.5.0 Error: SMTP
protocol synchronization" and logs the unexpected remote SMTP client
input. Specify "smtpd_forbid_unauth_pipelining = yes" to enable. This
feature is enabled by default with Postfix >= 3.9.

This feature is available in Postfix >= 3.9, 3.8.1, 3.7.6, 3.6.10, and
3.5.20.

smtpd_forbidden_commands (default: CONNECT GET POST regexp:{{/^[^A-Z]/
Bogus}})
List of commands that cause the Postfix SMTP server to immediately
terminate the session with a 221 code. This can be used to disconnect
clients that obviously attempt to abuse the system. In addition to the
commands listed in this parameter, commands that follow the "Label:"
format of message headers will also cause a disconnect. With Postfix
versions 3.6 and earlier, the default value is "CONNECT GET POST".

This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.

Support for inline regular expressions was added in Postfix version
3.7. See regexp_table(5) for a description of the syntax and features.

smtpd_hard_error_limit (default: normal: 20, overload: 1)
The maximal number of errors a remote SMTP client is allowed to make
without delivering mail. The Postfix SMTP server disconnects when the
limit is reached. Normally the default limit is 20, but it changes
under overload to just 1. With Postfix 2.5 and earlier, the SMTP server
always allows up to 20 errors by default. Valid values are greater
than zero.

smtpd_helo_required (default: no)
Require that a remote SMTP client introduces itself with the HELO or
EHLO command before sending the MAIL command or other commands that
require EHLO negotiation.

Example:

smtpd_helo_required = yes

smtpd_helo_restrictions (default: empty)
Optional restrictions that the Postfix SMTP server applies in the
context of a client HELO command. See SMTPD_ACCESS_README, section
"Delayed evaluation of SMTP access restriction lists" for a discussion
of evaluation context and time.

The default is to permit everything.

Note: specify "smtpd_helo_required = yes" to fully enforce this
restriction (without "smtpd_helo_required = yes", a client can simply
skip smtpd_helo_restrictions by not sending HELO or EHLO).

The following restrictions are specific to the hostname information
received with the HELO or EHLO command.

check_helo_access type:table
Search the specified access(5) database for the HELO or EHLO
hostname or parent domains, and execute the corresponding
action. Note: specify "smtpd_helo_required = yes" to fully
enforce this restriction (without "smtpd_helo_required = yes", a
client can simply skip check_helo_access by not sending HELO or
EHLO).

check_helo_a_access type:table
Search the specified access(5) database for the IP addresses for
the HELO or EHLO hostname, and execute the corresponding action.
Note 1: a result of "OK" is not allowed for safety reasons.
Instead, use DUNNO in order to exclude specific hosts from
denylists. Note 2: specify "smtpd_helo_required = yes" to fully
enforce this restriction (without "smtpd_helo_required = yes", a
client can simply skip check_helo_a_access by not sending HELO
or EHLO). This feature is available in Postfix 3.0 and later.

check_helo_mx_access type:table
Search the specified access(5) database for the MX hosts for the
HELO or EHLO hostname, and execute the corresponding action. If
no MX record is found, look up A or AAAA records, just like the
Postfix SMTP client would. Note 1: a result of "OK" is not
allowed for safety reasons. Instead, use DUNNO in order to
exclude specific hosts from denylists. Note 2: specify
"smtpd_helo_required = yes" to fully enforce this restriction
(without "smtpd_helo_required = yes", a client can simply skip
check_helo_mx_access by not sending HELO or EHLO). This feature
is available in Postfix 2.1 and later.

check_helo_ns_access type:table
Search the specified access(5) database for the DNS servers for
the HELO or EHLO hostname, and execute the corresponding action.
Note 1: a result of "OK" is not allowed for safety reasons.
Instead, use DUNNO in order to exclude specific hosts from
denylists. Note 2: specify "smtpd_helo_required = yes" to fully
enforce this restriction (without "smtpd_helo_required = yes", a
client can simply skip check_helo_ns_access by not sending HELO
or EHLO). This feature is available in Postfix 2.1 and later.

reject_invalid_helo_hostname (with Postfix < 2.3:
reject_invalid_hostname)
Reject the request when the HELO or EHLO hostname is malformed.
Note: specify "smtpd_helo_required = yes" to fully enforce this
restriction (without "smtpd_helo_required = yes", a client can
simply skip reject_invalid_helo_hostname by not sending HELO or
EHLO).
The invalid_hostname_reject_code specifies the response code for
rejected requests (default: 501).

reject_non_fqdn_helo_hostname (with Postfix < 2.3:
reject_non_fqdn_hostname)
Reject the request when the HELO or EHLO hostname is not in
fully-qualified domain or address literal form, as required by
the RFC. Note: specify "smtpd_helo_required = yes" to fully
enforce this restriction (without "smtpd_helo_required = yes", a
client can simply skip reject_non_fqdn_helo_hostname by not
sending HELO or EHLO).
The non_fqdn_reject_code parameter specifies the response code
for rejected requests (default: 504).

reject_rhsbl_helo rbl_domain=d.d.d.d
Reject the request when the HELO or EHLO hostname is listed with
the A record "d.d.d.d" under rbl_domain (Postfix version 2.1 and
later only). Each "d" is a number, or a pattern inside "[]"
that contains one or more ";"-separated numbers or
number..number ranges (Postfix version 2.8 and later). If no
"=d.d.d.d" is specified, reject the request when the HELO or
EHLO hostname is listed with any A record under rbl_domain. See
the reject_rbl_client description for additional RBL related
configuration parameters. Note: specify "smtpd_helo_required =
yes" to fully enforce this restriction (without
"smtpd_helo_required = yes", a client can simply skip
reject_rhsbl_helo by not sending HELO or EHLO). This feature is
available in Postfix 2.0 and later.

reject_unknown_helo_hostname (with Postfix < 2.3:
reject_unknown_hostname)
Reject the request when the HELO or EHLO hostname has no DNS A
or MX record.
The reply is specified with the unknown_hostname_reject_code
parameter (default: 450) or
unknown_helo_hostname_tempfail_action (default:
defer_if_permit). See the respective parameter descriptions for
details.
Note: specify "smtpd_helo_required = yes" to fully enforce this
restriction (without "smtpd_helo_required = yes", a client can
simply skip reject_unknown_helo_hostname by not sending HELO or
EHLO).

Other restrictions that are valid in this context:

o Generic restrictions that can be used in any SMTP command
context, described under smtpd_client_restrictions.

o Client hostname or network address specific restrictions
described under smtpd_client_restrictions.

o SMTP command specific restrictions described under
smtpd_sender_restrictions or smtpd_recipient_restrictions. When
sender or recipient restrictions are listed under
smtpd_helo_restrictions, they have effect only with
"smtpd_delay_reject = yes", so that $smtpd_helo_restrictions is
evaluated at the time of the RCPT TO command.

Examples:

smtpd_helo_restrictions = permit_mynetworks, reject_invalid_helo_hostname
smtpd_helo_restrictions = permit_mynetworks, reject_unknown_helo_hostname

smtpd_history_flush_threshold (default: 100)
The maximal number of lines in the Postfix SMTP server command history
before it is flushed upon receipt of EHLO, RSET, or end of DATA.

smtpd_junk_command_limit (default: normal: 100, overload: 1)
The number of junk commands (NOOP, VRFY, ETRN or RSET) that a remote
SMTP client can send before the Postfix SMTP server starts to increment
the error counter with each junk command. The junk command count is
reset after mail is delivered. See also the smtpd_error_sleep_time and
smtpd_soft_error_limit configuration parameters. Normally the default
limit is 100, but it changes under overload to just 1. With Postfix 2.5
and earlier, the SMTP server always allows up to 100 junk commands by
default.

smtpd_log_access_permit_actions (default: empty)
Enable logging of the named "permit" actions in SMTP server access
lists (by default, the SMTP server logs "reject" actions but not
"permit" actions). This feature does not affect conditional actions
such as "defer_if_permit".

Specify a list of "permit" action names, "/file/name" or "type:table"
patterns, separated by commas and/or whitespace. The list is matched
left to right, and the search stops on the first match. A "/file/name"
pattern is replaced by its contents; a "type:table" lookup table is
matched when a name matches a lookup key (the lookup result is
ignored). Continue long lines by starting the next line with
whitespace. Specify "!pattern" to exclude a name from the list.

Examples:

/usr/local/etc/postfix/main.cf:
# Log all "permit" actions.
smtpd_log_access_permit_actions = static:all

/usr/local/etc/postfix/main.cf:
# Log "permit_dnswl_client" only.
smtpd_log_access_permit_actions = permit_dnswl_client

This feature is available in Postfix 2.10 and later.

smtpd_milter_maps (default: empty)
Lookup tables with Milter settings per remote SMTP client IP address.
The lookup result overrides the smtpd_milters setting, and has the same
syntax.

Note: lookup tables cannot return empty responses. Specify a lookup
result of DISABLE (case does not matter) to indicate that Milter
support should be disabled.

Example to disable Milters for local clients:

/usr/local/etc/postfix/main.cf:
smtpd_milter_maps = cidr:$config_directory/smtpd_milter_map
smtpd_milters = inet:host:port, { inet:host:port, ... }, ...

/usr/local/etc/postfix/smtpd_milter_map:
# Disable Milters for local clients.
127.0.0.0/8 DISABLE
192.168.0.0/16 DISABLE
::/64 DISABLE
2001:db8::/32 DISABLE

This feature is available in Postfix 3.2 and later.

smtpd_milters (default: empty)
A list of Milter (mail filter) applications for new mail that arrives
via the Postfix smtpd(8) server. Specify space or comma as separator.
See the MILTER_README document for details.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

smtpd_min_data_rate (default: 500)
The minimum plaintext data transfer rate in bytes/second for DATA and
BDAT requests, when deadlines are enabled with
smtpd_per_request_deadline. After a read operation transfers N
plaintext message bytes (possibly after TLS decryption), and after the
DATA or BDAT request deadline is decremented by the elapsed time of
that read operation, the DATA or BDAT request deadline is incremented
by N/smtpd_min_data_rate seconds. However, the deadline will never be
incremented beyond the time limit specified with smtpd_timeout.

This feature is available in Postfix 3.7 and later.

smtpd_noop_commands (default: empty)
List of commands that the Postfix SMTP server replies to with "250 Ok",
without doing any syntax checks and without changing state. This list
overrides any commands built into the Postfix SMTP server.

smtpd_null_access_lookup_key (default: <>)
The lookup key to be used in SMTP access(5) tables instead of the null
sender address.

smtpd_peername_lookup (default: yes)
Attempt to look up the remote SMTP client hostname, and verify that the
name matches the client IP address. A client name is set to "unknown"
when it cannot be looked up or verified, or when name lookup is
disabled. Turning off name lookup reduces delays due to DNS lookup and
increases the maximal inbound delivery rate.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

smtpd_per_record_deadline (default: normal: no, overload: yes)
Change the behavior of the smtpd_timeout and smtpd_starttls_timeout
time limits, from a time limit per read or write system call, to a time
limit to send or receive a complete record (an SMTP command line, SMTP
response line, SMTP message content line, or TLS protocol message).
This limits the impact from hostile peers that trickle data one byte at
a time.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.9-3.6. With older Postfix
releases, the behavior is as if this parameter is set to "no". Postfix
3.7 and later use smtpd_per_request_deadline.

smtpd_per_request_deadline (default: normal: no, overload: yes)
Change the behavior of the smtpd_timeout and smtpd_starttls_timeout
time limits, from a time limit per plaintext or TLS read or write call,
to a combined time limit for receiving a complete SMTP request and for
sending a complete SMTP response. The deadline limits only the time
spent waiting for plaintext or TLS read or write calls, not time spent
elsewhere. The per-request deadline limits the impact from hostile
peers that trickle data one byte at a time.

See smtpd_min_data_rate for how the per-request deadline is managed
during the DATA and BDAT phase.

This feature is available in Postfix 3.7 and later. A weaker feature,
called smtpd_per_record_deadline, is available with Postfix 2.9-3.6.
With older Postfix releases, the behavior is as if this parameter is
set to "no".

This feature is available in Postfix 3.7 and later.

smtpd_policy_service_default_action (default: 451 4.3.5 Server configuration
problem)
The default action when an SMTPD policy service request fails. Specify
"DUNNO" to behave as if the failed SMTPD policy service request was
not sent, and to continue processing other access restrictions, if any.

Limitations:

o This parameter may specify any value that would be a valid SMTPD
policy server response (or access(5) map lookup result). An
access(5) map or policy server in this parameter value may need
to be declared in advance with a restriction_class setting.

o If the specified action invokes another check_policy_service
request, that request will have the built-in default action.

This feature is available in Postfix 3.0 and later.

smtpd_policy_service_max_idle (default: 300s)
The time after which an idle SMTPD policy service connection is closed.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.1 and later.

smtpd_policy_service_max_ttl (default: 1000s)
The time after which an active SMTPD policy service connection is
closed.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.1 and later.

smtpd_policy_service_policy_context (default: empty)
Optional information that the Postfix SMTP server specifies in the
"policy_context" attribute of a policy service request (originally, to
share the same service endpoint among multiple check_policy_service
clients).

This feature is available in Postfix 3.1 and later.

smtpd_policy_service_request_limit (default: 0)
The maximal number of requests per SMTPD policy service connection, or
zero (no limit). Once a connection reaches this limit, the connection
is closed and the next request will be sent over a new connection. This
is a workaround to avoid error-recovery delays with policy servers that
cannot maintain a persistent connection.

This feature is available in Postfix 3.0 and later.

smtpd_policy_service_retry_delay (default: 1s)
The delay between attempts to resend a failed SMTPD policy service
request. Specify a value greater than zero.

This feature is available in Postfix 3.0 and later.

smtpd_policy_service_timeout (default: 100s)
The time limit for connecting to, writing to, or receiving from a
delegated SMTPD policy server.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.1 and later.

smtpd_policy_service_try_limit (default: 2)
The maximal number of attempts to send an SMTPD policy service request
before giving up. Specify a value greater than zero.

This feature is available in Postfix 3.0 and later.

smtpd_proxy_ehlo (default: $myhostname)
How the Postfix SMTP server announces itself to the proxy filter. By
default, the Postfix hostname is used.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.1 and later.

smtpd_proxy_filter (default: empty)
The hostname and TCP port of the mail filtering proxy server. The
proxy receives all mail from the Postfix SMTP server, and is supposed
to give the result to another Postfix SMTP server process.

Specify "host:port" or "inet:host:port" for a TCP endpoint, or
"unix:pathname" for a UNIX-domain endpoint. The host can be specified
as an IP address or as a symbolic name; no MX lookups are done. When
no "host" or "host:" is specified, the local machine is assumed.
Pathname interpretation is relative to the Postfix queue directory.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.1 and later.

The "inet:" and "unix:" prefixes are available in Postfix 2.3 and
later.

smtpd_proxy_options (default: empty)
List of options that control how the Postfix SMTP server communicates
with a before-queue content filter. Specify zero or more of the
following, separated by comma or whitespace.

speed_adjust
Do not connect to a before-queue content filter until an entire
message has been received. This reduces the number of
simultaneous before-queue content filter processes.

NOTE 1: A filter must not selectively reject recipients of a
multi-recipient message. Rejecting all recipients is OK, as is
accepting all recipients.

NOTE 2: This feature increases the minimum amount of free queue space
by $message_size_limit. The extra space is needed to save the message
to a temporary file.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.7 and later.

smtpd_proxy_timeout (default: 100s)
The time limit for connecting to a proxy filter and for sending or
receiving information. When a connection fails the client gets a
generic error message while more detailed information is logged to the
maillog file.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.1 and later.

smtpd_recipient_limit (default: 1000)
The maximal number of recipients that the Postfix SMTP server accepts
per message delivery request.

smtpd_recipient_overshoot_limit (default: 1000)
The number of recipients that a remote SMTP client can send in excess
of the limit specified with $smtpd_recipient_limit, before the Postfix
SMTP server increments the per-session error count for each excess
recipient.

smtpd_recipient_restrictions (default: see postconf -d output)
Optional restrictions that the Postfix SMTP server applies in the
context of a client RCPT TO command, after smtpd_relay_restrictions.
See SMTPD_ACCESS_README, section "Delayed evaluation of SMTP access
restriction lists" for a discussion of evaluation context and time.

With Postfix versions before 2.10, the rules for relay permission and
spam blocking were combined under smtpd_recipient_restrictions,
resulting in error-prone configuration. As of Postfix 2.10, relay
permission rules are preferably implemented with
smtpd_relay_restrictions, so that a permissive spam blocking policy
under smtpd_recipient_restrictions will no longer result in a
permissive mail relay policy.

For backwards compatibility, sites that migrate from Postfix versions
before 2.10 can set smtpd_relay_restrictions to the empty value, and
use smtpd_recipient_restrictions exactly as before.

IMPORTANT: Either the smtpd_relay_restrictions or the
smtpd_recipient_restrictions parameter must specify at least one of the
following restrictions. Otherwise Postfix will refuse to receive mail:

reject, reject_unauth_destination

defer, defer_if_permit, defer_unauth_destination

The following restrictions are specific to the recipient address that
is received with the RCPT TO command.

check_recipient_access type:table
Search the specified access(5) database for the resolved RCPT TO
address, domain, parent domains, or localpart@, and execute the
corresponding action.

check_recipient_a_access type:table
Search the specified access(5) database for the IP addresses for
the RCPT TO domain, and execute the corresponding action. Note:
a result of "OK" is not allowed for safety reasons. Instead, use
DUNNO in order to exclude specific hosts from denylists. This
feature is available in Postfix 3.0 and later.

check_recipient_mx_access type:table
Search the specified access(5) database for the MX hosts for the
RCPT TO domain, and execute the corresponding action. If no MX
record is found, look up A or AAAA records, just like the
Postfix SMTP client would. Note: a result of "OK" is not allowed
for safety reasons. Instead, use DUNNO in order to exclude
specific hosts from denylists. This feature is available in
Postfix 2.1 and later.

check_recipient_ns_access type:table
Search the specified access(5) database for the DNS servers for
the RCPT TO domain, and execute the corresponding action. Note:
a result of "OK" is not allowed for safety reasons. Instead, use
DUNNO in order to exclude specific hosts from denylists. This
feature is available in Postfix 2.1 and later.

permit_auth_destination
Permit the request when one of the following is true:

o Postfix is a mail forwarder: the resolved RCPT TO domain matches
$relay_domains or a subdomain thereof, and the address contains
no sender-specified routing (user@elsewhere@domain),

o Postfix is the final destination: the resolved RCPT TO domain
matches $mydestination, $inet_interfaces, $proxy_interfaces,
$virtual_alias_domains, or $virtual_mailbox_domains, and the
address contains no sender-specified routing
(user@elsewhere@domain).

permit_mx_backup
Permit the request when the local mail system is a backup MX for
the RCPT TO domain, or when the domain is an authorized
destination (see permit_auth_destination for definition).

o Safety: permit_mx_backup does not accept addresses that have
sender-specified routing information (example:
user@elsewhere@domain).

o Safety: permit_mx_backup can be vulnerable to mis-use when
access is not restricted with permit_mx_backup_networks.

o Safety: as of Postfix version 2.3, permit_mx_backup no longer
accepts the address when the local mail system is a primary MX
for the recipient domain. Exception: permit_mx_backup accepts
the address when it specifies an authorized destination (see
permit_auth_destination for definition).

o Limitation: mail may be rejected in case of a temporary DNS
lookup problem with Postfix prior to version 2.0.

reject_non_fqdn_recipient
Reject the request when the RCPT TO address specifies a domain
that is not in fully-qualified domain form, as required by the
RFC.
The non_fqdn_reject_code parameter specifies the response code
for rejected requests (default: 504).

reject_rhsbl_recipient rbl_domain=d.d.d.d
Reject the request when the RCPT TO domain is listed with the A
record "d.d.d.d" under rbl_domain (Postfix version 2.1 and later
only). Each "d" is a number, or a pattern inside "[]" that
contains one or more ";"-separated numbers or number..number
ranges (Postfix version 2.8 and later). If no "=d.d.d.d" is
specified, reject the request when the RCPT TO domain is listed
with any A record under rbl_domain.
The maps_rbl_reject_code parameter specifies the response code
for rejected requests (default: 554); the default_rbl_reply
parameter specifies the default server reply; and the
rbl_reply_maps parameter specifies tables with server replies
indexed by rbl_domain. This feature is available in Postfix
version 2.0 and later.

reject_unauth_destination
Reject the request unless one of the following is true:

o Postfix is a mail forwarder: the resolved RCPT TO domain matches
$relay_domains or a subdomain thereof, and contains no
sender-specified routing (user@elsewhere@domain),

o Postfix is the final destination: the resolved RCPT TO domain
matches $mydestination, $inet_interfaces, $proxy_interfaces,
$virtual_alias_domains, or $virtual_mailbox_domains, and
contains no sender-specified routing (user@elsewhere@domain).
The relay_domains_reject_code parameter specifies the response
code for rejected requests (default: 554).

defer_unauth_destination
Reject the same requests as reject_unauth_destination, with a
non-permanent error code. This feature is available in Postfix
2.10 and later.

reject_unknown_recipient_domain
Reject the request when Postfix is not final destination for the
recipient domain, and the RCPT TO domain has 1) no DNS MX and no
DNS A record or 2) a malformed MX record such as a record with a
zero-length MX hostname (Postfix version 2.3 and later).
The reply is specified with the unknown_address_reject_code
parameter (default: 450), unknown_address_tempfail_action
(default: defer_if_permit), or 556 (nullmx, Postfix 3.0 and
later). See the respective parameter descriptions for details.

reject_unlisted_recipient (with Postfix version 2.0:
check_recipient_maps)
Reject the request when the RCPT TO address is not listed in the
list of valid recipients for its domain class. See the
smtpd_reject_unlisted_recipient parameter description for
details. This feature is available in Postfix 2.1 and later.

reject_unverified_recipient
Reject the request when mail to the RCPT TO address is known to
bounce, or when the recipient address destination is not
reachable. Address verification information is managed by the
verify(8) server; see the ADDRESS_VERIFICATION_README file for
details.
The unverified_recipient_reject_code parameter specifies the
numerical response code when an address is known to bounce
(default: 450, change it to 550 when you are confident that it
is safe to do so).
The unverified_recipient_defer_code parameter specifies the
numerical response code when an address probe failed due to a
temporary problem (default: 450).
The unverified_recipient_tempfail_action parameter specifies the
action after address probe failure due to a temporary problem
(default: defer_if_permit).
This feature breaks for aliased addresses with
"enable_original_recipient = no" (Postfix <= 3.2).
This feature is available in Postfix 2.1 and later.

Other restrictions that are valid in this context:

o Generic restrictions that can be used in any SMTP command
context, described under smtpd_client_restrictions.

o SMTP command specific restrictions described under
smtpd_client_restrictions, smtpd_helo_restrictions and
smtpd_sender_restrictions.

Example:

# The Postfix before 2.10 default mail relay policy. Later Postfix
# versions implement this preferably with smtpd_relay_restrictions.
smtpd_recipient_restrictions = permit_mynetworks, reject_unauth_destination

smtpd_reject_footer (default: empty)
Optional information that is appended after each Postfix SMTP server
4XX or 5XX response.

The following example uses "\c" at the start of the template (supported
in Postfix 2.10 and later) to suppress the line break between the reply
text and the footer text. With earlier Postfix versions, the footer
text always begins on a new line, and the "\c" is output literally.

/usr/local/etc/postfix/main.cf:
smtpd_reject_footer = \c. For assistance, call 800-555-0101.
Please provide the following information in your problem report:
time ($localtime), client ($client_address) and server
($server_name).

Server response:

550-5.5.1 <user@example> Recipient address rejected: User
unknown. For assistance, call 800-555-0101. Please provide the
following information in your problem report: time (Jan 4 15:42:00),
client (192.168.1.248) and server (mail1.example.com).

Note: the above text is meant to make it easier to find the Postfix
logfile records for a failed SMTP session. The text itself is not
logged to the Postfix SMTP server's maillog file.

Be sure to keep the text as short as possible. Long text may be
truncated before it is logged to the remote SMTP client's maillog file,
or before it is returned to the sender in a delivery status
notification.

The template text is not subject to Postfix configuration parameter
$name expansion. Instead, this feature supports a limited number of
$name attributes in the footer text. These attributes are replaced with
their current value for the SMTP session.

Note: specify $$name in footer text that is looked up from regexp: or
pcre:-based smtpd_reject_footer_maps, otherwise the Postfix server will
not use the footer text and will log a warning instead.

client_address
The Client IP address that is logged in the maillog file.

client_port
The client TCP port that is logged in the maillog file.

localtime
The server local time (Mmm dd hh:mm:ss) that is logged in the
maillog file.

server_name
The server's myhostname value. This attribute is made available
for sites with multiple MTAs (perhaps behind a load-balancer),
where the server name can help the server support team to
quickly find the right log files.

Notes:

o NOT SUPPORTED are other attributes such as sender, recipient, or
main.cf parameters.

o For safety reasons, text that does not match
$smtpd_expansion_filter is censored.

This feature supports the two-character sequence \n as a request for a
line break in the footer text. Postfix automatically inserts after each
line break the three-digit SMTP reply code (and optional enhanced
status code) from the original Postfix reject message.

To work around mail software that mis-handles multi-line replies,
specify the two-character sequence \c at the start of the template.
This suppresses the line break between the reply text and the footer
text (Postfix 2.10 and later).

This feature is available in Postfix 2.8 and later.

smtpd_reject_footer_maps (default: empty)
Lookup tables, indexed by the complete Postfix SMTP server 4xx or 5xx
response, with reject footer templates. See smtpd_reject_footer for
details.

Specify zero or more "type:name" lookup tables, separated by whitespace
or comma. Tables will be searched in the specified order until a match
is found.

This feature is available in Postfix 3.4 and later.

smtpd_reject_unlisted_recipient (default: yes)
Request that the Postfix SMTP server rejects mail for unknown recipient
addresses, even when no explicit reject_unlisted_recipient access
restriction is specified. This prevents the Postfix queue from filling
up with undeliverable MAILER-DAEMON messages.

An address is considered "unknown" when 1) it does not match a
virtual(5) alias or canonical(5) mapping, and 2) the address is not
valid for its address class. For a definition of class-based address
validation, see ADDRESS_CLASS_README.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.1 and later.

smtpd_reject_unlisted_sender (default: no)
Request that the Postfix SMTP server rejects mail from unknown sender
addresses, even when no explicit reject_unlisted_sender access
restriction is specified. This can slow down an explosion of forged
mail from worms or viruses.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.1 and later.

smtpd_relay_before_recipient_restrictions (default: see postconf -d output)
Evaluate smtpd_relay_restrictions before smtpd_recipient_restrictions.
Historically, smtpd_relay_restrictions was evaluated after
smtpd_recipient_restrictions, contradicting documented behavior.

Background: the smtpd_relay_restrictions feature is primarily designed
to enforce a mail relaying policy, while smtpd_recipient_restrictions
is primarily designed to enforce spam blocking policy. Both are
evaluated while replying to the RCPT TO command, and both support the
same features.

This feature is available in Postfix 3.6 and later.

smtpd_relay_restrictions (default: permit_mynetworks,
permit_sasl_authenticated, defer_unauth_destination)
Access restrictions for mail relay control that the Postfix SMTP server
applies in the context of the RCPT TO command, before
smtpd_recipient_restrictions. See SMTPD_ACCESS_README, section
"Delayed evaluation of SMTP access restriction lists" for a discussion
of evaluation context and time.

For backwards compatibility, sites that migrate from Postfix versions
before 2.10 can set smtpd_relay_restrictions to the empty value, and
use smtpd_recipient_restrictions exactly as before.

By default, the Postfix SMTP server accepts:

o Mail from clients whose IP address matches $mynetworks, or:

o Mail from clients who are SASL authenticated, or:

o Mail to remote destinations that match $relay_domains, except
for addresses that contain sender-specified routing
(user@elsewhere@domain), or:

o Mail to local destinations that match $inet_interfaces or
$proxy_interfaces, $mydestination, $virtual_alias_domains, or
$virtual_mailbox_domains.

IMPORTANT: Either the smtpd_relay_restrictions or the
smtpd_recipient_restrictions parameter must specify at least one of the
following restrictions. Otherwise Postfix will refuse to receive mail:

reject, reject_unauth_destination

defer, defer_if_permit, defer_unauth_destination

Specify a list of restrictions, separated by commas and/or whitespace.
Continue long lines by starting the next line with whitespace. The
same restrictions are available as documented under
smtpd_recipient_restrictions.

This feature is available in Postix 2.10 and later.

smtpd_restriction_classes (default: empty)
User-defined aliases for groups of access restrictions. The aliases can
be specified in smtpd_recipient_restrictions etc., and on the
right-hand side of a Postfix access(5) table.

One major application is for implementing per-recipient UCE control.
See the RESTRICTION_CLASS_README document for other examples.

smtpd_sasl_application_name (default: smtpd)
The application name that the Postfix SMTP server uses for SASL server
initialization. This controls the name of the SASL configuration file.
The default value is smtpd, corresponding to a SASL configuration file
named smtpd.conf.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.1 and 2.2. With Postfix 2.3 it
was renamed to smtpd_sasl_path.

smtpd_sasl_auth_enable (default: no)
Enable SASL authentication in the Postfix SMTP server. By default, the
Postfix SMTP server does not use authentication.

If a remote SMTP client is authenticated, the permit_sasl_authenticated
access restriction can be used to permit relay access, like this:

# With Postfix 2.10 and later, the mail relay policy is
# preferably specified under smtpd_relay_restrictions.
smtpd_relay_restrictions =
permit_mynetworks, permit_sasl_authenticated, ...

# With Postfix before 2.10, the relay policy can be
# specified only under smtpd_recipient_restrictions.
smtpd_recipient_restrictions =
permit_mynetworks, permit_sasl_authenticated, ...

To reject all SMTP connections from unauthenticated clients, specify
"smtpd_delay_reject = yes" (which is the default) and use:

smtpd_client_restrictions = permit_sasl_authenticated, reject

See the SASL_README file for SASL configuration and operation details.

smtpd_sasl_authenticated_header (default: no)
Report the SASL authenticated user name in the smtpd(8) Received
message header.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

smtpd_sasl_exceptions_networks (default: empty)
What remote SMTP clients the Postfix SMTP server will not offer AUTH
support to.

Some clients (Netscape 4 at least) have a bug that causes them to
require a login and password whenever AUTH is offered, whether it's
necessary or not. To work around this, specify, for example,
$mynetworks to prevent Postfix from offering AUTH to local clients.

Specify a list of network/netmask patterns, separated by commas and/or
whitespace. The mask specifies the number of bits in the network part
of a host address. You can also specify "/file/name" or "type:table"
patterns. A "/file/name" pattern is replaced by its contents; a
"type:table" lookup table is matched when a table entry matches a
lookup string (the lookup result is ignored). Continue long lines by
starting the next line with whitespace. Specify "!pattern" to exclude
an address or network block from the list. The form "!/file/name" is
supported only in Postfix version 2.4 and later.

Note: IP version 6 address information must be specified inside [] in
the smtpd_sasl_exceptions_networks value, and in files specified with
"/file/name". IP version 6 addresses contain the ":" character, and
would otherwise be confused with a "type:table" pattern.

Example:

smtpd_sasl_exceptions_networks = $mynetworks

This feature is available in Postfix 2.1 and later.

smtpd_sasl_local_domain (default: empty)
The name of the Postfix SMTP server's local SASL authentication realm.

By default, the local authentication realm name is the null string.

Examples:

smtpd_sasl_local_domain = $mydomain
smtpd_sasl_local_domain = $myhostname

smtpd_sasl_mechanism_filter (default: !external, static:rest)
If non-empty, a filter for the SASL mechanism names that the Postfix
SMTP server will announce in the EHLO response. By default, the Postfix
SMTP server will not announce the EXTERNAL mechanism, because Postfix
support for that is not implemented.

Specify mechanism names, "/file/name" patterns, or "type:table" lookup
tables, separated by comma or whitespace. The right-hand side result
from "type:table" lookups is ignored. Specify "!pattern" to exclude a
mechanism name from the list.

Examples:

smtpd_sasl_mechanism_filter = !external, !gssapi, static:rest
smtpd_sasl_mechanism_filter = login, plain
smtpd_sasl_mechanism_filter = $config_directory/smtpd_mechs

This feature is available in Postfix 3.6 and later.

smtpd_sasl_path (default: smtpd)
Implementation-specific information that the Postfix SMTP server passes
through to the SASL plug-in implementation that is selected with
smtpd_sasl_type. Typically this specifies the name of a configuration
file or rendezvous point.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later. In earlier releases
it was called smtpd_sasl_application_name.

smtpd_sasl_response_limit (default: 12288)
The maximum length of a SASL client's response to a server challenge.
When the client's "initial response" is longer than the normal limit
for SMTP commands, the client must omit its initial response, and wait
for an empty server challenge; it can then send what would have been
its "initial response" as a response to the empty server challenge.
RFC4954 requires the server to accept client responses up to at least
12288 octets of base64-encoded text. The default value is therefore
also the minimum value accepted for this parameter.

This feature is available in Postfix 3.4 and later. Prior versions use
"line_length_limit", which may need to be raised to accommodate larger
client responses, as may be needed with GSSAPI authentication of
Windows AD users who are members of many groups.

smtpd_sasl_security_options (default: noanonymous)
Postfix SMTP server SASL security options; as of Postfix 2.3 the list
of available features depends on the SASL server implementation that is
selected with smtpd_sasl_type.

The following security features are defined for the cyrus server SASL
implementation:

Restrict what authentication mechanisms the Postfix SMTP server will
offer to the client. The list of available authentication mechanisms
is system dependent.

Specify zero or more of the following:

noplaintext
Disallow methods that use plaintext passwords.

noactive
Disallow methods subject to active (non-dictionary) attack.

nodictionary
Disallow methods subject to passive (dictionary) attack.

noanonymous
Disallow methods that allow anonymous authentication.

forward_secrecy
Only allow methods that support forward secrecy (Dovecot only).

mutual_auth
Only allow methods that provide mutual authentication (not
available with Cyrus SASL version 1).

By default, the Postfix SMTP server accepts plaintext passwords but not
anonymous logins.

Warning: it appears that clients try authentication methods in the
order as advertised by the server (e.g., PLAIN ANONYMOUS CRAM-MD5)
which means that if you disable plaintext passwords, clients will log
in anonymously, even when they should be able to use CRAM-MD5. So, if
you disable plaintext logins, disable anonymous logins too. Postfix
treats anonymous login as no authentication.

Example:

smtpd_sasl_security_options = noanonymous, noplaintext

smtpd_sasl_service (default: smtp)
The service name that is passed to the SASL plug-in that is selected
with smtpd_sasl_type and smtpd_sasl_path.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.11 and later. Prior versions
behave as if "smtp" is specified.

smtpd_sasl_tls_security_options (default: $smtpd_sasl_security_options)
The SASL authentication security options that the Postfix SMTP server
uses for TLS encrypted SMTP sessions.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.

smtpd_sasl_type (default: cyrus)
The SASL plug-in type that the Postfix SMTP server should use for
authentication. The available types are listed with the "postconf -a"
command.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

smtpd_sender_login_maps (default: empty)
Optional lookup table with the SASL login names that own the sender
(MAIL FROM) addresses.

Specify zero or more "type:name" lookup tables, separated by whitespace
or comma. Tables will be searched in the specified order until a match
is found. With lookups from indexed files such as DB or DBM, or from
networked tables such as NIS, LDAP or SQL, the following search
operations are done with a sender address of user@domain:

1) user@domain
This table lookup is always done and has the highest precedence.

2) user
This table lookup is done only when the domain part of the
sender address matches $myorigin, $mydestination,
$inet_interfaces or $proxy_interfaces.

3) @domain
This table lookup is done last and has the lowest precedence.

In all cases the result of table lookup must be either "not found" or a
list of SASL login names separated by comma and/or whitespace.

smtpd_sender_restrictions (default: empty)
Optional restrictions that the Postfix SMTP server applies in the
context of a client MAIL FROM command. See SMTPD_ACCESS_README,
section "Delayed evaluation of SMTP access restriction lists" for a
discussion of evaluation context and time.

The default is to permit everything.

The following restrictions are specific to the sender address received
with the MAIL FROM command.

check_sender_access type:table
Search the specified access(5) database for the MAIL FROM
address, domain, parent domains, or localpart@, and execute the
corresponding action.

check_sender_a_access type:table
Search the specified access(5) database for the IP addresses for
the MAIL FROM domain, and execute the corresponding action.
Note: a result of "OK" is not allowed for safety reasons.
Instead, use DUNNO in order to exclude specific hosts from
denylists. This feature is available in Postfix 3.0 and later.

check_sender_mx_access type:table
Search the specified access(5) database for the MX hosts for the
MAIL FROM domain, and execute the corresponding action. If no
MX record is found, look up A or AAAA records, just like the
Postfix SMTP client would. Note: a result of "OK" is not allowed
for safety reasons. Instead, use DUNNO in order to exclude
specific hosts from denylists. This feature is available in
Postfix 2.1 and later.

check_sender_ns_access type:table
Search the specified access(5) database for the DNS servers for
the MAIL FROM domain, and execute the corresponding action.
Note: a result of "OK" is not allowed for safety reasons.
Instead, use DUNNO in order to exclude specific hosts from
denylists. This feature is available in Postfix 2.1 and later.

reject_authenticated_sender_login_mismatch
Reject the request when the client is authenticated with SASL,
but either the MAIL FROM address is not listed in
$smtpd_sender_login_maps, or the SASL login name is not an owner
for that address.
This prevents an authenticated client from using a MAIL FROM
address that they do not explicitly own.
This feature is available in Postfix version 2.1 and later.

reject_known_sender_login_mismatch
When the client is authenticated with SASL, reject the request
when the MAIL FROM address is listed in
$smtpd_sender_login_maps, but the SASL login name is not an
owner for that address.
When the client is not authenticated with SASL, reject the
request when SASL is enabled, and the MAIL FROM address is
listed in $smtpd_sender_login_maps.
This protects any MAIL FROM address that is listed in
$smtpd_sender_login_maps, while still allowing a client to use
any unlisted MAIL FROM address.
This feature is available in Postfix version 2.11 and later.

reject_non_fqdn_sender
Reject the request when the MAIL FROM address specifies a domain
that is not in fully-qualified domain form as required by the
RFC.
The non_fqdn_reject_code parameter specifies the response code
for rejected requests (default: 504).

reject_rhsbl_sender rbl_domain=d.d.d.d
Reject the request when the MAIL FROM domain is listed with the
A record "d.d.d.d" under rbl_domain (Postfix version 2.1 and
later only). Each "d" is a number, or a pattern inside "[]"
that contains one or more ";"-separated numbers or
number..number ranges (Postfix version 2.8 and later). If no
"=d.d.d.d" is specified, reject the request when the MAIL FROM
domain is listed with any A record under rbl_domain.
The maps_rbl_reject_code parameter specifies the response code
for rejected requests (default: 554); the default_rbl_reply
parameter specifies the default server reply; and the
rbl_reply_maps parameter specifies tables with server replies
indexed by rbl_domain. This feature is available in Postfix 2.0
and later.

reject_sender_login_mismatch
As of Postfix 2.1, this is an alias for
"reject_authenticated_sender_login_mismatch,
reject_unauthenticated_sender_login_mismatch".

reject_unauthenticated_sender_login_mismatch
Reject the request when SASL is enabled, the MAIL FROM address
is listed in $smtpd_sender_login_maps, but the client is not
authenticated with SASL.
With SASL enabled, this prevents an unauthenticated client from
using any MAIL FROM address that is listed in
$smtpd_sender_login_maps.
This feature is available in Postfix version 2.1 and later.

reject_unknown_sender_domain
Reject the request when Postfix is not the final destination for
the sender address, and the MAIL FROM domain has 1) no DNS MX
and no DNS A record, or 2) a malformed MX record such as a
record with a zero-length MX hostname (Postfix version 2.3 and
later).
The reply is specified with the unknown_address_reject_code
parameter (default: 450), unknown_address_tempfail_action
(default: defer_if_permit), or 550 (nullmx, Postfix 3.0 and
later). See the respective parameter descriptions for details.

reject_unlisted_sender
Reject the request when the MAIL FROM address is not listed in
the list of valid recipients for its domain class. See the
smtpd_reject_unlisted_sender parameter description for details.
This feature is available in Postfix 2.1 and later.

reject_unverified_sender
Reject the request when mail to the MAIL FROM address is known
to bounce, or when the sender address destination is not
reachable. Address verification information is managed by the
verify(8) server; see the ADDRESS_VERIFICATION_README file for
details.
The unverified_sender_reject_code parameter specifies the
numerical response code when an address is known to bounce
(default: 450, change into 550 when you are confident that it is
safe to do so).
The unverified_sender_defer_code specifies the numerical
response code when an address probe failed due to a temporary
problem (default: 450).
The unverified_sender_tempfail_action parameter specifies the
action after address probe failure due to a temporary problem
(default: defer_if_permit).
This feature breaks for aliased addresses with
"enable_original_recipient = no" (Postfix <= 3.2).
This feature is available in Postfix 2.1 and later.

Other restrictions that are valid in this context:

o Generic restrictions that can be used in any SMTP command
context, described under smtpd_client_restrictions.

o SMTP command specific restrictions described under
smtpd_client_restrictions and smtpd_helo_restrictions.

o SMTP command specific restrictions described under
smtpd_recipient_restrictions. When recipient restrictions are
listed under smtpd_sender_restrictions, they have effect only
with "smtpd_delay_reject = yes", so that
$smtpd_sender_restrictions is evaluated at the time of the RCPT
TO command.

Examples:

smtpd_sender_restrictions = reject_unknown_sender_domain
smtpd_sender_restrictions = reject_unknown_sender_domain,
check_sender_access hash:$config_directory/access

smtpd_service_name (default: smtpd)
The internal service that postscreen(8) hands off allowed connections
to. In a future version there may be different classes of SMTP service.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.8.

smtpd_soft_error_limit (default: 10)
The number of errors a remote SMTP client is allowed to make without
delivering mail before the Postfix SMTP server slows down all its
responses.

o With Postfix version 2.1 and later, when the error count is >
$smtpd_soft_error_limit, the Postfix SMTP server delays all
responses by $smtpd_error_sleep_time.

o With Postfix versions 2.0 and earlier, when the error count is >
$smtpd_soft_error_limit, the Postfix SMTP server delays all
responses by the larger of (number of errors) seconds or
$smtpd_error_sleep_time.

o With Postfix versions 2.0 and earlier, when the error count is
<= $smtpd_soft_error_limit, the Postfix SMTP server delays 4XX
and 5XX responses by $smtpd_error_sleep_time.

smtpd_starttls_timeout (default: see postconf -d output)
The time limit for Postfix SMTP server write and read operations during
TLS startup and shutdown handshake procedures. The current default
value is stress-dependent. Before Postfix version 2.8, it was fixed at
300s.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.

smtpd_timeout (default: normal: 300s, overload: 10s)
When the Postfix SMTP server wants to send an SMTP server response, how
long the Postfix SMTP server will wait for an underlying network write
operation to complete; and when the Postfix SMTP server Postfix wants
to receive an SMTP client request, how long the Postfix SMTP server
will wait for an underlying network read operation to complete. See the
smtpd_per_request_deadline for how this time limit may be enforced
(with Postfix 2.9-3.6 see smtpd_per_record_deadline).

Normally the default limit is 300s, but it changes under overload to
just 10s. With Postfix 2.5 and earlier, the SMTP server always uses a
time limit of 300s by default.

Note: if you set SMTP time limits to very large values you may have to
update the global ipc_timeout parameter.

smtpd_tls_CAfile (default: empty)
A file containing (PEM format) CA certificates of root CAs trusted to
sign either remote SMTP client certificates or intermediate CA
certificates. These are loaded into memory before the smtpd(8) server
enters the chroot jail. If the number of trusted roots is large,
consider using smtpd_tls_CApath instead, but note that the latter
directory must be present in the chroot jail if the smtpd(8) server is
chrooted. This file may also be used to augment the server certificate
trust chain, but it is best to include all the required certificates
directly in the server certificate file.

Specify "smtpd_tls_CAfile = /path/to/system_CA_file" to use ONLY the
system-supplied default Certification Authority certificates.

Specify "tls_append_default_CA = no" to prevent Postfix from appending
the system-supplied default CAs and trusting third-party certificates.

By default (see smtpd_tls_ask_ccert), client certificates are not
requested, and smtpd_tls_CAfile should remain empty. If you do make use
of client certificates, the distinguished names (DNs) of the
Certification Authorities listed in smtpd_tls_CAfile are sent to the
remote SMTP client in the client certificate request message. MUAs with
multiple client certificates may use the list of preferred
Certification Authorities to select the correct client certificate.
You may want to put your "preferred" CA or CAs in this file, and
install other trusted CAs in $smtpd_tls_CApath.

Example:

smtpd_tls_CAfile = $config_directory/CAcert.pem

This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.

smtpd_tls_CApath (default: empty)
A directory containing (PEM format) CA certificates of root CAs trusted
to sign either remote SMTP client certificates or intermediate CA
certificates. Do not forget to create the necessary "hash" links with,
for example, "$OPENSSL_HOME/bin/c_rehash /usr/local/etc/postfix/certs".
To use smtpd_tls_CApath in chroot mode, this directory (or a copy) must
be inside the chroot jail.

Specify "smtpd_tls_CApath = /path/to/system_CA_directory" to use ONLY
the system-supplied default Certification Authority certificates.

Specify "tls_append_default_CA = no" to prevent Postfix from appending
the system-supplied default CAs and trusting third-party certificates.

By default (see smtpd_tls_ask_ccert), client certificates are not
requested, and smtpd_tls_CApath should remain empty. In contrast to
smtpd_tls_CAfile, DNs of Certification Authorities installed in
$smtpd_tls_CApath are not included in the client certificate request
message. MUAs with multiple client certificates may use the list of
preferred Certification Authorities to select the correct client
certificate. You may want to put your "preferred" CA or CAs in
$smtpd_tls_CAfile, and install the remaining trusted CAs in
$smtpd_tls_CApath.

Example:

smtpd_tls_CApath = $config_directory/certs

This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.

smtpd_tls_always_issue_session_ids (default: yes)
Force the Postfix SMTP server to issue a TLS session id, even when TLS
session caching is turned off (smtpd_tls_session_cache_database is
empty). This behavior is compatible with Postfix < 2.3.

With Postfix 2.3 and later the Postfix SMTP server can disable session
id generation when TLS session caching is turned off. This keeps remote
SMTP clients from caching sessions that almost certainly cannot be
re-used.

By default, the Postfix SMTP server always generates TLS session ids.
This works around a known defect in mail client applications such as MS
Outlook, and may also prevent interoperability issues with other MTAs.

Example:

smtpd_tls_always_issue_session_ids = no

This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

smtpd_tls_ask_ccert (default: no)
Ask a remote SMTP client for a client certificate. This information is
needed for certificate based mail relaying with, for example, the
permit_tls_clientcerts feature.

Some clients such as Netscape will either complain if no certificate is
available (for the list of CAs in $smtpd_tls_CAfile) or will offer
multiple client certificates to choose from. This may be annoying, so
this option is "off" by default.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.

smtpd_tls_auth_only (default: no)
When TLS encryption is optional in the Postfix SMTP server, do not
announce or accept SASL authentication over unencrypted connections.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.

smtpd_tls_ccert_verifydepth (default: 9)
The verification depth for remote SMTP client certificates. A depth of
1 is sufficient if the issuing CA is listed in a local CA file.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.

smtpd_tls_cert_file (default: empty)
File with the Postfix SMTP server RSA certificate in PEM format. This
file may also contain the Postfix SMTP server private RSA key. With
Postfix >= 3.4 the preferred way to configure server keys and
certificates is via the "smtpd_tls_chain_files" parameter.

Public Internet MX hosts without certificates signed by a "reputable"
CA must generate, and be prepared to present to most clients, a
self-signed or private-CA signed certificate. The client will not be
able to authenticate the server, but unless it is running Postfix 2.3
or similar software, it will still insist on a server certificate.

For servers that are not public Internet MX hosts, Postfix supports
configurations with no certificates. This entails the use of just the
anonymous TLS ciphers, which are not supported by typical SMTP clients.
Since some clients may not fall back to plain text after a TLS
handshake failure, a certificate-less Postfix SMTP server will be
unable to receive email from some TLS-enabled clients. To avoid
accidental configurations with no certificates, Postfix enables
certificate-less operation only when the administrator explicitly sets
"smtpd_tls_cert_file = none". This ensures that new Postfix SMTP server
configurations will not accidentally enable TLS without certificates.

Note that server certificates are not optional in TLS 1.3. To run
without certificates you'd have to disable the TLS 1.3 protocol by
including '!TLSv1.3' in "smtpd_tls_protocols" and perhaps also
"smtpd_tls_mandatory_protocols". It is simpler instead to just
configure a certificate chain. Certificate-less operation is not
recommended.

Both RSA and DSA certificates are supported. When both types are
present, the cipher used determines which certificate will be presented
to the client. For Netscape and OpenSSL clients without special cipher
choices the RSA certificate is preferred.

To enable a remote SMTP client to verify the Postfix SMTP server
certificate, the issuing CA certificates must be made available to the
client. You should include the required certificates in the server
certificate file, the server certificate first, then the issuing CA(s)
(bottom-up order).

Example: the certificate for "server.example.com" was issued by
"intermediate CA" which itself has a certificate of "root CA". Create
the server.pem file with "cat server_cert.pem intermediate_CA.pem
root_CA.pem > server.pem".

If you also want to verify client certificates issued by these CAs, you
can add the CA certificates to the smtpd_tls_CAfile, in which case it
is not necessary to have them in the smtpd_tls_cert_file,
smtpd_tls_dcert_file (obsolete) or smtpd_tls_eccert_file.

A certificate supplied here must be usable as an SSL server certificate
and hence pass the "openssl verify -purpose sslserver ..." test.

Example:

smtpd_tls_cert_file = $config_directory/server.pem

This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.

smtpd_tls_chain_files (default: empty)
List of one or more PEM files, each holding one or more private keys
directly followed by a corresponding certificate chain. The file names
are separated by commas and/or whitespace. This parameter obsoletes
the legacy algorithm-specific key and certificate file settings. When
this parameter is non-empty, the legacy parameters are ignored, and a
warning is logged if any are also non-empty.

RSA is still the most widely supported algorithm. Presently (late
2018), ECDSA support is common, but not yet universal, and Ed25519 and
Ed448 support is mostly absent. Therefore, an RSA key should generally
be configured, along with any additional keys for the other algorithms
when desired.

Example (separate files for each key and corresponding certificate
chain):

/usr/local/etc/postfix/main.cf:
smtpd_tls_chain_files =
${config_directory}/ed25519.pem,
${config_directory}/ed448.pem,
${config_directory}/rsa.pem

Example (all keys and certificates in a single file):

/usr/local/etc/postfix/main.cf:
smtpd_tls_chain_files = ${config_directory}/chains.pem

This feature is available in Postfix 3.4 and later.

smtpd_tls_cipherlist (default: empty)
Obsolete Postfix < 2.3 control for the Postfix SMTP server TLS cipher
list. It is easy to create interoperability problems by choosing a
non-default cipher list. Do not use a non-default TLS cipherlist for MX
hosts on the public Internet. Clients that begin the TLS handshake, but
are unable to agree on a common cipher, may not be able to send any
email to the SMTP server. Using a restricted cipher list may be more
appropriate for a dedicated MSA or an internal mailhub, where one can
exert some control over the TLS software and settings of the connecting
clients.

Note: do not use "" quotes around the parameter value.

This feature is available with Postfix version 2.2. It is not used with
Postfix 2.3 and later; use smtpd_tls_mandatory_ciphers instead.

smtpd_tls_ciphers (default: medium)
The minimum TLS cipher grade that the Postfix SMTP server will use with
opportunistic TLS encryption. Cipher types listed in
smtpd_tls_exclude_ciphers are excluded from the base definition of the
selected cipher grade. The default value is "medium" for Postfix
releases after the middle of 2015, "export" for older releases.

When TLS is mandatory the cipher grade is chosen via the
smtpd_tls_mandatory_ciphers configuration parameter, see there for
syntax details.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.6 and later. With earlier
Postfix releases only the smtpd_tls_mandatory_ciphers parameter is
implemented, and opportunistic TLS always uses "export" or better (i.e.
all) ciphers.

smtpd_tls_dcert_file (default: empty)
File with the Postfix SMTP server DSA certificate in PEM format. This
file may also contain the Postfix SMTP server private DSA key. The DSA
algorithm is obsolete and should not be used.

See the discussion under smtpd_tls_cert_file for more details.

Example:

smtpd_tls_dcert_file = $config_directory/server-dsa.pem

This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.

smtpd_tls_dh1024_param_file (default: empty)
File with DH parameters that the Postfix SMTP server should use with
non-export EDH ciphers.

With Postfix >= 3.7, built with OpenSSL version is 3.0.0 or later, if
the parameter value is either empty or "auto", then the DH parameter
selection is delegated to the OpenSSL library, which selects
appropriate parameters based on the TLS handshake. This choice is
likely to be the most interoperable with SMTP clients using various TLS
libraries, and custom local parameters are no longer recommended when
using Postfix >= 3.7 built against OpenSSL 3.0.0.

The best-practice choice of parameters uses a 2048-bit prime. This is
fine, despite the historical "1024" in the parameter name. Do not be
tempted to use much larger values, performance degrades quickly, and
you may also cease to interoperate with some mainstream SMTP clients.
As of Postfix 3.1, the compiled-in default prime is 2048-bits, and it
is not strictly necessary, though perhaps somewhat beneficial to
generate custom DH parameters.

Instead of using the exact same parameter sets as distributed with
other TLS packages, it is more secure to generate your own set of
parameters with something like the following commands:

openssl dhparam -out /usr/local/etc/postfix/dh2048.pem 2048
openssl dhparam -out /usr/local/etc/postfix/dh1024.pem 1024
# As of Postfix 3.6, export-grade 512-bit DH parameters are no longer
# supported or needed.
openssl dhparam -out /usr/local/etc/postfix/dh512.pem 512

It is safe to share the same DH parameters between multiple Postfix
instances. If you prefer, you can generate separate parameters for
each instance.

If you want to take maximal advantage of ciphers that offer forward
secrecy see the Getting started section of FORWARD_SECRECY_README. The
full document conveniently presents all information about Postfix
"perfect" forward secrecy support in one place: what forward secrecy
is, how to tweak settings, and what you can expect to see when Postfix
uses ciphers with forward secrecy.

Example:

smtpd_tls_dh1024_param_file = $config_directory/dh2048.pem

This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.

smtpd_tls_dh512_param_file (default: empty)
File with DH parameters that the Postfix SMTP server should use with
export-grade EDH ciphers. The default SMTP server cipher grade is
"medium" with Postfix releases after the middle of 2015, and as a
result export-grade cipher suites are by default not used.

With Postfix >= 3.6 export-grade Diffie-Hellman key exchange is no
longer supported, and this parameter is silently ignored.

See also the discussion under the smtpd_tls_dh1024_param_file
configuration parameter.

Example:

smtpd_tls_dh512_param_file = $config_directory/dh_512.pem

This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later, but is ignored in
Postfix 3.6 and later.

smtpd_tls_dkey_file (default: $smtpd_tls_dcert_file)
File with the Postfix SMTP server DSA private key in PEM format. This
file may be combined with the Postfix SMTP server DSA certificate file
specified with $smtpd_tls_dcert_file. The DSA algorithm is obsolete and
should not be used.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.

smtpd_tls_eccert_file (default: empty)
File with the Postfix SMTP server ECDSA certificate in PEM format.
This file may also contain the Postfix SMTP server private ECDSA key.
With Postfix >= 3.4 the preferred way to configure server keys and
certificates is via the "smtpd_tls_chain_files" parameter.

See the discussion under smtpd_tls_cert_file for more details.

Example:

smtpd_tls_eccert_file = $config_directory/ecdsa-scert.pem

This feature is available in Postfix 2.6 and later, when Postfix is
compiled and linked with OpenSSL 1.0.0 or later.

smtpd_tls_eckey_file (default: $smtpd_tls_eccert_file)
File with the Postfix SMTP server ECDSA private key in PEM format.
This file may be combined with the Postfix SMTP server ECDSA
certificate file specified with $smtpd_tls_eccert_file. With Postfix
>= 3.4 the preferred way to configure server keys and certificates is
via the "smtpd_tls_chain_files" parameter.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.6 and later, when Postfix is
compiled and linked with OpenSSL 1.0.0 or later.

smtpd_tls_eecdh_grade (default: see postconf -d output)
The Postfix SMTP server security grade for ephemeral elliptic-curve
Diffie-Hellman (EECDH) key exchange. As of Postfix 3.6, the value of
this parameter is always ignored, and Postfix behaves as though the
auto value (described below) was chosen.

The available choices are:

auto Use the most preferred curve that is supported by both the
client and the server. This setting requires Postfix >= 3.2
compiled and linked with OpenSSL >= 1.0.2. This is the default
setting under the above conditions (and the only setting used
with Postfix >= 3.6).

none Don't use EECDH. Ciphers based on EECDH key exchange will be
disabled. This is the default in Postfix versions 2.6 and 2.7.

strong Use EECDH with approximately 128 bits of security at a
reasonable computational cost. This is the default in Postfix
versions 2.8-3.5.

ultra Use EECDH with approximately 192 bits of security at
computational cost that is approximately twice as high as 128
bit strength ECC.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.6 and later, when it is compiled
and linked with OpenSSL 1.0.0 or later on platforms where EC algorithms
have not been disabled by the vendor.

smtpd_tls_exclude_ciphers (default: empty)
List of ciphers or cipher types to exclude from the SMTP server cipher
list at all TLS security levels. Excluding valid ciphers can create
interoperability problems. DO NOT exclude ciphers unless it is
essential to do so. This is not an OpenSSL cipherlist; it is a simple
list separated by whitespace and/or commas. The elements are a single
cipher, or one or more "+" separated cipher properties, in which case
only ciphers matching all the properties are excluded.

Examples (some of these will cause problems):

smtpd_tls_exclude_ciphers = aNULL
smtpd_tls_exclude_ciphers = MD5, DES
smtpd_tls_exclude_ciphers = DES+MD5
smtpd_tls_exclude_ciphers = AES256-SHA, DES-CBC3-MD5
smtpd_tls_exclude_ciphers = kEDH+aRSA

This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

smtpd_tls_fingerprint_digest (default: see postconf -d output)
The message digest algorithm to construct remote SMTP
client-certificate fingerprints or public key fingerprints (Postfix 2.9
and later) for check_ccert_access and permit_tls_clientcerts.

The default algorithm is sha256 with Postfix >= 3.6 and the
compatibility_level set to 3.6 or higher. With Postfix <= 3.5, the
default algorithm is md5.

To find the fingerprint of a specific certificate file, with a specific
digest algorithm, run:

$ openssl x509 -noout -fingerprint -digest -in certfile.pem

The text to the right of "=" sign is the desired fingerprint. For
example:

$ openssl x509 -noout -fingerprint -sha256 -in cert.pem
SHA256 Fingerprint=D4:6A:AB:19:24:...:A6:CB:66:82:C0:8E:9B:EE:29:A8:1A

Example:

$ openssl x509 -in cert.pem -noout -pubkey |
openssl pkey -pubin -outform DER |
openssl dgst -sha256 -c
(stdin)= 64:3f:1f:f6:e5:1e:d4:2a:56:8b:fc:09:1a:61:98:b5:bc:7c:60:58

The Postfix SMTP server and client log the peer (leaf) certificate
fingerprint and public key fingerprint when the TLS loglevel is 2 or
higher.

Example: client-certificate access table, with sha256 fingerprints:

/usr/local/etc/postfix/main.cf:
smtpd_tls_fingerprint_digest = sha256
smtpd_client_restrictions =
check_ccert_access hash:$config_directory/access,
reject
/usr/local/etc/postfix/access:
# Action folded to next line...
AF:88:7C:AD:51:95:6F:36:96:...:01:FB:2E:48:CD:AB:49:25:A2:3B
OK
85:16:78:FD:73:6E:CE:70:E0:...:5F:0D:3C:C8:6D:C4:2C:24:59:E1
permit_auth_destination

This feature is available in Postfix 2.5 and later.

smtpd_tls_key_file (default: $smtpd_tls_cert_file)
File with the Postfix SMTP server RSA private key in PEM format. This
file may be combined with the Postfix SMTP server RSA certificate file
specified with $smtpd_tls_cert_file. With Postfix >= 3.4 the preferred
way to configure server keys and certificates is via the
"smtpd_tls_chain_files" parameter.

smtpd_tls_loglevel (default: 0)
Enable additional Postfix SMTP server logging of TLS activity. Each
logging level also includes the information that is logged at a lower
logging level.

0 Disable logging of TLS activity.

1 Log only a summary message on TLS handshake completion - no
logging of client certificate trust-chain verification errors if
client certificate verification is not required. With Postfix
2.8 and earlier, log the summary message, peer certificate
summary information and unconditionally log trust-chain
verification errors.

2 Also log levels during TLS negotiation.

3 Also log hexadecimal and ASCII dump of TLS negotiation
process.

4 Also log hexadecimal and ASCII dump of complete transmission
after STARTTLS.

Do not use "smtpd_tls_loglevel = 2" or higher except in case of
problems. Use of loglevel 4 is strongly discouraged.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.

smtpd_tls_mandatory_ciphers (default: medium)
The minimum TLS cipher grade that the Postfix SMTP server will use with
mandatory TLS encryption. The default grade ("medium") is sufficiently
strong that any benefit from globally restricting TLS sessions to a
more stringent grade is likely negligible, especially given the fact
that many implementations still do not offer any stronger ("high"
grade) ciphers, while those that do, will always use "high" grade
ciphers. So insisting on "high" grade ciphers is generally
counter-productive. Allowing "export" or "low" ciphers is typically not
a good idea, as systems limited to just these are limited to obsolete
browsers. No known SMTP clients fail to support at least one "medium"
or "high" grade cipher.

The following cipher grades are supported:

high Enable only "HIGH" grade OpenSSL ciphers. The underlying
cipherlist is specified via the tls_high_cipherlist
configuration parameter, which you are strongly encouraged to
not change.

medium Enable "MEDIUM" grade or stronger OpenSSL ciphers. These use
128-bit or longer symmetric bulk-encryption keys. This is the
default minimum strength for mandatory TLS encryption. The
underlying cipherlist is specified via the tls_medium_cipherlist
configuration parameter, which you are strongly encouraged not
to change.

null Enable only the "NULL" OpenSSL ciphers, these provide
authentication without encryption. This setting is only
appropriate in the rare case that all clients are prepared to
use NULL ciphers (not normally enabled in TLS clients). The
underlying cipherlist is specified via the tls_null_cipherlist
configuration parameter, which you are strongly encouraged not
to change.

Cipher types listed in smtpd_tls_mandatory_exclude_ciphers or
smtpd_tls_exclude_ciphers are excluded from the base definition of the
selected cipher grade. See smtpd_tls_ciphers for cipher controls that
apply to opportunistic TLS.

The underlying cipherlists for grades other than "null" include
anonymous ciphers, but these are automatically filtered out if the
server is configured to ask for remote SMTP client certificates. You
are very unlikely to need to take any steps to exclude anonymous
ciphers, they are excluded automatically as required. If you must
exclude anonymous ciphers even when Postfix does not need or use peer
certificates, set "smtpd_tls_exclude_ciphers = aNULL". To exclude
anonymous ciphers only when TLS is enforced, set
"smtpd_tls_mandatory_exclude_ciphers = aNULL".

This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

smtpd_tls_mandatory_exclude_ciphers (default: empty)
Additional list of ciphers or cipher types to exclude from the Postfix
SMTP server cipher list at mandatory TLS security levels. This list
works in addition to the exclusions listed with
smtpd_tls_exclude_ciphers (see there for syntax details).

This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

smtpd_tls_mandatory_protocols (default: see postconf -d output)
TLS protocols accepted by the Postfix SMTP server with mandatory TLS
encryption. If the list is empty, the server supports all available
TLS protocol versions. A non-empty value is a list of protocol names
to include or exclude, separated by whitespace, commas or colons.

As of Postfix 3.6, the preferred way to limit the range of acceptable
protocols is to set the lowest acceptable TLS protocol version and/or
the highest acceptable TLS protocol version. To set the lower bound
include an element of the form: ">=version" where version is a either
one of the TLS protocol names listed above, or a hexadecimal number
corresponding to the desired TLS protocol version (0301 for TLS 1.0,
0302 for TLS 1.1, etc.). For the upper bound, use "<=version". There
must be no whitespace between the ">=" or "<=" symbols and the protocol
name or number.

Hexadecimal example (Postfix >= 3.6):

# Allow only TLS 1.2 through (hypothetical) TLS 1.4, once supported
# in some future version of OpenSSL (presently a warning is logged).
smtpd_tls_mandatory_protocols = >=TLSv1.2, <=0305
# Allow only TLS 1.2 and up:
smtpd_tls_mandatory_protocols = >=0x0303

With Postfix < 3.6 there is no support for a minimum or maximum
version, and the protocol range is configured via protocol exclusions.
To require at least TLS 1.0, set "smtpd_tls_mandatory_protocols =
!SSLv2, !SSLv3". Listing the protocols to include, rather than
protocols to exclude, is supported, but not recommended. The exclusion
form more accurately matches the underlying OpenSSL interface.

Support for "TLSv1.3" was introduced in OpenSSL 1.1.1. Disabling this
protocol via "!TLSv1.3" is supported since Postfix 3.4 (or patch
releases >= 3.0.14, 3.1.10, 3.2.7 and 3.3.2).

Example:

# Preferred syntax with Postfix >= 3.6:
smtpd_tls_mandatory_protocols = >=TLSv1.2, <=TLSv1.3
# Legacy syntax:
smtpd_tls_mandatory_protocols = !SSLv2, !SSLv3, !TLSv1, !TLSv1.1

This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

smtpd_tls_protocols (default: see postconf -d output)
TLS protocols accepted by the Postfix SMTP server with opportunistic
TLS encryption. If the list is empty, the server supports all available
TLS protocol versions. A non-empty value is a list of protocol names
to include or exclude, separated by whitespace, commas or colons.

As of Postfix 3.6, the preferred way to limit the range of acceptable
protocols is to set the lowest acceptable TLS protocol version and/or
the highest acceptable TLS protocol version. To set the lower bound
include an element of the form: ">=version" where version is a either
one of the TLS protocol names listed above, or a hexadecimal number
corresponding to the desired TLS protocol version (0301 for TLS 1.0,
0302 for TLS 1.1, etc.). For the upper bound, use "<=version". There
must be no whitespace between the ">=" or "<=" symbols and the protocol
name or number.

Hexadecimal example (Postfix >= 3.6):

# Allow only TLS 1.0 through (hypothetical) TLS 1.4, once supported
# in some future version of OpenSSL (presently a warning is logged).
smtpd_tls_protocols = >=TLSv1, <=0305
# Allow only TLS 1.0 and up:
smtpd_tls_protocols = >=0x0301

With Postfix < 3.6 there is no support for a minimum or maximum
version, and the protocol range is configured via protocol exclusions.
To require at least TLS 1.0, set "smtpd_tls_protocols = !SSLv2,
!SSLv3". Listing the protocols to include, rather than protocols to
exclude, is supported, but not recommended. The exclusion form more
accurately matches the underlying OpenSSL interface.

Support for "TLSv1.3" was introduced in OpenSSL 1.1.1. Disabling this
protocol via "!TLSv1.3" is supported since Postfix 3.4 (or patch
releases >= 3.0.14, 3.1.10, 3.2.7 and 3.3.2).

Example:
# Preferred syntax with Postfix >= 3.6:
smtpd_tls_protocols = >=TLSv1, <=TLSv1.3
# Legacy syntax:
smtpd_tls_protocols = !SSLv2, !SSLv3

This feature is available in Postfix 2.6 and later.

smtpd_tls_received_header (default: no)
Request that the Postfix SMTP server produces Received: message
headers that include information about the protocol and cipher used, as
well as the remote SMTP client CommonName and client certificate issuer
CommonName. This is disabled by default, as the information may be
modified in transit through other mail servers. Only information that
was recorded by the final destination can be trusted.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.

smtpd_tls_req_ccert (default: no)
With mandatory TLS encryption, require a trusted remote SMTP client
certificate in order to allow TLS connections to proceed. This option
implies "smtpd_tls_ask_ccert = yes".

When TLS encryption is optional, this setting is ignored with a warning
written to the mail log.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.

smtpd_tls_security_level (default: empty)
The SMTP TLS security level for the Postfix SMTP server; when a
non-empty value is specified, this overrides the obsolete parameters
smtpd_use_tls and smtpd_enforce_tls. This parameter is ignored with
"smtpd_tls_wrappermode = yes".

Specify one of the following security levels:

none TLS will not be used.

may Opportunistic TLS: announce STARTTLS support to remote SMTP
clients, but do not require that clients use TLS encryption.

encrypt
Mandatory TLS encryption: announce STARTTLS support to remote
SMTP clients, and require that clients use TLS encryption.
According to RFC 2487 this MUST NOT be applied in case of a
publicly-referenced SMTP server. Instead, this option should be
used only on dedicated servers.

Note 1: the "fingerprint", "verify" and "secure" levels are not
supported here. The Postfix SMTP server logs a warning and uses
"encrypt" instead. To verify remote SMTP client certificates, see
TLS_README for a discussion of the smtpd_tls_ask_ccert,
smtpd_tls_req_ccert, and permit_tls_clientcerts features.

Note 2: The parameter setting "smtpd_tls_security_level = encrypt"
implies "smtpd_tls_auth_only = yes".

Note 3: when invoked via "sendmail -bs", Postfix will never offer
STARTTLS due to insufficient privileges to access the server private
key. This is intended behavior.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

smtpd_tls_session_cache_database (default: empty)
Name of the file containing the optional Postfix SMTP server TLS
session cache. Specify a database type that supports enumeration, such
as btree or sdbm; there is no need to support concurrent access. The
file is created if it does not exist. The smtpd(8) daemon does not use
this parameter directly, rather the cache is implemented indirectly in
the tlsmgr(8) daemon. This means that per-smtpd-instance master.cf
overrides of this parameter are not effective. Note that each of the
cache databases supported by tlsmgr(8) daemon:
$smtpd_tls_session_cache_database, $smtp_tls_session_cache_database
(and with Postfix 2.3 and later $lmtp_tls_session_cache_database),
needs to be stored separately. It is not at this time possible to store
multiple caches in a single database.

Note: dbm databases are not suitable. TLS session objects are too
large.

As of Postfix 2.11 the preferred mechanism for session resumption is
RFC 5077 TLS session tickets, which don't require server-side storage.
Consequently, for Postfix >= 2.11 this parameter should generally be
left empty. TLS session tickets require an OpenSSL library (at least
version 0.9.8h) that provides full support for this TLS extension. See
also smtpd_tls_session_cache_timeout.

Example:

smtpd_tls_session_cache_database = btree:/var/lib/postfix/smtpd_scache

This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.

smtpd_tls_session_cache_timeout (default: 3600s)
The expiration time of Postfix SMTP server TLS session cache
information. A cache cleanup is performed periodically every
$smtpd_tls_session_cache_timeout seconds. As with
$smtpd_tls_session_cache_database, this parameter is implemented in the
tlsmgr(8) daemon and therefore per-smtpd-instance master.cf overrides
are not possible.

As of Postfix 2.11 this setting cannot exceed 100 days. If set <= 0,
session caching is disabled, not just via the database, but also via
RFC 5077 TLS session tickets, which don't require server-side storage.
If set to a positive value less than 2 minutes, the minimum value of 2
minutes is used instead. TLS session tickets require an OpenSSL
library (at least version 0.9.8h) that provides full support for this
TLS extension.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later, and updated for TLS
session ticket support in Postfix 2.11.

smtpd_tls_wrappermode (default: no)
Run the Postfix SMTP server in TLS "wrapper" mode, instead of using the
STARTTLS command.

If you want to support this service, enable a special port in
master.cf, and specify "-o smtpd_tls_wrappermode=yes" on the SMTP
server's command line. Port 465 (submissions/smtps) is reserved for
this purpose.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.

smtpd_upstream_proxy_protocol (default: empty)
The name of the proxy protocol used by an optional before-smtpd proxy
agent. When a proxy agent is used, this protocol conveys local and
remote address and port information. Specify
"smtpd_upstream_proxy_protocol = haproxy" to enable the haproxy
protocol; version 2 is supported with Postfix 3.5 and later.

NOTE: To use the nginx proxy with smtpd(8), enable the XCLIENT protocol
with smtpd_authorized_xclient_hosts. This supports SASL authentication
in the proxy agent (Postfix 2.9 and later).

This feature is available in Postfix 2.10 and later.

smtpd_upstream_proxy_timeout (default: 5s)
The time limit for the proxy protocol specified with the
smtpd_upstream_proxy_protocol parameter.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.10 and later.

smtpd_use_tls (default: no)
Opportunistic TLS: announce STARTTLS support to remote SMTP clients,
but do not require that clients use TLS encryption.

Note: when invoked via "sendmail -bs", Postfix will never offer
STARTTLS due to insufficient privileges to access the server private
key. This is intended behavior.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later. With Postfix 2.3
and later use smtpd_tls_security_level instead.

smtputf8_autodetect_classes (default: sendmail, verify)
Detect that a message requires SMTPUTF8 support for the specified mail
origin classes. This is a workaround to avoid chicken-and-egg problems
during the initial SMTPUTF8 roll-out in environments with pre-existing
mail flows that contain UTF8. Those mail flows should not break because
Postfix suddenly refuses to deliver such mail to down-stream MTAs that
don't announce SMTPUTF8 support.

The problem is that Postfix cannot rely solely on the sender's
declaration that a message requires SMTPUTF8 support, because UTF8 may
be introduced during local processing (for example, the client hostname
in Postfix's Received: header, adding @$myorigin or .$mydomain to an
incomplete address, address rewriting, alias expansion, automatic BCC
recipients, local forwarding, and changes made by header checks or
Milter applications).

For now, the default is to enable "SMTPUTF8 required" autodetection
only for Postfix sendmail command-line submissions and address
verification probes. This may change once SMTPUTF8 support achieves
world domination. However, sites that add UTF8 content via local
processing (see above) should autodetect the need for SMTPUTF8 support
for all email.

Specify one or more of the following:

sendmail
Submission with the Postfix sendmail(1) command.

smtpd Mail received with the smtpd(8) daemon.

qmqpd Mail received with the qmqpd(8) daemon.

forward
Local forwarding or aliasing. When a message is received with
"SMTPUTF8 required", then the forwarded (aliased) message always
has "SMTPUTF8 required".

bounce
Submission by the bounce(8) daemon. When a message is received
with "SMTPUTF8 required", then the delivery status notification
always has "SMTPUTF8 required".

notify
Postmaster notification from the smtp(8) or smtpd(8) daemon.

verify
Address verification probe from the verify(8) daemon.

all Enable SMTPUTF8 autodetection for all mail.

This feature is available in Postfix 3.0 and later.

smtputf8_enable (default: yes)
Enable preliminary SMTPUTF8 support for the protocols described in RFC
6531, RFC 6532, and RFC 6533. This requires that Postfix is built to
support these protocols.

This feature is available in Postfix 3.0 and later.

soft_bounce (default: no)
Safety net to keep mail queued that would otherwise be returned to the
sender. This parameter disables locally-generated bounces, changes the
handling of negative responses from remote servers, content filters or
plugins, and prevents the Postfix SMTP server from rejecting mail
permanently by changing 5xx reply codes into 4xx. However, soft_bounce
is no cure for address rewriting mistakes or mail routing mistakes.

Note: "soft_bounce = yes" is in some cases implemented by modifying
server responses. Therefore, the response that Postfix logs may differ
from the response that Postfix actually sends or receives.

Example:

soft_bounce = yes

stale_lock_time (default: 500s)
The time after which a stale exclusive mailbox lockfile is removed.
This is used for delivery to file or mailbox.

stress (default: empty)
This feature is documented in the STRESS_README document.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.5 and later.

strict_7bit_headers (default: no)
Reject mail with 8-bit text in message headers. This blocks mail from
poorly written applications.

This feature should not be enabled on a general purpose mail server,
because it is likely to reject legitimate email.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.0 and later.

strict_8bitmime (default: no)
Enable both strict_7bit_headers and strict_8bitmime_body.

This feature should not be enabled on a general purpose mail server,
because it is likely to reject legitimate email.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.0 and later.

strict_8bitmime_body (default: no)
Reject 8-bit message body text without 8-bit MIME content encoding
information. This blocks mail from poorly written applications.

Unfortunately, this also rejects majordomo approval requests when the
included request contains valid 8-bit MIME mail, and it rejects bounces
from mailers that do not MIME encapsulate 8-bit content (for example,
bounces from qmail or from old versions of Postfix).

This feature should not be enabled on a general purpose mail server,
because it is likely to reject legitimate email.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.0 and later.

strict_mailbox_ownership (default: yes)
Defer delivery when a mailbox file is not owned by its recipient. The
default setting is not backwards compatible.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.5.3 and later.

strict_mime_encoding_domain (default: no)
Reject mail with invalid Content-Transfer-Encoding: information for the
message/* or multipart/* MIME content types. This blocks mail from
poorly written software.

This feature should not be enabled on a general purpose mail server,
because it will reject mail after a single violation.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.0 and later.

strict_rfc821_envelopes (default: no)
Require that addresses received in SMTP MAIL FROM and RCPT TO commands
are enclosed with <>, and that those addresses do not contain RFC 822
style comments or phrases. This stops mail from poorly written
software.

By default, the Postfix SMTP server accepts RFC 822 syntax in MAIL FROM
and RCPT TO addresses.

strict_smtputf8 (default: no)
Enable stricter enforcement of the SMTPUTF8 protocol. The Postfix SMTP
server accepts UTF8 sender or recipient addresses only when the client
requests an SMTPUTF8 mail transaction.

This feature is available in Postfix 3.0 and later.

sun_mailtool_compatibility (default: no)
Obsolete SUN mailtool compatibility feature. Instead, use
"mailbox_delivery_lock = dotlock".

swap_bangpath (default: yes)
Enable the rewriting of "site!user" into "user@site". This is
necessary if your machine is connected to UUCP networks. It is enabled
by default.

Note: with Postfix version 2.2, message header address rewriting
happens only when one of the following conditions is true:

o The message is received with the Postfix sendmail(1) command,

o The message is received from a network client that matches
$local_header_rewrite_clients,

o The message is received from the network, and the
remote_header_rewrite_domain parameter specifies a non-empty
value.

To get the behavior before Postfix version 2.2, specify
"local_header_rewrite_clients = static:all".

Example:

swap_bangpath = no

syslog_facility (default: mail)
The syslog facility of Postfix logging. Specify a facility as defined
in syslog.conf(5). The default facility is "mail".

Warning: a non-default syslog_facility setting takes effect only after
a Postfix process has completed initialization. Errors during process
initialization will be logged with the default facility. Examples are
errors while parsing the command line arguments, and errors while
accessing the Postfix main.cf configuration file.

syslog_name (default: see postconf -d output)
A prefix that is prepended to the process name in syslog records, so
that, for example, "smtpd" becomes "prefix/smtpd".

Warning: a non-default syslog_name setting takes effect only after a
Postfix process has completed initialization. Errors during process
initialization will be logged with the default name. Examples are
errors while parsing the command line arguments, and errors while
accessing the Postfix main.cf configuration file.

tcp_windowsize (default: 0)
An optional workaround for routers that break TCP window scaling.
Specify a value > 0 and < 65536 to enable this feature. With Postfix
TCP servers (smtpd(8), qmqpd(8)), this feature is implemented by the
Postfix master(8) daemon.

To change this parameter without stopping Postfix, you need to first
terminate all Postfix TCP servers:

# postconf -e master_service_disable=inet
# postfix reload

This immediately terminates all processes that accept network
connections. Next, you enable Postfix TCP servers with the updated
tcp_windowsize setting:

# postconf -e tcp_windowsize=65535 master_service_disable=
# postfix reload

If you skip these steps with a running Postfix system, then the
tcp_windowsize change will work only for Postfix TCP clients (smtp(8),
lmtp(8)).

This feature is available in Postfix 2.6 and later.

tls_append_default_CA (default: no)
Append the system-supplied default Certification Authority certificates
to the ones specified with *_tls_CApath or *_tls_CAfile. The default
is "no"; this prevents Postfix from trusting third-party certificates
and giving them relay permission with permit_tls_all_clientcerts.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.4.15, 2.5.11, 2.6.8, 2.7.2 and
later versions. Specify "tls_append_default_CA = yes" for backwards
compatibility, to avoid breaking certificate verification with sites
that don't use permit_tls_all_clientcerts.

tls_config_file (default: default)
Optional configuration file with baseline OpenSSL settings. OpenSSL
loads any SSL settings found in the configuration file for the selected
application name (see tls_config_name) or else the built-in application
name "openssl_conf" when no application name is specified, or no
corresponding configuration section is present.

With OpenSSL releases 1.1.1 and 1.1.1a, applications (including
Postfix) can neither specify an alternative configuration file, nor
avoid loading the default configuration file.

With OpenSSL 1.1.1b or later, this parameter may be set to one of:

default (default)
Load the system-wide "openssl.cnf" configuration file.

none (recommended, OpenSSL 1.1.1b or later only)
This setting disables loading of the system-wide "openssl.cnf"
file.

/absolute-path (OpenSSL 1.1.1b or later only)
Load the configuration file specified by /absolute-path. With
this setting it is an error for the file to not contain any
settings for the selected tls_config_name. There is no fallback
to the default "openssl_conf" name.

Failures in processing of the built-in default configuration file, are
silently ignored. Any errors in loading a non-default configuration
file are detected by Postfix, and cause TLS support to be disabled.

The OpenSSL configuration file format is not documented here, beyond
giving two examples.

Example: Default settings for all applications.

# The name 'openssl_conf' is the default application name
# The section name to the right of the '=' sign is arbitrary,
# any name will do, so long as it refers to the desired section.
#
# The name 'system_default' selects the settings applied internally
# by the SSL library as part of SSL object creation. Applications
# can then apply any additional settings of their choice.
#
# In this example, TLS versions prior to 1.2 are disabled by default.
#
openssl_conf = system_wide_settings
[system_wide_settings]
ssl_conf = ssl_library_settings
[ssl_library_settings]
system_default = initial_ssl_settings
[initial_ssl_settings]
MinProtocol = TLSv1.2

Example: Custom settings for an application named "postfix".

# The mapping from an application name to the corresponding configuration
# section must appear near the top of the file, (in what is sometimes called
# the "default section") prior to the start of any explicitly named
# "[sections]". The named sections can appear in any order and don't nest.
#
postfix = postfix_settings
[postfix_settings]
ssl_conf = postfix_ssl_settings
[postfix_ssl_settings]
system_default = baseline_postfix_settings
[baseline_postfix_settings]
MinProtocol = TLSv1

This feature is available in Postfix >= 3.9, 3.8.1, 3.7.6, 3.6.10, and
3.5.20.

tls_config_name (default: empty)
The application name passed by Postfix to OpenSSL library
initialization functions. This name is used to select the desired
configuration "section" in the OpenSSL configuration file specified via
the tls_config_file parameter. When empty, or when the selected name
is not present in the configuration file, the default application name
("openssl_conf") is used as a fallback.

This feature is available in Postfix >= 3.9, 3.8.1, 3.7.6, 3.6.10, and
3.5.20.

tls_daemon_random_bytes (default: 32)
The number of pseudo-random bytes that an smtp(8) or smtpd(8) process
requests from the tlsmgr(8) server in order to seed its internal pseudo
random number generator (PRNG). The default of 32 bytes (equivalent to
256 bits) is sufficient to generate a 128bit (or 168bit) session key.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.

tls_dane_digest_agility (default: on)
Configure RFC7671 DANE TLSA digest algorithm agility. Do not change
this setting from its default value.

See Section 8 of RFC7671 for correct key rotation procedures.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.11 through 3.1. Postfix 3.2 and
later ignore this configuration parameter and behave as though it were
set to "on".

tls_dane_digests (default: sha512 sha256)
DANE TLSA (RFC 6698, RFC 7671, RFC 7672) resource-record "matching
type" digest algorithms in descending preference order. All the
specified algorithms must be supported by the underlying OpenSSL
library, otherwise the Postfix SMTP client will not support DANE TLSA
security.

Specify a list of digest names separated by commas and/or whitespace.
Each digest name may be followed by an optional "=<number>" suffix.
For example, "sha512" may instead be specified as "sha512=2" and
"sha256" may instead be specified as "sha256=1". The optional number
must match the <a
href="https://www.iana.org/assignments/dane-parameters/dane-parameters.xhtml#matching-types"
>IANA assigned TLSA matching type number the algorithm in question.
Postfix will check this constraint for the algorithms it knows about.
Additional matching type algorithms registered with IANA can be added
with explicit numbers provided they are supported by OpenSSL.

Invalid list elements are logged with a warning and disable DANE
support. TLSA RRs that specify digests not included in the list are
ignored with a warning.

Note: It is unwise to omit sha256 from the digest list. This digest
algorithm is the only mandatory to implement digest algorithm in RFC
6698, and many servers are expected to publish TLSA records with just
sha256 digests. Unless one of the standard digests is seriously
compromised and servers have had ample time to update their TLSA
records you should not omit any standard digests, just arrange them in
order from strongest to weakest.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.11 and later.

tls_dane_trust_anchor_digest_enable (default: yes)
Enable support for RFC 6698 (DANE TLSA) DNS records that contain
digests of trust-anchors with certificate usage "2". Do not change
this setting from its default value.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.11 through 3.1. It has been
withdrawn in Postfix 3.2, as trust-anchor TLSA records are now widely
used and have proved sufficiently reliable. Postfix 3.2 and later
ignore this configuration parameter and behaves as though it were set
to "yes".

tls_disable_workarounds (default: see postconf -d output)
List or bit-mask of OpenSSL bug work-arounds to disable.

The OpenSSL toolkit includes a set of work-arounds for buggy SSL/TLS
implementations. Applications, such as Postfix, that want to maximize
interoperability ask the OpenSSL library to enable the full set of
recommended work-arounds.

From time to time, it is discovered that a work-around creates a
security issue, and should no longer be used. If upgrading OpenSSL to a
fixed version is not an option or an upgrade is not available in a
timely manner, or in closed environments where no buggy clients or
servers exist, it may be appropriate to disable some or all of the
OpenSSL interoperability work-arounds. This parameter specifies which
bug work-arounds to disable.

If the value of the parameter is a hexadecimal long integer starting
with "0x", the bug work-arounds corresponding to the bits specified in
its value are removed from the SSL_OP_ALL work-around bit-mask (see
openssl/ssl.h and SSL_CTX_set_options(3)). You can specify more bits
than are present in SSL_OP_ALL, excess bits are ignored. Specifying
0xFFFFFFFF disables all bug-workarounds on a 32-bit system. This should
also be sufficient on 64-bit systems, until OpenSSL abandons support
for 32-bit systems and starts using the high 32 bits of a 64-bit
bug-workaround mask.

Otherwise, the parameter is a white-space or comma separated list of
specific named bug work-arounds chosen from the list below. It is
possible that your OpenSSL version includes new bug work-arounds added
after your Postfix source code was last updated, in that case you can
only disable one of these via the hexadecimal syntax above.

CRYPTOPRO_TLSEXT_BUG
New with GOST support in OpenSSL 1.0.0.

DONT_INSERT_EMPTY_FRAGMENTS
See SSL_CTX_set_options(3)

LEGACY_SERVER_CONNECT
See SSL_CTX_set_options(3)

MICROSOFT_BIG_SSLV3_BUFFER
See SSL_CTX_set_options(3)

MICROSOFT_SESS_ID_BUG
See SSL_CTX_set_options(3)

MSIE_SSLV2_RSA_PADDING
also aliased as CVE-2005-2969. Postfix 2.8 disables this
work-around by default with OpenSSL versions that may predate
the fix. Fixed in OpenSSL 0.9.7h and OpenSSL 0.9.8a.

NETSCAPE_CHALLENGE_BUG
See SSL_CTX_set_options(3)

NETSCAPE_REUSE_CIPHER_CHANGE_BUG
also aliased as CVE-2010-4180. Postfix 2.8 disables this
work-around by default with OpenSSL versions that may predate
the fix. Fixed in OpenSSL 0.9.8q and OpenSSL 1.0.0c.

SSLEAY_080_CLIENT_DH_BUG
See SSL_CTX_set_options(3)

SSLREF2_REUSE_CERT_TYPE_BUG
See SSL_CTX_set_options(3)

TLS_BLOCK_PADDING_BUG
See SSL_CTX_set_options(3)

TLS_D5_BUG
See SSL_CTX_set_options(3)

TLS_ROLLBACK_BUG
See SSL_CTX_set_options(3). This is disabled in OpenSSL 0.9.7
and later. Nobody should still be using 0.9.6!

TLSEXT_PADDING
Postfix >= 3.4. See SSL_CTX_set_options(3).

This feature is available in Postfix 2.8 and later.

tls_eecdh_auto_curves (default: see postconf -d output)
The prioritized list of elliptic curves supported by the Postfix SMTP
client and server. These curves are used by the Postfix SMTP server
when "smtpd_tls_eecdh_grade = auto". The selected curves must be
implemented by OpenSSL and be standardized for use in TLS (RFC 8422).
It is unwise to list only "bleeding-edge" curves supported by a small
subset of clients. The default list is suitable for most users.

Postfix skips curve names that are unknown to OpenSSL, or that are
known but not yet implemented. This makes it possible to "anticipate"
support for curves that should be used once they become available. In
particular, in some OpenSSL versions, the new RFC 8031 curves "X25519"
and "X448" may be known by name, but ECDH support for either or both
may be missing. These curves may appear in the default value of this
parameter, even though they'll only be usable with later versions of
OpenSSL.

See also the "tls_ffdhe_auto_groups" parameter, which supports
customizing the list of FFDHE groups enabled with TLS 1.3. That
setting is introduced with Postfix 3.8, when built against OpenSSL 3.0
or later.

This feature is available in Postfix 3.2 and later, when it is compiled
and linked with OpenSSL 1.0.2 or later on platforms where EC algorithms
have not been disabled by the vendor.

tls_eecdh_strong_curve (default: prime256v1)
The elliptic curve used by the Postfix SMTP server for sensibly strong
ephemeral ECDH key exchange. This curve is used by the Postfix SMTP
server when "smtpd_tls_eecdh_grade = strong". The phrase "sensibly
strong" means approximately 128-bit security based on best known
attacks. The selected curve must be implemented by OpenSSL (as reported
by ecparam(1) with the "-list_curves" option) and be one of the curves
listed in Section 5.1.1 of RFC 8422. You should not generally change
this setting. Remote SMTP client implementations must support this
curve for EECDH key exchange to take place. It is unwise to choose
only "bleeding-edge" curves supported by only a small subset of
clients.

The default "strong" curve is rated in NSA Suite B for information
classified up to SECRET.

Note: elliptic curve names are poorly standardized; different standards
groups are assigning different names to the same underlying curves.
The curve with the X9.62 name "prime256v1" is also known under the SECG
name "secp256r1", but OpenSSL does not recognize the latter name.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.6 and later, when it is compiled
and linked with OpenSSL 1.0.0 or later on platforms where EC algorithms
have not been disabled by the vendor.

tls_eecdh_ultra_curve (default: secp384r1)
The elliptic curve used by the Postfix SMTP server for maximally strong
ephemeral ECDH key exchange. This curve is used by the Postfix SMTP
server when "smtpd_tls_eecdh_grade = ultra". The phrase "maximally
strong" means approximately 192-bit security based on best known
attacks. This additional strength comes at a significant computational
cost, most users should instead set "smtpd_tls_eecdh_grade = strong".
The selected curve must be implemented by OpenSSL (as reported by
ecparam(1) with the "-list_curves" option) and be one of the curves
listed in Section 5.1.1 of RFC 8422. You should not generally change
this setting. Remote SMTP client implementations must support this
curve for EECDH key exchange to take place. It is unwise to choose
only "bleeding-edge" curves supported by only a small subset of
clients.

This default "ultra" curve is rated in NSA Suite B for information
classified up to TOP SECRET.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.6 and later, when it is compiled
and linked with OpenSSL 1.0.0 or later on platforms where EC algorithms
have not been disabled by the vendor.

tls_export_cipherlist (default: see postconf -d output)
The OpenSSL cipherlist for "export" or higher grade ciphers. Ignored
as of Postfix 3.8. In earlier Postfix releases this defined the
meaning of the "export" setting in smtpd_tls_ciphers,
smtpd_tls_mandatory_ciphers, smtp_tls_ciphers,
smtp_tls_mandatory_ciphers, lmtp_tls_ciphers, and
lmtp_tls_mandatory_ciphers. You are strongly encouraged not to change
this setting.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

tls_fast_shutdown_enable (default: yes)
A workaround for implementations that hang Postfix while shutting down
a TLS session, until Postfix times out. With this enabled, Postfix will
not wait for the remote TLS peer to respond to a TLS 'close'
notification. This behavior is recommended for TLSv1.0 and later.

tls_ffdhe_auto_groups (default: see postconf -d output)
The prioritized list of finite-field Diffie-Hellman ephemeral (FFDHE)
key exchange groups supported by the Postfix SMTP client and server.
OpenSSL 3.0 adds support for FFDHE key agreement in TLS 1.3. In
OpenSSL 1.1.1, TLS 1.3 was only supported with elliptic-curve based key
agreement. The "tls_ffdhe_auto_groups" parameter makes it possible to
configure the list of FFDHE groups that the Postfix client or server
will enable in OpenSSL 3.0 and up. This parameter has no effect when
Postfix is built against earlier OpenSSL versions.

The default list of FFDHE groups that Postfix enables in OpenSSL 3.0
and up includes just the 2048 and 3072-bit groups. Stronger FFDHE
groups perform poorly and EC groups are a much better choice for the
same security level. Postfix ignores group names that are unknown to
OpenSSL, or that are known but not yet implemented. The FFDHE groups
are largely a backup, in case some peer does not support EC key
exchange, or EC key exchange needs to be disabled for some pressing
reason.

Setting this parameter empty disables FFDHE support in TLS 1.3.
Whether FFDHE key agreement is enabled in TLS 1.2 and earlier depends
on whether any of the "kDHE" ciphers are included in the cipherlist.

Conversely, setting "tls_eecdh_auto_curves" empty disables TLS 1.3 EC
key agreement in OpenSSL 3.0 and later. Note that at least one of
"tls_eecdh_auto_curves" and "tls_ffdhe_auto_groups" must be non-empty,
this is required by OpenSSL 3.0. If both are inadvertently set empty,
Postfix will fall back to the compiled-in defaults.

All the default groups and EC curves should sufficiently strong to make
"pruning" the defaults unwise. At a minimum, "X25519" and "P-256"
(a.k.a. "prime256v1") should be among the enabled EC curves, while
"dhe2048" and "dhe3072" should be among the FFDHE groups.

This feature is available in Postfix 3.8 and later, when it is compiled
and linked with OpenSSL 3.0 or later.

tls_high_cipherlist (default: see postconf -d output)
The OpenSSL cipherlist for "high" grade ciphers. This defines the
meaning of the "high" setting in smtpd_tls_ciphers,
smtpd_tls_mandatory_ciphers, smtp_tls_ciphers,
smtp_tls_mandatory_ciphers, lmtp_tls_ciphers, and
lmtp_tls_mandatory_ciphers. You are strongly encouraged not to change
this setting.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

tls_legacy_public_key_fingerprints (default: no)
A temporary migration aid for sites that use certificate public-key
fingerprints with Postfix 2.9.0..2.9.5, which use an incorrect
algorithm. This parameter has no effect on the certificate fingerprint
support that is available since Postfix 2.2.

Specify "tls_legacy_public_key_fingerprints = yes" temporarily, pending
a migration from configuration files with incorrect Postfix
2.9.0..2.9.5 certificate public-key finger prints, to the correct
fingerprints used by Postfix 2.9.6 and later. To compute the correct
certificate public-key fingerprints, see TLS_README.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.9.6 and later.

tls_low_cipherlist (default: see postconf -d output)
The OpenSSL cipherlist for "low" or higher grade ciphers. Ignored as
of Postfix 3.8. In earlier Postfix releases this defined the meaning
of the "low" setting in smtpd_tls_ciphers, smtpd_tls_mandatory_ciphers,
smtp_tls_ciphers, smtp_tls_mandatory_ciphers, lmtp_tls_ciphers, and
lmtp_tls_mandatory_ciphers. You are strongly encouraged not to change
this setting.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

tls_medium_cipherlist (default: see postconf -d output)
The OpenSSL cipherlist for "medium" or higher grade ciphers. This
defines the meaning of the "medium" setting in smtpd_tls_ciphers,
smtpd_tls_mandatory_ciphers, smtp_tls_ciphers,
smtp_tls_mandatory_ciphers, lmtp_tls_ciphers, and
lmtp_tls_mandatory_ciphers. This is the default cipherlist for
mandatory TLS encryption in the TLS client (with anonymous ciphers
disabled when verifying server certificates). This is the default
cipherlist for opportunistic TLS with Postfix releases after the middle
of 2015. You are strongly encouraged not to change this setting.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

tls_null_cipherlist (default: eNULL:!aNULL)
The OpenSSL cipherlist for "NULL" grade ciphers that provide
authentication without encryption. This defines the meaning of the
"null" setting in smtpd_tls_mandatory_ciphers,
smtp_tls_mandatory_ciphers and lmtp_tls_mandatory_ciphers. You are
strongly encouraged not to change this setting.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.3 and later.

tls_preempt_cipherlist (default: no)
With SSLv3 and later, use the Postfix SMTP server's cipher preference
order instead of the remote client's cipher preference order.

By default, the OpenSSL server selects the client's most preferred
cipher that the server supports. With SSLv3 and later, the server may
choose its own most preferred cipher that is supported (offered) by the
client. Setting "tls_preempt_cipherlist = yes" enables server cipher
preferences.

While server cipher selection may in some cases lead to a more secure
or performant cipher choice, there is some risk of interoperability
issues. In the past, some SSL clients have listed lower priority
ciphers that they did not implement correctly. If the server chooses a
cipher that the client prefers less, it may select a cipher whose
client implementation is flawed. Most notably Windows 2003 Microsoft
Exchange servers have flawed implementations of DES-CBC3-SHA, which
OpenSSL considers stronger than RC4-SHA. Enabling server cipher-suite
selection may create interoperability issues with Windows 2003
Microsoft Exchange clients.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.8 and later, in combination with
OpenSSL 0.9.7 and later.

tls_random_bytes (default: 32)
The number of bytes that tlsmgr(8) reads from $tls_random_source when
(re)seeding the in-memory pseudo random number generator (PRNG) pool.
The default of 32 bytes (256 bits) is good enough for 128bit symmetric
keys. If using EGD or a device file, a maximum of 255 bytes is read.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.

tls_random_exchange_name (default: see postconf -d output)
Name of the pseudo random number generator (PRNG) state file that is
maintained by tlsmgr(8). The file is created when it does not exist,
and its length is fixed at 1024 bytes.

As of version 2.5, Postfix no longer uses root privileges when opening
this file, and the default file location was changed from
${config_directory}/prng_exch to ${data_directory}/prng_exch. As a
migration aid, an attempt to open the file under a non-Postfix
directory is redirected to the Postfix-owned data_directory, and a
warning is logged.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.

tls_random_prng_update_period (default: 3600s)
The time between attempts by tlsmgr(8) to save the state of the pseudo
random number generator (PRNG) to the file specified with
$tls_random_exchange_name.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.

tls_random_reseed_period (default: 3600s)
The maximal time between attempts by tlsmgr(8) to re-seed the in-memory
pseudo random number generator (PRNG) pool from external sources. The
actual time between re-seeding attempts is calculated using the PRNG,
and is between 0 and the time specified.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.

tls_random_source (default: see postconf -d output)
The external entropy source for the in-memory tlsmgr(8) pseudo random
number generator (PRNG) pool. Be sure to specify a non-blocking source.
If this source is not a regular file, the entropy source type must be
prepended: egd:/path/to/egd_socket for a source with EGD compatible
socket interface, or dev:/path/to/device for a device file.

Note: on OpenBSD systems specify dev:/dev/arandom when dev:/dev/urandom
gives timeout errors.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.

tls_server_sni_maps (default: empty)
Optional lookup tables that map names received from remote SMTP clients
via the TLS Server Name Indication (SNI) extension to the appropriate
keys and certificate chains. This parameter is implemented in the
Postfix TLS library, and applies to both smtpd(8) and the SMTP server
mode of tlsproxy(8).

When this parameter is non-empty, the Postfix SMTP server enables SNI
extension processing, and logs SNI values that are invalid or don't
match an entry in the specified tables. When an entry does match, the
SNI name is logged as part of the connection summary at log levels 1
and higher.

The lookup key is either the verbatim SNI domain name or an ancestor
domain prefixed with a leading dot. For internationalized domains, the
lookup key must be in IDNA 2008 A-label form (as required in the TLS
SNI extension).

The syntax of the lookup value is the same as with the
smtp_tls_chain_files parameter (see there for additional details), but
here scoped to just TLS connections in which the client sends a
matching SNI domain name.

Example:

/usr/local/etc/postfix/main.cf:
#
# The indexed SNI table must be created with "postmap -F"
#
indexed = ${default_database_type}:${config_directory}/
tls_server_sni_maps = ${indexed}sni

/usr/local/etc/postfix/sni:
#
# The example.com domain has both an RSA and ECDSA certificate
# chain. The chain files MUST start with the private key,
# with the certificate chain next, starting with the leaf
# (server) certificate, and then the issuer certificates.
#
example.com /usr/local/etc/postfix/sni-chains/rsa2048.example.com.pem,
/usr/local/etc/postfix/sni-chains/ecdsa-p256.example.com.pem
#
# The example.net domain has a wildcard certificate, and two
# additional DNS names. So its certificate chain is also used
# with any subdomain, plus the additional names.
#
example.net /usr/local/etc/postfix/sni-chains/example.net.pem
.example.net /usr/local/etc/postfix/sni-chains/example.net.pem
example.info /usr/local/etc/postfix/sni-chains/example.net.pem
example.org /usr/local/etc/postfix/sni-chains/example.net.pem

Note that the SNI lookup tables should also have entries for the
domains that correspond to the Postfix SMTP server's default
certificate(s). This ensures that the remote SMTP client's TLS SNI
extension gets a positive response when it specifies one of the Postfix
SMTP server's default domains, and ensures that the Postfix SMTP server
will not log an SNI name mismatch for such a domain. The Postfix SMTP
server's default certificates are then only used when the client sends
no SNI or when it sends SNI with a domain that the server knows no
certificate(s) for.

The mapping from an SNI domain name to a certificate chain is indirect.
In the input source files for "cdb", "hash", "btree" or other tables
that are converted to on-disk indexed files via postmap(1), the value
specified for each key is a list of filenames. When postmap(1) is used
with the -F option, the generated table stores for each lookup key the
base64-encoded contents of the associated files. When querying tables
via postmap -Fq, the table value is decoded from base64, yielding the
original file content, plus a new line.

With "regexp", "pcre", "inline", "texthash", "static" and similar
tables that are interpreted at run-time, and don't have a separate
source format, the table value is again a list files, that are loaded
into memory when the table is opened.

With tables whose content is managed outside of Postfix, such as LDAP,
MySQL, PostgreSQL, socketmap and tcp, the value must be a concatenation
of the desired PEM keys and certificate chains, that is then further
encoded to yield a single-line base64 string. Creation of such tables
and secure storage (the value includes private key material) are
outside the responsibility of Postfix.

With "socketmap" and "tcp" the data will be transmitted in the clear,
and there is no query access control, so these are generally unsuitable
for storing SNI chains. With LDAP and SQL, you should restrict read
access and use TLS to protect the sensitive data in transit.

Typically there is only one private key and its chain of certificates
starting with the "leaf" certificate corresponding to that key, and
continuing with the appropriate intermediate issuer CA certificates,
with each certificate ideally followed by its issuer. Servers that
have keys and certificates for more than one algorithm (e.g. both an
RSA key and an ECDSA key, or even RSA, ECDSA and Ed25519) can use
multiple chains concatenated together, with the key always listed
before the corresponding certificates.

This feature is available in Postfix 3.4 and later.

tls_session_ticket_cipher (default: Postfix >= 3.0: aes-256-cbc, Postfix <
3.0: aes-128-cbc)
Algorithm used to encrypt RFC5077 TLS session tickets. This algorithm
must use CBC mode, have a 128-bit block size, and must have a key
length between 128 and 256 bits. The default is aes-256-cbc.
Overriding the default to choose a different algorithm is discouraged.

Setting this parameter empty disables session ticket support in the
Postfix SMTP server. Another way to disable session ticket support is
via the tls_ssl_options parameter.

This feature is available in Postfix 3.0 and later.

tls_ssl_options (default: empty)
List or bit-mask of OpenSSL options to enable.

The OpenSSL toolkit provides a set of options that applications can
enable to tune the OpenSSL behavior. Some of these work around bugs in
other implementations and are on by default. You can use the
tls_disable_workarounds parameter to selectively disable some or all of
the bug work-arounds, making OpenSSL more strict at the cost of
non-interoperability with SSL clients or servers that exhibit the bugs.

Other options are off by default, and typically enable or disable
features rather than bug work-arounds. These may be turned on (with
care) via the tls_ssl_options parameter. The value is a white-space or
comma separated list of named options chosen from the list below. The
names are not case-sensitive, you can use lower-case if you prefer.
The upper case values below match the corresponding macro name in the
ssl.h header file with the SSL_OP_ prefix removed. It is possible that
your OpenSSL version includes new options added after your Postfix
source code was last updated, in that case you can only enable one of
these via the hexadecimal syntax below.

You should only enable features via the hexadecimal mask when the need
to control the feature is critical (to deal with a new vulnerability or
a serious interoperability problem). Postfix DOES NOT promise
backwards compatible behavior with respect to the mask bits. A feature
enabled via the mask in one release may be enabled by other means in a
later release, and the mask bit will then be ignored. Therefore, use
of the hexadecimal mask is only a temporary measure until a new Postfix
or OpenSSL release provides a better solution.

If the value of the parameter is a hexadecimal long integer starting
with "0x", the options corresponding to the bits specified in its value
are enabled (see openssl/ssl.h and SSL_CTX_set_options(3)). You can
only enable options not already controlled by other Postfix settings.
For example, you cannot disable protocols or enable server cipher
preference. Do not attempt to enable all features by specifying
0xFFFFFFFF, this is unlikely to be a good idea. Some bug work-arounds
are also valid here, allowing them to be re-enabled if/when they're no
longer enabled by default. The supported values include:

ENABLE_MIDDLEBOX_COMPAT
Postfix >= 3.4. See SSL_CTX_set_options(3).

LEGACY_SERVER_CONNECT
See SSL_CTX_set_options(3).

NO_TICKET
Enabled by default when needed in fully-patched Postfix >= 2.7.
Not needed at all for Postfix >= 2.11, unless for some reason
you do not want to support TLS session resumption. Best not set
explicitly. See SSL_CTX_set_options(3).

NO_COMPRESSION
Disable SSL compression even if supported by the OpenSSL
library. Compression is CPU-intensive, and compression before
encryption does not always improve security.

NO_RENEGOTIATION
Postfix >= 3.4. This can reduce opportunities for a potential
CPU exhaustion attack. See SSL_CTX_set_options(3).

NO_SESSION_RESUMPTION_ON_RENEGOTIATION
Postfix >= 3.4. See SSL_CTX_set_options(3).

PRIORITIZE_CHACHA
Postfix >= 3.4. See SSL_CTX_set_options(3).

This feature is available in Postfix 2.11 and later.

tls_wildcard_matches_multiple_labels (default: yes)
Match multiple DNS labels with "*" in wildcard certificates.

Some mail service providers prepend the customer domain name to a base
domain for which they have a wildcard TLS certificate. For example,
the MX records for example.com hosted by example.net may be:

example.com. IN MX 0 example.com.mx1.example.net.
example.com. IN MX 0 example.com.mx2.example.net.

and the TLS certificate may be for "*.example.net". The "*" then
corresponds with multiple labels in the mail server domain name. While
multi-label wildcards are not widely supported, and are not blessed by
any standard, there is little to be gained by disallowing their use in
this context.

Notes:

o In a certificate name, the "*" is special only when it is used
as the first label.

o While Postfix (2.11 or later) can match "*" with multiple domain
name labels, other implementations likely will not.

o Earlier Postfix implementations behave as if
"tls_wildcard_matches_multiple_labels = no".

This feature is available in Postfix 2.11 and later.

tlsmgr_service_name (default: tlsmgr)
The name of the tlsmgr(8) service entry in master.cf. This service
maintains TLS session caches and other information in support of TLS.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.11 and later.

tlsproxy_client_CAfile (default: $smtp_tls_CAfile)
A file containing CA certificates of root CAs trusted to sign either
remote TLS server certificates or intermediate CA certificates. See
smtp_tls_CAfile for further details.

This feature is available in Postfix 3.4 and later.

tlsproxy_client_CApath (default: $smtp_tls_CApath)
Directory with PEM format Certification Authority certificates that the
Postfix tlsproxy(8) client uses to verify a remote TLS server
certificate. See smtp_tls_CApath for further details.

This feature is available in Postfix 3.4 and later.

tlsproxy_client_cert_file (default: $smtp_tls_cert_file)
File with the Postfix tlsproxy(8) client RSA certificate in PEM format.
See smtp_tls_cert_file for further details. The preferred way to
configure tlsproxy client keys and certificates is via the
"tlsproxy_client_chain_files" parameter.

This feature is available in Postfix 3.4 and later.

tlsproxy_client_chain_files (default: $smtp_tls_chain_files)
Files with the Postfix tlsproxy(8) client keys and certificate chains
in PEM format. See smtp_tls_chain_files for further details.

This feature is available in Postfix 3.4 and later.

tlsproxy_client_dcert_file (default: $smtp_tls_dcert_file)
File with the Postfix tlsproxy(8) client DSA certificate in PEM format.
See smtp_tls_dcert_file for further details. DSA is obsolete and should
not be used.

This feature is available in Postfix 3.4 and later.

tlsproxy_client_dkey_file (default: $smtp_tls_dkey_file)
File with the Postfix tlsproxy(8) client DSA private key in PEM format.
See smtp_tls_dkey_file for further details. DSA is obsolete and should
not be used.

This feature is available in Postfix 3.4 and later.

tlsproxy_client_eccert_file (default: $smtp_tls_eccert_file)
File with the Postfix tlsproxy(8) client ECDSA certificate in PEM
format. See smtp_tls_eccert_file for further details. The preferred way
to configure tlsproxy client keys and certificates is via the
"tlsproxy_client_chain_files" parameter.

This feature is available in Postfix 3.4 and later.

tlsproxy_client_eckey_file (default: $smtp_tls_eckey_file)
File with the Postfix tlsproxy(8) client ECDSA private key in PEM
format. See smtp_tls_eckey_file for further details. The preferred way
to configure tlsproxy client keys and certificates is via the
"tlsproxy_client_chain_files" parameter.

This feature is available in Postfix 3.4 and later.

tlsproxy_client_enforce_tls (default: $smtp_enforce_tls)
Enforcement mode: require that SMTP servers use TLS encryption. See
smtp_enforce_tls for further details. Use
tlsproxy_client_security_level instead.

This feature is available in Postfix 3.4 and later.

tlsproxy_client_fingerprint_digest (default: $smtp_tls_fingerprint_digest)
The message digest algorithm used to construct remote TLS server
certificate fingerprints. See smtp_tls_fingerprint_digest for further
details.

This feature is available in Postfix 3.4 and later.

tlsproxy_client_key_file (default: $smtp_tls_key_file)
File with the Postfix tlsproxy(8) client RSA private key in PEM format.
See smtp_tls_key_file for further details. The preferred way to
configure tlsproxy client keys and certificates is via the
"tlsproxy_client_chain_files" parameter.

This feature is available in Postfix 3.4 and later.

tlsproxy_client_level (default: $smtp_tls_security_level)
The default TLS security level for the Postfix tlsproxy(8) client. See
smtp_tls_security_level for further details.

This feature is available in Postfix 3.4 - 3.6. It was renamed to
tlsproxy_client_security_level in Postfix 3.7.

tlsproxy_client_loglevel (default: $smtp_tls_loglevel)
Enable additional Postfix tlsproxy(8) client logging of TLS activity.
See smtp_tls_loglevel for further details.

This feature is available in Postfix 3.4 and later.

tlsproxy_client_loglevel_parameter (default: smtp_tls_loglevel)
The name of the parameter that provides the tlsproxy_client_loglevel
value.

This feature is available in Postfix 3.4 and later.

tlsproxy_client_per_site (default: $smtp_tls_per_site)
Optional lookup tables with the Postfix tlsproxy(8) client TLS usage
policy by next-hop destination and by remote TLS server hostname. See
smtp_tls_per_site for further details.

This feature is available in Postfix 3.4 and later.

tlsproxy_client_policy (default: $smtp_tls_policy_maps)
Optional lookup tables with the Postfix tlsproxy(8) client TLS security
policy by next-hop destination. See smtp_tls_policy_maps for further
details.

This feature is available in Postfix 3.4 - 3.6. It was renamed to
tlsproxy_client_policy_maps in Postfix 3.7.

tlsproxy_client_policy_maps (default: $smtp_tls_policy_maps)
Optional lookup tables with the Postfix tlsproxy(8) client TLS security
policy by next-hop destination. See smtp_tls_policy_maps for further
details.

This feature is available in Postfix 3.7 and later. It was previously
called tlsproxy_client_policy.

tlsproxy_client_scert_verifydepth (default: $smtp_tls_scert_verifydepth)
The verification depth for remote TLS server certificates. See
smtp_tls_scert_verifydepth for further details.

This feature is available in Postfix 3.4 and later.

tlsproxy_client_security_level (default: $smtp_tls_security_level)
The default TLS security level for the Postfix tlsproxy(8) client. See
smtp_tls_security_level for further details.

This feature is available in Postfix 3.7 and later. It was previously
called tlsproxy_client_level.

tlsproxy_client_use_tls (default: $smtp_use_tls)
Opportunistic mode: use TLS when a remote server announces TLS support.
See smtp_use_tls for further details. Use
tlsproxy_client_security_level instead.

This feature is available in Postfix 3.4 and later.

tlsproxy_enforce_tls (default: $smtpd_enforce_tls)
Mandatory TLS: announce STARTTLS support to remote SMTP clients, and
require that clients use TLS encryption. See smtpd_enforce_tls for
further details. Use tlsproxy_tls_security_level instead.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.8 and later.

tlsproxy_service_name (default: tlsproxy)
The name of the tlsproxy(8) service entry in master.cf. This service
performs plaintext <=> TLS ciphertext conversion.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.8 and later.

tlsproxy_tls_CAfile (default: $smtpd_tls_CAfile)
A file containing (PEM format) CA certificates of root CAs trusted to
sign either remote SMTP client certificates or intermediate CA
certificates. See smtpd_tls_CAfile for further details.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.8 and later.

tlsproxy_tls_CApath (default: $smtpd_tls_CApath)
A directory containing (PEM format) CA certificates of root CAs trusted
to sign either remote SMTP client certificates or intermediate CA
certificates. See smtpd_tls_CApath for further details.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.8 and later.

tlsproxy_tls_always_issue_session_ids (default:
$smtpd_tls_always_issue_session_ids)
Force the Postfix tlsproxy(8) server to issue a TLS session id, even
when TLS session caching is turned off. See
smtpd_tls_always_issue_session_ids for further details.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.8 and later.

tlsproxy_tls_ask_ccert (default: $smtpd_tls_ask_ccert)
Ask a remote SMTP client for a client certificate. See
smtpd_tls_ask_ccert for further details.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.8 and later.

tlsproxy_tls_ccert_verifydepth (default: $smtpd_tls_ccert_verifydepth)
The verification depth for remote SMTP client certificates. A depth of
1 is sufficient if the issuing CA is listed in a local CA file. See
smtpd_tls_ccert_verifydepth for further details.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.8 and later.

tlsproxy_tls_cert_file (default: $smtpd_tls_cert_file)
File with the Postfix tlsproxy(8) server RSA certificate in PEM format.
This file may also contain the Postfix tlsproxy(8) server private RSA
key. See smtpd_tls_cert_file for further details. With Postfix >= 3.4
the preferred way to configure tlsproxy server keys and certificates is
via the "tlsproxy_tls_chain_files" parameter.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.8 and later.

tlsproxy_tls_chain_files (default: $smtpd_tls_chain_files)
Files with the Postfix tlsproxy(8) server keys and certificate chains
in PEM format. See smtpd_tls_chain_files for further details.

This feature is available in Postfix 3.4 and later.

tlsproxy_tls_ciphers (default: $smtpd_tls_ciphers)
The minimum TLS cipher grade that the Postfix tlsproxy(8) server will
use with opportunistic TLS encryption. See smtpd_tls_ciphers for
further details.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.8 and later.

tlsproxy_tls_dcert_file (default: $smtpd_tls_dcert_file)
File with the Postfix tlsproxy(8) server DSA certificate in PEM format.
This file may also contain the Postfix tlsproxy(8) server private DSA
key. DSA is obsolete and should not be used. See smtpd_tls_dcert_file
for further details.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.8 and later.

tlsproxy_tls_dh1024_param_file (default: $smtpd_tls_dh1024_param_file)
File with DH parameters that the Postfix tlsproxy(8) server should use
with non-export EDH ciphers. See smtpd_tls_dh1024_param_file for
further details.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.8 and later.

tlsproxy_tls_dh512_param_file (default: $smtpd_tls_dh512_param_file)
File with DH parameters that the Postfix tlsproxy(8) server should use
with export-grade EDH ciphers. See smtpd_tls_dh512_param_file for
further details. The default SMTP server cipher grade is "medium" with
Postfix releases after the middle of 2015, and as a result export-grade
cipher suites are by default not used.

With Postfix >= 3.6 export-grade Diffie-Hellman key exchange is no
longer supported, and this parameter is silently ignored.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.8 and later.

tlsproxy_tls_dkey_file (default: $smtpd_tls_dkey_file)
File with the Postfix tlsproxy(8) server DSA private key in PEM format.
This file may be combined with the Postfix tlsproxy(8) server DSA
certificate file specified with $smtpd_tls_dcert_file. DSA is obsolete
and should not be used. See smtpd_tls_dkey_file for further details.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.8 and later.

tlsproxy_tls_eccert_file (default: $smtpd_tls_eccert_file)
File with the Postfix tlsproxy(8) server ECDSA certificate in PEM
format. This file may also contain the Postfix tlsproxy(8) server
private ECDSA key. See smtpd_tls_eccert_file for further details.
With Postfix >= 3.4 the preferred way to configure tlsproxy server keys
and certificates is via the "tlsproxy_tls_chain_files" parameter.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.8 and later.

tlsproxy_tls_eckey_file (default: $smtpd_tls_eckey_file)
File with the Postfix tlsproxy(8) server ECDSA private key in PEM
format. This file may be combined with the Postfix tlsproxy(8) server
ECDSA certificate file specified with $smtpd_tls_eccert_file. See
smtpd_tls_eckey_file for further details. With Postfix >= 3.4 the
preferred way to configure tlsproxy server keys and certificates is via
the "tlsproxy_tls_chain_files" parameter.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.8 and later.

tlsproxy_tls_eecdh_grade (default: $smtpd_tls_eecdh_grade)
The Postfix tlsproxy(8) server security grade for ephemeral
elliptic-curve Diffie-Hellman (EECDH) key exchange. See
smtpd_tls_eecdh_grade for further details.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.8 and later.

tlsproxy_tls_exclude_ciphers (default: $smtpd_tls_exclude_ciphers)
List of ciphers or cipher types to exclude from the tlsproxy(8) server
cipher list at all TLS security levels. See smtpd_tls_exclude_ciphers
for further details.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.8 and later.

tlsproxy_tls_fingerprint_digest (default: $smtpd_tls_fingerprint_digest)
The message digest algorithm to construct remote SMTP
client-certificate fingerprints. See smtpd_tls_fingerprint_digest for
further details.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.8 and later.

tlsproxy_tls_key_file (default: $smtpd_tls_key_file)
File with the Postfix tlsproxy(8) server RSA private key in PEM format.
This file may be combined with the Postfix tlsproxy(8) server RSA
certificate file specified with $smtpd_tls_cert_file. See
smtpd_tls_key_file for further details. With Postfix >= 3.4 the
preferred way to configure tlsproxy server keys and certificates is via
the "tlsproxy_tls_chain_files" parameter.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.8 and later.

tlsproxy_tls_loglevel (default: $smtpd_tls_loglevel)
Enable additional Postfix tlsproxy(8) server logging of TLS activity.
Each logging level also includes the information that is logged at a
lower logging level. See smtpd_tls_loglevel for further details.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.8 and later.

tlsproxy_tls_mandatory_ciphers (default: $smtpd_tls_mandatory_ciphers)
The minimum TLS cipher grade that the Postfix tlsproxy(8) server will
use with mandatory TLS encryption. See smtpd_tls_mandatory_ciphers for
further details.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.8 and later.

tlsproxy_tls_mandatory_exclude_ciphers (default:
$smtpd_tls_mandatory_exclude_ciphers)
Additional list of ciphers or cipher types to exclude from the
tlsproxy(8) server cipher list at mandatory TLS security levels. See
smtpd_tls_mandatory_exclude_ciphers for further details.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.8 and later.

tlsproxy_tls_mandatory_protocols (default: $smtpd_tls_mandatory_protocols)
The SSL/TLS protocols accepted by the Postfix tlsproxy(8) server with
mandatory TLS encryption. If the list is empty, the server supports all
available SSL/TLS protocol versions. See smtpd_tls_mandatory_protocols
for further details.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.8 and later.

tlsproxy_tls_protocols (default: $smtpd_tls_protocols)
List of TLS protocols that the Postfix tlsproxy(8) server will exclude
or include with opportunistic TLS encryption. See smtpd_tls_protocols
for further details.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.8 and later.

tlsproxy_tls_req_ccert (default: $smtpd_tls_req_ccert)
With mandatory TLS encryption, require a trusted remote SMTP client
certificate in order to allow TLS connections to proceed. See
smtpd_tls_req_ccert for further details.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.8 and later.

tlsproxy_tls_security_level (default: $smtpd_tls_security_level)
The SMTP TLS security level for the Postfix tlsproxy(8) server; when a
non-empty value is specified, this overrides the obsolete parameters
smtpd_use_tls and smtpd_enforce_tls. See smtpd_tls_security_level for
further details.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.8 and later.

tlsproxy_tls_session_cache_timeout (default: $smtpd_tls_session_cache_timeout)
Obsolete expiration time of Postfix tlsproxy(8) server TLS session
cache information. Since the cache is shared with smtpd(8) and managed
by tlsmgr(8), there is only one expiration time for the SMTP server
cache shared by all three services, namely
smtpd_tls_session_cache_timeout.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.8 and later.

tlsproxy_use_tls (default: $smtpd_use_tls)
Opportunistic TLS: announce STARTTLS support to remote SMTP clients,
but do not require that clients use TLS encryption. See smtpd_use_tls
for further details. Use tlsproxy_tls_security_level instead.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.8 and later.

tlsproxy_watchdog_timeout (default: 10s)
How much time a tlsproxy(8) process may take to process local or remote
I/O before it is terminated by a built-in watchdog timer. This is a
safety mechanism that prevents tlsproxy(8) from becoming non-responsive
due to a bug in Postfix itself or in system software. To avoid false
alarms and unnecessary cache corruption this limit cannot be set under
10s.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.8 and later

trace_service_name (default: trace)
The name of the trace service. This service is implemented by the
bounce(8) daemon and maintains a record of mail deliveries and produces
a mail delivery report when verbose delivery is requested with
"sendmail -v".

This feature is available in Postfix 2.1 and later.

transport_delivery_slot_cost (default: $default_delivery_slot_cost)
A transport-specific override for the default_delivery_slot_cost
parameter value, where transport is the master.cf name of the message
delivery transport.

Note: transport_delivery_slot_cost parameters will not show up in
"postconf" command output before Postfix version 2.9. This limitation
applies to many parameters whose name is a combination of a master.cf
service name and a built-in suffix (in this case:
"_delivery_slot_cost").

transport_delivery_slot_discount (default: $default_delivery_slot_discount)
A transport-specific override for the default_delivery_slot_discount
parameter value, where transport is the master.cf name of the message
delivery transport.

Note: transport_delivery_slot_discount parameters will not show up in
"postconf" command output before Postfix version 2.9. This limitation
applies to many parameters whose name is a combination of a master.cf
service name and a built-in suffix (in this case:
"_delivery_slot_discount").

transport_delivery_slot_loan (default: $default_delivery_slot_loan)
A transport-specific override for the default_delivery_slot_loan
parameter value, where transport is the master.cf name of the message
delivery transport.

Note: transport_delivery_slot_loan parameters will not show up in
"postconf" command output before Postfix version 2.9. This limitation
applies to many parameters whose name is a combination of a master.cf
service name and a built-in suffix (in this case:
"_delivery_slot_loan").

transport_destination_concurrency_failed_cohort_limit (default:
$default_destination_concurrency_failed_cohort_limit)
A transport-specific override for the
default_destination_concurrency_failed_cohort_limit parameter value,
where transport is the master.cf name of the message delivery
transport.

Note: some transport_destination_concurrency_failed_cohort_limit
parameters will not show up in "postconf" command output before Postfix
version 2.9. This limitation applies to many parameters whose name is
a combination of a master.cf service name and a built-in suffix (in
this case: "_destination_concurrency_failed_cohort_limit").

This feature is available in Postfix 2.5 and later.

transport_destination_concurrency_limit (default:
$default_destination_concurrency_limit)
A transport-specific override for the
default_destination_concurrency_limit parameter value, where transport
is the master.cf name of the message delivery transport.

Note: some transport_destination_concurrency_limit parameters will not
show up in "postconf" command output before Postfix version 2.9. This
limitation applies to many parameters whose name is a combination of a
master.cf service name and a built-in suffix (in this case:
"_destination_concurrency_limit").

transport_destination_concurrency_negative_feedback (default:
$default_destination_concurrency_negative_feedback)
A transport-specific override for the
default_destination_concurrency_negative_feedback parameter value,
where transport is the master.cf name of the message delivery
transport.

Note: some transport_destination_concurrency_negative_feedback
parameters will not show up in "postconf" command output before Postfix
version 2.9. This limitation applies to many parameters whose name is
a combination of a master.cf service name and a built-in suffix (in
this case: "_destination_concurrency_negative_feedback").

This feature is available in Postfix 2.5 and later.

transport_destination_concurrency_positive_feedback (default:
$default_destination_concurrency_positive_feedback)
A transport-specific override for the
default_destination_concurrency_positive_feedback parameter value,
where transport is the master.cf name of the message delivery
transport.

Note: some transport_destination_concurrency_positive_feedback
parameters will not show up in "postconf" command output before Postfix
version 2.9. This limitation applies to many parameters whose name is
a combination of a master.cf service name and a built-in suffix (in
this case: "_destination_concurrency_positive_feedback").

This feature is available in Postfix 2.5 and later.

transport_destination_rate_delay (default: $default_destination_rate_delay)
A transport-specific override for the default_destination_rate_delay
parameter value, where transport is the master.cf name of the message
delivery transport.

Note: some transport_destination_rate_delay parameters will not show up
in "postconf" command output before Postfix version 2.9. This
limitation applies to many parameters whose name is a combination of a
master.cf service name and a built-in suffix (in this case:
"_destination_rate_delay").

This feature is available in Postfix 2.5 and later.

transport_destination_recipient_limit (default:
$default_destination_recipient_limit)
A transport-specific override for the
default_destination_recipient_limit parameter value, where transport is
the master.cf name of the message delivery transport.

Note: some transport_destination_recipient_limit parameters will not
show up in "postconf" command output before Postfix version 2.9. This
limitation applies to many parameters whose name is a combination of a
master.cf service name and a built-in suffix (in this case:
"_destination_recipient_limit").

transport_extra_recipient_limit (default: $default_extra_recipient_limit)
A transport-specific override for the default_extra_recipient_limit
parameter value, where transport is the master.cf name of the message
delivery transport.

Note: transport_extra_recipient_limit parameters will not show up in
"postconf" command output before Postfix version 2.9. This limitation
applies to many parameters whose name is a combination of a master.cf
service name and a built-in suffix (in this case:
"_extra_recipient_limit").

transport_initial_destination_concurrency (default:
$initial_destination_concurrency)
A transport-specific override for the initial_destination_concurrency
parameter value, where transport is the master.cf name of the message
delivery transport.

Note: some transport_initial_destination_concurrency parameters will
not show up in "postconf" command output before Postfix version 2.9.
This limitation applies to many parameters whose name is a combination
of a master.cf service name and a built-in suffix (in this case:
"_initial_destination_concurrency").

This feature is available in Postfix 2.5 and later.

transport_maps (default: empty)
Optional lookup tables with mappings from recipient address to (message
delivery transport, next-hop destination). See transport(5) for
details.

Specify zero or more "type:table" lookup tables, separated by
whitespace or comma. Tables will be searched in the specified order
until a match is found. If you use this feature with local files, run
"postmap /usr/local/etc/postfix/transport" after making a change.

Pattern matching of domain names is controlled by the presence or
absence of "transport_maps" in the parent_domain_matches_subdomains
parameter value.

For safety reasons, as of Postfix 2.3 this feature does not allow
$number substitutions in regular expression maps.

Examples:

transport_maps = dbm:$config_directory/transport
transport_maps = hash:$config_directory/transport

transport_minimum_delivery_slots (default: $default_minimum_delivery_slots)
A transport-specific override for the default_minimum_delivery_slots
parameter value, where transport is the master.cf name of the message
delivery transport.

Note: transport_minimum_delivery_slots parameters will not show up in
"postconf" command output before Postfix version 2.9. This limitation
applies to many parameters whose name is a combination of a master.cf
service name and a built-in suffix (in this case:
"_minimum_delivery_slots").

transport_recipient_limit (default: $default_recipient_limit)
A transport-specific override for the default_recipient_limit parameter
value, where transport is the master.cf name of the message delivery
transport.

Note: some transport_recipient_limit parameters will not show up in
"postconf" command output before Postfix version 2.9. This limitation
applies to many parameters whose name is a combination of a master.cf
service name and a built-in suffix (in this case: "_recipient_limit").

transport_recipient_refill_delay (default: $default_recipient_refill_delay)
A transport-specific override for the default_recipient_refill_delay
parameter value, where transport is the master.cf name of the message
delivery transport.

Note: transport_recipient_refill_delay parameters will not show up in
"postconf" command output before Postfix version 2.9. This limitation
applies to many parameters whose name is a combination of a master.cf
service name and a built-in suffix (in this case:
"_recipient_refill_delay").

This feature is available in Postfix 2.4 and later.

transport_recipient_refill_limit (default: $default_recipient_refill_limit)
A transport-specific override for the default_recipient_refill_limit
parameter value, where transport is the master.cf name of the message
delivery transport.

Note: transport_recipient_refill_limit parameters will not show up in
"postconf" command output before Postfix version 2.9. This limitation
applies to many parameters whose name is a combination of a master.cf
service name and a built-in suffix (in this case:
"_recipient_refill_limit").

This feature is available in Postfix 2.4 and later.

transport_retry_time (default: 60s)
The time between attempts by the Postfix queue manager to contact a
malfunctioning message delivery transport.

transport_time_limit (default: $command_time_limit)
A transport-specific override for the command_time_limit parameter
value, where transport is the master.cf name of the message delivery
transport.

Note: transport_time_limit parameters will not show up in "postconf"
command output before Postfix version 2.9. This limitation applies to
many parameters whose name is a combination of a master.cf service name
and a built-in suffix (in this case: "_time_limit").

transport_transport_rate_delay (default: $default_transport_rate_delay)
A transport-specific override for the default_transport_rate_delay
parameter value, where the initial transport in the parameter name is
the master.cf name of the message delivery transport.

Note: transport_transport_rate_delay parameters will not show up in
"postconf" command output before Postfix version 2.9. This limitation
applies to many parameters whose name is a combination of a master.cf
service name and a built-in suffix (in this case:
"_transport_rate_delay").

trigger_timeout (default: 10s)
The time limit for sending a trigger to a Postfix daemon (for example,
the pickup(8) or qmgr(8) daemon). This time limit prevents programs
from getting stuck when the mail system is under heavy load.

undisclosed_recipients_header (default: see postconf -d output)
Message header that the Postfix cleanup(8) server inserts when a
message contains no To: or Cc: message header. With Postfix 2.8 and
later, the default value is empty. With Postfix 2.4-2.7, specify an
empty value to disable this feature.

Example:

# Default value before Postfix 2.8.
# Note: the ":" and ";" are both required.
undisclosed_recipients_header = To: undisclosed-recipients:;

unknown_address_reject_code (default: 450)
The numerical response code when the Postfix SMTP server rejects a
sender or recipient address because its domain is unknown. This is one
of the possible replies from the restrictions
reject_unknown_sender_domain and reject_unknown_recipient_domain.

Do not change this unless you have a complete understanding of RFC
5321.

unknown_address_tempfail_action (default: $reject_tempfail_action)
The Postfix SMTP server's action when reject_unknown_sender_domain or
reject_unknown_recipient_domain fail due to a temporary error
condition. Specify "defer" to defer the remote SMTP client request
immediately. With the default "defer_if_permit" action, the Postfix
SMTP server continues to look for opportunities to reject mail, and
defers the client request only if it would otherwise be accepted.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.6 and later.

unknown_client_reject_code (default: 450)
The numerical Postfix SMTP server response code when a client without
valid address <=> name mapping is rejected by the
reject_unknown_client_hostname restriction. The SMTP server always
replies with 450 when the mapping failed due to a temporary error
condition.

Do not change this unless you have a complete understanding of RFC
5321.

unknown_helo_hostname_tempfail_action (default: $reject_tempfail_action)
The Postfix SMTP server's action when reject_unknown_helo_hostname
fails due to a temporary error condition. Specify "defer" to defer the
remote SMTP client request immediately. With the default
"defer_if_permit" action, the Postfix SMTP server continues to look for
opportunities to reject mail, and defers the client request only if it
would otherwise be accepted.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.6 and later.

unknown_hostname_reject_code (default: 450)
The numerical Postfix SMTP server response code when the hostname
specified with the HELO or EHLO command is rejected by the
reject_unknown_helo_hostname restriction.

Do not change this unless you have a complete understanding of RFC
5321.

unknown_local_recipient_reject_code (default: 550)
The numerical Postfix SMTP server response code when a recipient
address is local, and $local_recipient_maps specifies a list of lookup
tables that does not match the recipient. A recipient address is local
when its domain matches $mydestination, $proxy_interfaces or
$inet_interfaces.

The default setting is 550 (reject mail) but it is safer to initially
use 450 (try again later) so you have time to find out if your
local_recipient_maps settings are OK.

Example:

unknown_local_recipient_reject_code = 450

This feature is available in Postfix 2.0 and later.

unknown_relay_recipient_reject_code (default: 550)
The numerical Postfix SMTP server reply code when a recipient address
matches $relay_domains, and relay_recipient_maps specifies a list of
lookup tables that does not match the recipient address.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.0 and later.

unknown_virtual_alias_reject_code (default: 550)
The Postfix SMTP server reply code when a recipient address matches
$virtual_alias_domains, and $virtual_alias_maps specifies a list of
lookup tables that does not match the recipient address.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.0 and later.

unknown_virtual_mailbox_reject_code (default: 550)
The Postfix SMTP server reply code when a recipient address matches
$virtual_mailbox_domains, and $virtual_mailbox_maps specifies a list of
lookup tables that does not match the recipient address.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.0 and later.

unverified_recipient_defer_code (default: 450)
The numerical Postfix SMTP server response when a recipient address
probe fails due to a temporary error condition.

Unlike elsewhere in Postfix, you can specify 250 in order to accept the
address anyway.

Do not change this unless you have a complete understanding of RFC
5321.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.6 and later.

unverified_recipient_reject_code (default: 450)
The numerical Postfix SMTP server response when a recipient address is
rejected by the reject_unverified_recipient restriction.

Unlike elsewhere in Postfix, you can specify 250 in order to accept the
address anyway.

Do not change this unless you have a complete understanding of RFC
5321.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.1 and later.

unverified_recipient_reject_reason (default: empty)
The Postfix SMTP server's reply when rejecting mail with
reject_unverified_recipient. Do not include the numeric SMTP reply code
or the enhanced status code. By default, the response includes actual
address verification details.

Example:

unverified_recipient_reject_reason = Recipient address lookup failed

This feature is available in Postfix 2.6 and later.

unverified_recipient_tempfail_action (default: $reject_tempfail_action)
The Postfix SMTP server's action when reject_unverified_recipient fails
due to a temporary error condition. Specify "defer" to defer the remote
SMTP client request immediately. With the default "defer_if_permit"
action, the Postfix SMTP server continues to look for opportunities to
reject mail, and defers the client request only if it would otherwise
be accepted.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.6 and later.

unverified_sender_defer_code (default: 450)
The numerical Postfix SMTP server response code when a sender address
probe fails due to a temporary error condition.

Unlike elsewhere in Postfix, you can specify 250 in order to accept the
address anyway.

Do not change this unless you have a complete understanding of RFC
5321.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.6 and later.

unverified_sender_reject_code (default: 450)
The numerical Postfix SMTP server response code when a recipient
address is rejected by the reject_unverified_sender restriction.

Unlike elsewhere in Postfix, you can specify 250 in order to accept the
address anyway.

Do not change this unless you have a complete understanding of RFC
5321.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.1 and later.

unverified_sender_reject_reason (default: empty)
The Postfix SMTP server's reply when rejecting mail with
reject_unverified_sender. Do not include the numeric SMTP reply code or
the enhanced status code. By default, the response includes actual
address verification details.

Example:

unverified_sender_reject_reason = Sender address lookup failed

This feature is available in Postfix 2.6 and later.

unverified_sender_tempfail_action (default: $reject_tempfail_action)
The Postfix SMTP server's action when reject_unverified_sender fails
due to a temporary error condition. Specify "defer" to defer the remote
SMTP client request immediately. With the default "defer_if_permit"
action, the Postfix SMTP server continues to look for opportunities to
reject mail, and defers the client request only if it would otherwise
be accepted.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.6 and later.

use_srv_lookup (default: empty)
Enables discovery for the specified service(s) using DNS SRV records.
For example, with "use_srv_lookup = submission" and "relayhost =
example.com:submission", the Postfix SMTP client will look up DNS SRV
records for _submission._tcp.example.com, and will relay email through
the hosts and ports that are specified with those records. See RFC 2782
for details of the host selection process.

Specify zero or more service names separated by comma and/or
whitespace. Any name in the services(5) database may be specified,
though in practice only submission, submissions, and smtp make sense.

When SRV record lookup is enabled with use_srv_lookup, you can enclose
a domain name in "[]" to force IP address lookup instead of SRV record
lookup.

Example 1: MUA-to-MTA submission using SRV record lookup for the
"submission" service for domain "example.com". This uses the default
SMTP delivery agent with STARTTLS, and looks up SRV records for
"_submission._tcp.example.com".

/usr/local/etc/postfix/main.cf:
use_srv_lookup = submission
relayhost = example.com:submission
smtp_tls_security_level = may
...see SASL_README for sasl configuration...

Example 2: MUA-to-MTA submission using SRV record lookup for the
"submissions" service for domain "example.org". This uses a dedicated
SMTP delivery agent (smtp-wraptls) with tls_wrappermode turned on, and
looks up SRV records for "_submissions._tcp.example.org".

Note: specify the older name "smtps" instead of "submissions" when a
provider has DNS SRV records like "_smtps._tcp.example.org" instead of
"_submissions._tcp.example.org".

/usr/local/etc/postfix/main.cf:
use_srv_lookup = submissions
default_transport = smtp-wraptls:example.org:submissions
...see SASL_README for sasl configuration...

/usr/local/etc/postfix/master.cf:
smtp-wraptls unix ... ... ... ... ... smtp
-o { smtp_tls_wrappermode = yes }
-o { smtp_tls_security_level = encrypt }

Example 3: Sender-dependent selection for a combination of MUA-to-MTA
submission services. This combines examples 1 and 2 with examples of
how to disable SRV and look up IP address records for
"smtp-relay.example.net" and "smtp-relay.other.example". Again,
specify the older name "smtps" instead of "submissions" when a provider
has DNS SRV records like "_smtps._tcp.example.org" instead of
"_submissions._tcp.example.org".

/usr/local/etc/postfix/main.cf:
use_srv_lookup = submission, submissions
sender_dependent_default_transport_maps = inline:{
# Destinations that support SRV record lookup.
{ user1@example.com = smtp:example.com:submission }
{ user2@example.org = smtp-wraptls:example.org:submissions }
# Use [destination] to force IP address lookups.
{ user3@example.net = smtp:[smtp-relay.example.net]:submission }
{ user4@other.example =
smtp-wraptls:[smtp-relay.other.example]:submissions } }
...see SASL_README for sasl configuration...

Example 4: MTA-to-MTA traffic, using SRV record lookup for the SMTP
service. This is useful for Postfix tests, and may be useful in
environments where ports are dynamically assigned to servers.

/usr/local/etc/postfix/main.cf:
use_srv_lookup = smtp
# Fall back to MX record lookup when SRV records are unavailable.
#allow_srv_lookup_fallback = yes
#ignore_srv_lookup_error = yes

This feature is available in Postfix 3.8 and later.

verp_delimiter_filter (default: -=+)
The characters Postfix accepts as VERP delimiter characters on the
Postfix sendmail(1) command line and in SMTP commands.

This feature is available in Postfix 1.1 and later.

virtual_alias_address_length_limit (default: 1000)
The maximal length of an email address after virtual alias expansion.
This stops virtual aliasing loops that increase the address length
exponentially.

This feature is available in Postfix 3.0 and later.

virtual_alias_domains (default: $virtual_alias_maps)
Postfix is the final destination for the specified list of virtual
alias domains, that is, domains for which all addresses are aliased to
addresses in other local or remote domains. The SMTP server validates
recipient addresses with $virtual_alias_maps and rejects non-existent
recipients. See also the virtual alias domain class in the
ADDRESS_CLASS_README file

This feature is available in Postfix 2.0 and later. The default value
is backwards compatible with Postfix version 1.1.

The default value is $virtual_alias_maps so that you can keep all
information about virtual alias domains in one place. If you have many
users, it is better to separate information that changes more
frequently (virtual address -> local or remote address mapping) from
information that changes less frequently (the list of virtual domain
names).

Specify a list of host or domain names, "/file/name" or "type:table"
patterns, separated by commas and/or whitespace. A "/file/name" pattern
is replaced by its contents; a "type:table" lookup table is matched
when a table entry matches a host or domain name (the lookup result is
ignored). Continue long lines by starting the next line with
whitespace. Specify "!pattern" to exclude a host or domain name from
the list. The form "!/file/name" is supported only in Postfix version
2.4 and later.

See also the VIRTUAL_README and ADDRESS_CLASS_README documents for
further information.

Example:

virtual_alias_domains = virtual1.tld virtual2.tld

virtual_alias_expansion_limit (default: 1000)
The maximal number of addresses that virtual alias expansion produces
from each original recipient.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.1 and later.

virtual_alias_maps (default: $virtual_maps)
Optional lookup tables that alias specific mail addresses or domains to
other local or remote addresses. The table format and lookups are
documented in virtual(5). For an overview of Postfix address
manipulations see the ADDRESS_REWRITING_README document.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.0 and later. The default value
is backwards compatible with Postfix version 1.1.

Specify zero or more "type:name" lookup tables, separated by whitespace
or comma. Tables will be searched in the specified order until a match
is found. Note: these lookups are recursive.

If you use this feature with indexed files, run "postmap
/usr/local/etc/postfix/virtual" after changing the file.

Examples:

virtual_alias_maps = dbm:$config_directory/virtual
virtual_alias_maps = hash:$config_directory/virtual

virtual_alias_recursion_limit (default: 1000)
The maximal nesting depth of virtual alias expansion. Currently the
recursion limit is applied only to the left branch of the expansion
graph, so the depth of the tree can in the worst case reach the sum of
the expansion and recursion limits. This may change in the future.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.1 and later.

virtual_delivery_status_filter (default: $default_delivery_status_filter)
Optional filter for the virtual(8) delivery agent to change the
delivery status code or explanatory text of successful or unsuccessful
deliveries. See default_delivery_status_filter for details.

This feature is available in Postfix 3.0 and later.

virtual_destination_concurrency_limit (default:
$default_destination_concurrency_limit)
The maximal number of parallel deliveries to the same destination via
the virtual message delivery transport. This limit is enforced by the
queue manager. The message delivery transport name is the first field
in the entry in the master.cf file.

virtual_destination_recipient_limit (default:
$default_destination_recipient_limit)
The maximal number of recipients per message for the virtual message
delivery transport. This limit is enforced by the queue manager. The
message delivery transport name is the first field in the entry in the
master.cf file.

Setting this parameter to a value of 1 changes the meaning of
virtual_destination_concurrency_limit from concurrency per domain into
concurrency per recipient.

virtual_gid_maps (default: empty)
Lookup tables with the per-recipient group ID for virtual(8) mailbox
delivery.

This parameter is specific to the virtual(8) delivery agent. It does
not apply when mail is delivered with a different mail delivery
program.

Specify zero or more "type:name" lookup tables, separated by whitespace
or comma. Tables will be searched in the specified order until a match
is found.

In a lookup table, specify a left-hand side of "@domain.tld" to match
any user in the specified domain that does not have a specific
"user@domain.tld" entry.

When a recipient address has an optional address extension
(user+foo@domain.tld), the virtual(8) delivery agent looks up the full
address first, and when the lookup fails, it looks up the unextended
address (user@domain.tld).

Note 1: for security reasons, the virtual(8) delivery agent disallows
regular expression substitution of $1 etc. in regular expression lookup
tables, because that would open a security hole.

Note 2: for security reasons, the virtual(8) delivery agent will
silently ignore requests to use the proxymap(8) server. Instead it will
open the table directly. Before Postfix version 2.2, the virtual(8)
delivery agent will terminate with a fatal error.

virtual_mailbox_base (default: empty)
A prefix that the virtual(8) delivery agent prepends to all pathname
results from $virtual_mailbox_maps table lookups. This is a safety
measure to ensure that an out of control map doesn't litter the file
system with mailboxes. While virtual_mailbox_base could be set to "/",
this setting isn't recommended.

This parameter is specific to the virtual(8) delivery agent. It does
not apply when mail is delivered with a different mail delivery
program.

Example:

virtual_mailbox_base = /var/mail

virtual_mailbox_domains (default: $virtual_mailbox_maps)
Postfix is the final destination for the specified list of domains;
mail is delivered via the $virtual_transport mail delivery transport.
By default this is the Postfix virtual(8) delivery agent. The SMTP
server validates recipient addresses with $virtual_mailbox_maps and
rejects mail for non-existent recipients. See also the virtual mailbox
domain class in the ADDRESS_CLASS_README file.

This parameter expects the same syntax as the mydestination
configuration parameter.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.0 and later. The default value
is backwards compatible with Postfix version 1.1.

virtual_mailbox_limit (default: 51200000)
The maximal size in bytes of an individual virtual(8) mailbox or
maildir file, or zero (no limit).

This parameter is specific to the virtual(8) delivery agent. It does
not apply when mail is delivered with a different mail delivery
program.

virtual_mailbox_lock (default: see postconf -d output)
How to lock a UNIX-style virtual(8) mailbox before attempting delivery.
For a list of available file locking methods, use the "postconf -l"
command.

This parameter is specific to the virtual(8) delivery agent. It does
not apply when mail is delivered with a different mail delivery
program.

This setting is ignored with maildir style delivery, because such
deliveries are safe without application-level locks.

Note 1: the dotlock method requires that the recipient UID or GID has
write access to the parent directory of the recipient's mailbox file.

Note 2: the default setting of this parameter is system dependent.

virtual_mailbox_maps (default: empty)
Optional lookup tables with all valid addresses in the domains that
match $virtual_mailbox_domains.

Specify zero or more "type:name" lookup tables, separated by whitespace
or comma. Tables will be searched in the specified order until a match
is found.

In a lookup table, specify a left-hand side of "@domain.tld" to match
any user in the specified domain that does not have a specific
"user@domain.tld" entry.

With the default "virtual_mailbox_domains = $virtual_mailbox_maps",
lookup tables also need entries with a left-hand side of "domain.tld"
to satisfy virtual_mailbox_domain lookups (the right-hand side is
required but will not be used).

The remainder of this text is specific to the virtual(8) delivery
agent. It does not apply when mail is delivered with a different mail
delivery program.

The virtual(8) delivery agent uses this table to look up the
per-recipient mailbox or maildir pathname. If the lookup result ends
in a slash ("/"), maildir-style delivery is carried out, otherwise the
path is assumed to specify a UNIX-style mailbox file. Note that
$virtual_mailbox_base is unconditionally prepended to this path.

Note 1: for security reasons, the virtual(8) delivery agent disallows
regular expression substitution of $1 etc. in regular expression lookup
tables, because that would open a security hole.

virtual_maps (default: empty)
Optional lookup tables with a) names of domains for which all addresses
are aliased to addresses in other local or remote domains, and b)
addresses that are aliased to addresses in other local or remote
domains. Available before Postfix version 2.0. With Postfix version
2.0 and later, this is replaced by separate controls:
virtual_alias_domains and virtual_alias_maps.

virtual_minimum_uid (default: 100)
The minimum user ID value that the virtual(8) delivery agent accepts as
a result from $virtual_uid_maps table lookup. Returned values less
than this will be rejected, and the message will be deferred.

This parameter is specific to the virtual(8) delivery agent. It does
not apply when mail is delivered with a different mail delivery
program.

virtual_transport (default: virtual)
The default mail delivery transport and next-hop destination for final
delivery to domains listed with $virtual_mailbox_domains. This
information can be overruled with the transport(5) table.

This feature is available in Postfix 2.0 and later.

virtual_uid_maps (default: empty)
Lookup tables with the per-recipient user ID that the virtual(8)
delivery agent uses while writing to the recipient's mailbox.

This parameter is specific to the virtual(8) delivery agent. It does
not apply when mail is delivered with a different mail delivery
program.

Specify zero or more "type:name" lookup tables, separated by whitespace
or comma. Tables will be searched in the specified order until a match
is found.

In a lookup table, specify a left-hand side of "@domain.tld" to match
any user in the specified domain that does not have a specific
"user@domain.tld" entry.

Note 1: for security reasons, the virtual(8) delivery agent disallows
regular expression substitution of $1 etc. in regular expression lookup
tables, because that would open a security hole.

SEE ALSO
postconf(1), Postfix configuration parameter maintenance
master(5), Postfix daemon configuration maintenance

LICENSE
The Secure Mailer license must be distributed with this software.

AUTHOR(S)
Wietse Venema
IBM T.J. Watson Research
P.O. Box 704
Yorktown Heights, NY 10598, USA

Wietse Venema
Google, Inc.
111 8th Avenue
New York, NY 10011, USA

Viktor Dukhovni

POSTCONF(5)